Home

Acronis Backup & Recovery 11.5 Server for Windows

1. 184 10 6 2 Basic disk cloning 185 10 6 3 Disk conversion MBR to GPT 187 10 6 4 Disk conversion GPT to MBR 188 10 6 5 Disk conversion basic to dynamic 188 10 6 6 Disk conversion dynamic to basic 189 10 6 7 Changing disk status 190 10 7 Volume operations 190 10 7 1 Creating a volume 190 10 7 2 Delete volume
2. 156 8 1 3 Vault selection 156 8 1 4 Access credentials for source 157 8 1 5 When to validate 157 8 1 6 Task credentials 158 8 2 Exporting archives and backups 158 8 2 1 Archive selection 161 8 2 2 Backup selection 161 8 2 3 Access credentials for source 161 8 2 4 Destination selection
3. 233 12 3 Alerts 233 12 4 Changing a license 234 12 5 Collecting system information 235 12 6 Adjusting machine options 235 12 6 1 Additional settings 235 12 6 2 Acronis Customer Experience Program 236 12 6 3 Alerts 236 12 6 4 E mail settings 237 12 6 5 Event tracing
4. 115 5 2 2 Using Universal Restore 116 5 3 Recovering BIOS based systems to UEFI based and vice versa 118 5 3 1 Recovering volumes 119 5 3 2 Recovering disks 120 5 4 Acronis Active Restore 122 6 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 5 5 Bootability troubleshooting 123 5 5 1 How to reactivate GRUB and change its configuration 125 5 5 2 About Windows loaders 126 5 6 Reverting a Windows system to its factory settings
5. 162 8 2 5 Access credentials for destination 163 8 3 Mounting an image 164 8 3 1 Archive selection 164 8 3 2 Backup selection 165 8 3 3 Access credentials 165 7 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 8 3 4 Volume selection 165 8 3 5 Managing mounted images 166 8 4 Operations available in vaults 166 8 4 1 Operations with archives
6. 167 8 4 2 Operations with backups 167 8 4 3 Converting a backup to full 168 8 4 4 Deleting archives and backups 169 9 Bootable media 170 9 1 How to create bootable media 171 9 1 1 Linux based bootable media 172 9 1 2 Adding the Acronis Plug in to WinPE 2 x or 3 x 176 9 2 Connecting to a machine booted from media 178 9 3 Working under bootable media 178 9 3 1 Setting up a display mode
7. 42 4 2 7 Archive validation 51 4 2 8 Backup plan s credentials 52 4 2 9 Label Preserving machine properties in a backup 52 4 2 10 Why is the program asking for the password 54 4 3 Simplified naming of backup files 54 4 3 1 The DATE variable 55 4 3 2 Backup splitting and simplified file naming 56 4 3 3 Usage examples 56 5 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 4 4 Scheduling
8. 178 9 3 2 Configuring iSCSI and NDAS devices 179 9 4 List of commands and utilities available in Linux based bootable media 179 9 5 Acronis Startup Recovery Manager 181 10 Disk management 182 10 1 Supported file systems 182 10 2 Basic precautions 182 10 3 Running Acronis Disk Director Lite 183 10 4 Choosing the operating system for disk management 183 10 5 Disk management view 183 10 6 Disk operations 184 10 6 1 Disk initialization
9. 194 10 7 3 Set active volume 195 10 7 4 Change volume letter 195 10 7 5 Change volume label 196 10 7 6 Format volume 196 10 8 Pending operations 197 11 Protecting applications with disk level backup 198 11 1 Backing up an application server 198 11 1 1 Locating database files 200 11 1 2 Truncating transaction logs
10. 245 13 1 7 Large Scale Recovery FAQ 250 13 1 8 Subscription lifecycle FAQ 252 13 2 Where do I start 254 9 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 13 3 Choosing a subscription 254 13 4 Activating online backup subscriptions 255 13 4 1 Activating subscriptions 256 13 4 2 Reassigning an activated subscription 256 13 5 Configuring proxy settings 257 13 6 Retrieving files from the online storage by using a Web browser 258 13 7 Limitati
11. 146 7 1 1 Working with vaults 147 7 1 2 Personal vaults 147 7 2 Acronis Secure Zone 150 7 2 1 Creating Acronis Secure Zone 150 7 2 2 Managing Acronis Secure Zone 152 7 3 Removable devices 153 8 Operations with archives and backups 155 8 1 Validating archives and backups 155 8 1 1 Archive selection 156 8 1 2 Backup selection
12. 59 4 4 1 Daily schedule 60 4 4 2 Weekly schedule 62 4 4 3 Monthly schedule 64 4 4 4 At Windows Event Log event 66 4 4 5 Conditions 68 4 5 Replication and retention of backups 71 4 5 1 Supported locations 73 4 5 2 Setting up replication of backups 73 4 5 3 Setting up retention of backups
13. 74 4 5 4 Retention rules for the Custom scheme 75 4 5 5 Replication cleanup inactivity time 76 4 5 6 Usage examples 77 4 6 Default backup options 78 4 6 1 Additional settings 81 4 6 2 Archive protection 82 4 6 3 Backup cataloging 82 4 6 4 Backup performance 83 4 6 5 Backup splitting
14. 238 12 6 6 Log cleanup rules 240 12 6 7 Online backup proxy 240 13 Online backup 242 13 1 Introduction to Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online 242 13 1 1 What is Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online 242 13 1 2 What data can I back up and recover 242 13 1 3 How long will my backups be kept in the online storage 243 13 1 4 How to secure my data 243 13 1 5 Backup and recovery FAQ 243 13 1 6 Initial Seeding FAQ
15. 91 4 6 15 Multi volume snapshot 91 4 6 16 Notifications 92 4 6 17 Pre Post commands 93 4 6 18 Pre Post data capture commands 95 4 6 19 Replication cleanup inactivity time 97 4 6 20 Sector by sector backup 97 4 6 21 Task failure handling 97 4 6 22 Task start conditions 98 4 6 23 Volume Shadow Copy Service
16. 17 2 1 3 Console options 20 3 Understanding Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 23 3 1 Owners 23 3 2 Credentials used in backup plans and tasks 23 3 3 User privileges on a managed machine 25 3 4 List of Acronis services 25 3 5 Full incremental and differential backups 27 3 6 What does a disk or volume backup store 28 3 7 Backup and recovery of dynamic volumes Windows 29 3 8 Support for UEFI based machines 31 3 9 Compatibility with encryption software
17. 31 3 10 Support for SNMP 32 4 Backup 34 4 1 Back up now 34 4 2 Creating a backup plan 34 4 2 1 Selecting data to back up 36 4 2 2 Access credentials for source 37 4 2 3 Source files exclusion 37 4 2 4 Backup location selection 39 4 2 5 Access credentials for archive location 41 4 2 6 Backup schemes
18. 99 5 Recovery 101 5 1 Creating a recovery task 101 5 1 1 What to recover 103 5 1 2 Access credentials for location 106 5 1 3 Access credentials for destination 106 5 1 4 Where to recover 107 5 1 5 When to recover 114 5 1 6 Task credentials 114 5 2 Acronis Universal Restore 115 5 2 1 Getting Universal Restore
19. 84 4 6 6 Compression level 85 4 6 7 Disaster recovery plan DRP 86 4 6 8 Error handling 87 4 6 9 Event tracing 87 4 6 10 Fast incremental differential backup 89 4 6 11 File level backup snapshot 89 4 6 12 File level security 89 4 6 13 Media components 90 4 6 14 Mount points
20. 212 11 4 1 Recovering a domain controller other DCs are available 212 11 4 2 Recovering a domain controller no other DCs are available 213 11 4 3 Restoring the Active Directory database 214 11 4 4 Restoring accidentally deleted information 215 11 4 5 Avoiding a USN rollback 215 11 5 Recovering SharePoint data 217 11 5 1 Recovering a content database 217 11 5 2 Recovering configuration and service databases 218 11 5 3 Recovering individual items 219 12 Administering a managed machine
21. 221 12 1 Backup plans and tasks 221 12 1 1 Actions on backup plans and tasks 221 12 1 2 States and statuses of backup plans and tasks 223 12 1 3 Export and import of backup plans 226 12 1 4 Deploying backup plans as files 229 12 1 5 Backup plan details 230 12 1 6 Task activity details 231 12 2 Log 232 12 2 1 Actions on log entries 232 12 2 2 Log entry details
22. 10 1 2 1 Agent for Windows 10 1 2 2 Management Console 11 1 2 3 Bootable Media Builder 11 1 3 About the trial product version 12 1 4 Supported file systems 12 1 5 Technical Support 12 2 Getting started 14 2 1 Using the management console 15 2 1 1 Navigation pane 16 2 1 2 Main area views and action pages
23. Pre Post recovery commands p 133 PE only PE only Recovery priority p 135 129 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 5 7 1 Additional settings Specify the additional settings for the recovery operation by selecting or clearing the following check boxes Set current date and time for recovered files This option is effective only when recovering files The preset is Enabled This option defines whether to recover the files date and time from the archive or assign the files the current date and time Validate backups before recovery The preset is Disabled This option defines whether to validate a backup to ensure that the backup is not corrupted before data is recovered from it Check file system after recovery This option is effective only when recovering disks or volumes The preset is Disabled This option defines whether to check the integrity of the file system after a disk or volume recovery The check takes place either immediately after recovery or after the machine boots into the recovered operating system Restart the machine automatically if it is required for recovery This option is effective when recovery takes place on a machine running an operating system The preset is Disabled The option defines whether to reboot the machine automatically if it is required for recovery Such might be the case when a volume locked by the operating system
24. Windows Small Business Server 2003 2003 R2 Windows Server 2008 the Standard Enterprise editions x86 x64 Windows Small Business Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 the Standard Enterprise Datacenter Foundation editions Windows MultiPoint Server 2010 Windows Small Business Server 2011 Workstation operating systems supported by Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online Windows 2000 Professional SP4 Windows XP Professional SP2 x86 x64 Windows Vista all editions except for Vista Home Basic and Vista Home Premium x86 x64 Windows 7 all editions except for the Starter and Home editions x86 x64 If your backups are likely to exceed the storage quota for this type of subscription you may want to use a subscription with larger storage quota For example you can use a server subscription on a workstation The inverse usage is not possible You cannot back up a server using a workstation subscription Trial subscriptions You can get one free workstation or server subscription per account The storage quota of the trial subscription is equal to that of the standard subscription The subscription period is limited to 2 months Obtaining a trial subscription is possible until you buy a paid subscription You can use a trial subscription along with paid ones The same expiration rules apply to trial and paid subscriptions To continue using the service
25. 203 11 1 3 Best practices when backing up application servers 206 11 2 Recovering SQL Server data 208 11 2 1 Recovering SQL Server databases from a disk backup 208 8 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 11 2 2 Accessing SQL Server databases from a disk backup 209 11 2 3 Attaching SQL Server databases 210 11 3 Recovering Exchange Server data 210 11 3 1 Recovering Exchange Server database files from a disk backup 210 11 3 2 Mounting Exchange Server databases 211 11 3 3 Granular recovery of mailboxes 211 11 4 Recovering Active Directory data
26. Recovering files or folders the aborted operation may cause changes in the destination folder Depending on the time that has passed since the task run some files may be recovered but some not To recover all the files run the task once again 223 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 To Do Edit a plan task Click Edit Backup plan editing is performed in the same way as creation p 34 except for the following limitations It is not always possible to use all scheme options when editing a backup plan if the created archive is not empty i e contains backups 1 It is not possible to change the scheme to Grandfather Father Son or Tower of Hanoi 2 If the Tower of Hanoi scheme is used it is not possible to change the number of levels In all other cases the scheme can be changed and should continue to operate as if existing archives were created by a new scheme For empty archives all changes are possible Clone a backup plan Click Clone The clone of the original backup plan will be created with default name Clone of lt original_plan_name gt The cloned plan will be disabled immediately after cloning so that it does not run concurrently with the original plan You can edit the cloned plan settings before enabling it Enable a plan Click Enable The previously disabled backup plan will run again as scheduled Disable a plan Click Disable The backup plan will not run a
27. 135 6 Conversion to a virtual machine 135 6 1 Conversion methods 135 6 2 Conversion to an automatically created virtual machine 136 6 2 1 Considerations before conversion 137 6 2 2 Setting up regular conversion to a virtual machine 138 6 2 3 Recovery to the New virtual machine destination 141 6 3 Recovery to a manually created virtual machine 144 6 3 1 Considerations before conversion 144 6 3 2 Steps to perform 144 7 Storing the backed up data 146 7 1 Vaults
28. View and manage backup plans and tasks owned by any user on the machine 3 4 List of Acronis services During installation Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 creates several services Some of these services can be used by other Acronis products installed on the machine Services of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 The services include the main service and a number of auxiliary services The main service can run under a dedicated account or under an account you specify during installation Either of the accounts is given privileges that are needed for the service to work The privileges include a set of user rights membership in security groups and the Full Control permissions on registry keys in the following key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Acronis There are no permissions granted on other registry keys The following table lists the services of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 and the privileges for their accounts Service name Purpose Account used by the service Privileges added to the account User rights Group membership Permissions on registry keys 26 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Service name Purpose Account used by the service Privileges added to the account User rights Group membership Permissions on registry keys Acronis Managed Machine Service Main service Backing up and recovering data on the machine Acronis Agent User new account or
29. 5 1 6 Task credentials Provide credentials for the account under which the task will run 115 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Run under the current user The task will run under the credentials with which the user who starts the tasks is logged on If the task has to run on schedule you will be asked for the current user s password on completing the task creation Use the following credentials The task will always run under the credentials you specify whether started manually or executed on schedule Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK To learn more about using credentials in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 see the Credentials used in backup plans and tasks p 23 section To learn more about operations available depending on the user privileges see the User privileges on a managed machine p 25 section 5 2 Acronis Universal Restore Acronis Universal Restore is the Acronis proprietary technology that helps recover and boot up an operating system on dissimilar hardware or a virtual machine Universal Restore handles differences in devices that are critical for the operating system start up such as storage controllers motherboard or chipset
30. 241 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 If you do not know the proxy server settings contact your network administrator or Internet service provider for assistance Alternatively you can try to take these settings from your Web browser s configuration This is how to find them in three popular browsers Microsoft Internet Explorer On the Tools menu click Internet Options On the Connections tab click LAN settings Mozilla Firefox On the Tools menu click Options and then click Advanced On the Network tab under Connection click Settings Google Chrome In Options click Under the Hood Under Network click Change proxy settings 242 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 13 Online backup This section provides details about using the Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online service This service enables you to do online backups to Acronis Online Backup Storage Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online might be unavailable in your region To find more information click here http www acronis com my backup recovery online To configure backup to the online storage or recovery from the storage follow the regular steps described in the corresponding sections Creating a backup plan p 34 Creating a centralized backup plan Recovering data p 101 The main difference is that you select the online storage as the backup destination Host based backups of virtual machines a
31. Mirrored RAID 5 You will obtain a brief description of every type of volume for better understanding of the advantages and limitations of each possible volume architecture If the current operating system installed on this machine does not support the selected type of volume you will receive the appropriate warning In this case the Next button will be disabled and you will have to select another type of volume to proceed with the new volume creation After you click the Next button you will proceed forward to the next wizard page Select destination disks p 192 Select destination disks The next wizard page will prompt you to choose the disks whose space will be used for the volume creation To create a basic volume Select a destination disk and specify the unallocated space to create the basic volume on To create a Simple Spanned volume Select one or more destination disks to create the volume on To create a Mirrored volume Select two destination disks to create the volume on 193 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 To create a Striped volume Select two or more destination disks to create the volume on To create a RAID 5 volume Select three destination disks to create the volume on After you choose the disks the wizard will calculate the maximum size of the resulting volume depending on the size of the unallocated space on the disks you chose
32. The machine BIOS is configured to boot from another HDD Solution Configure the BIOS to boot from the HDD where the operating system resides The system was recovered on dissimilar hardware and the new hardware is incompatible with the most critical drivers included in the backup Solution Boot the machine using bootable media and apply Acronis Universal Restore p 116 to install the appropriate drivers and modules Windows was recovered to a dynamic volume that cannot be bootable Solution Recover Windows to a basic simple or mirrored volume A system volume was recovered to a disk that does not have an MBR When you configure recovery of a system volume to a disk that does not have an MBR the program prompts whether you want to recover the MBR along with the system volume Opt for not recovering only if you do not want the system to be bootable Solution Recover the volume once again along with the MBR of the corresponding disk The system uses Acronis OS Selector Because the Master Boot Record MBR can be changed during the system recovery Acronis OS Selector which uses the MBR might become inoperable If this happens reactivate Acronis OS Selector as follows Solution Boot the machine from the Acronis Disk Director s bootable media and select in the menu Tools gt Activate OS Selector The system uses GRand Unified Bootloader GRUB and was recovered from a normal not from a raw that is
33. Universal Restore is extremely useful in the following scenarios 1 Instant recovery of a failed system on different hardware 2 Hardware independent cloning and deployment of operating systems 3 Physical to physical physical to virtual and virtual to physical machine migration 5 2 1 Getting Universal Restore Universal Restore is always available when recovering a system from the online storage Universal Restore is purchased separately It has its own license To enable Universal Restore on a managed machine do any of the following Install Universal Restore from the product installation package in addition to Agent for Windows or Bootable Media Builder If the agent is already installed you can connect the management console to the machine click Help gt Change license and specify the license key or the license server from where to take the Universal Restore license You need to re create bootable media to make the newly installed add on operational in the bootable environment 116 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 5 2 2 Using Universal Restore During recovery Universal Restore is available when configuring a disk or volume recovery if a Windows or Linux operating system is present in your selection of disks or volumes If there are more than one operating systems in your selection you can apply Universal Restore to all Windows systems all Linux systems or to both Windows and L
34. You reinstalled Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 on a machine and want to resume its online backups You recovered a machine to bare metal or to a state when it did not yet have an activated subscription and want to resume its online backups Reassigning a subscription does not restart its subscription period To assign an activated subscription to a machine 1 On the machine to which you want to assign an activated subscription go to the subscription activation window 2 From Activated subscriptions select the activated subscription that you want to reassign to the machine 3 Click Activate now Example The diagram below shows what happens if you reassign a subscription to a different machine Let s assume Machine 1 has four backups in Subscription 1 Machine 2 has two backups in Subscription 2 At that point you reassign Subscription 1 to Machine 2 Machine 2 does its third backup to Subscription 1 257 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Depending on your settings this backup will be either full or incremental But its size is not likely to be less than a full backup size Therefore it is not practical to reassign a subscription to a machine whose first backup was done as an initial seeding You will need to either redo the initial seeding which requires a new license or to transfer the sizeable backup over the Internet All earlier created backups remain intact You can delete them manua
35. Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 User Guide Applies to the following editions Advanced Server Virtual Edition Advanced Server SBS Edition Advanced Workstation Server for Linux Server for Windows Workstation 3 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Copyright Statement Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 All rights reserved Acronis and Acronis Secure Zone are registered trademarks of Acronis International GmbH Acronis Compute with Confidence Acronis Startup Recovery Manager Acronis Active Restore Acronis Instant Restore and the Acronis logo are trademarks of Acronis International GmbH Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds VMware and VMware Ready are trademarks and or registered trademarks of VMware Inc in the United States and or other jurisdictions Windows and MS DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All other trademarks and copyrights referred to are the property of their respective owners Distribution of substantively modified versions of this document is prohibited without the explicit permission of the copyright holder Distribution of this work or derivative work in any standard paper book form for commercial purposes is prohibited unless prior permission is obtained from the copyright holder DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED AS IS AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CON
36. Automating log truncation and shrinking You can automate the above truncation procedure by using a script and optionally add log file shrinking If you add the script to the Post backup command p 95 the logs will be truncated and shrunk immediately after a backup This method assumes that you have Transact SQL scripting skills and are familiar the sqlcmd utility For more information about Transact SQL and sqlcmd refer to the following articles Using Transact SQL http technet microsoft com en us library ms189826 v sql 90 Using the sqlcmd utility http technet microsoft com en us library ms170572 SQL 90 aspx To automate transaction log truncation and shrinking for an SQL instance 1 Using the following template create a script that will truncate and shrink the log files for the databases of the instance USE database_name ALTER DATABASE database_name SET RECOVERY SIMPLE DBCC SHRINKFILE logfile_name ALTER DATABASE database_name SET RECOVERY FULL In the last string the SET RECOVERY value depends on the original recovery model of the particular database and could be FULL or BULK_LOGGED Example for an instance having two databases TestDB1 and TestDB2 USE TestDB1 ALTER DATABASE TestDB1 SET RECOVERY SIMPLE DBCC SHRINKFILE TestDB1_log ALTER DATABASE TestDB1 SET RECOVERY FULL USE TestDB2 ALTER DATABASE TestDB2 SET RECOVERY SIMPLE DBCC SHRINKFILE TestDB2_log ALTER DATABASE TestDB2 SET RECOVERY BUL
37. Bootable Media Builder supports only x86 WinPE 2 x or 3 x These WinPE distributions can also work on x64 hardware PE images based on Win PE 2 x or 3 x require at least 640 MB RAM to work 177 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Adding Acronis Plug in to WinPE 2 x or 3 x ISO To add Acronis Plug in to WinPE 2 x or 3 x ISO 1 When adding the plug in to the existing Win PE ISO unpack all files of your Win PE ISO to a separate folder on the hard disk 2 Start the Bootable Media Builder either from the management console by selecting Tools gt Create Bootable Media or as a separate component 3 If Agent for Windows or Agent for Linux is not installed on the machine specify the license key or the license server with licenses The licenses will not get assigned or reassigned They determine which functionality to enable for the created media Without a license you can create media only for recovery from the online backup storage If Agent for Windows or Agent for Linux is installed on the machine the media inherits its functionality including Universal Restore and deduplication 4 Select Bootable media type Windows PE When creating a new PE ISO Select Create Windows PE 2 x or 3 0 automatically The software runs the appropriate script and proceeds to the next window When adding the plug in to the existing PE ISO Select Use WinPE files located in the folder I specify Specify path
38. To track object versions Active Directory uses numbers called Update Sequence Numbers USNs Newer versions of Active Directory objects correspond to higher USNs Each domain controller keeps the USNs of all other domain controllers 216 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 USN rollback After you perform a nonauthoritative restore of a domain controller or of its database the current USN of that domain controller is replaced by the old lower USN from the backup But the other domain controllers are not aware of this change They still keep the latest known higher USN of that domain controller As a result the following issues occur The recovered domain controller reuses older USNs for new objects it starts with the old USN from the backup The other domain controllers do not replicate the new objects from the recovered domain controller as long as its USN remains lower than the one they are aware of Active Directory starts having different objects that correspond to the same USN i e becomes inconsistent This situation is called a USN rollback To avoid a USN rollback you need to notify the domain controller about the fact that it has been recovered To avoid a USN rollback 1 Immediately after recovering an entire domain controller or its database boot the recovered domain controller and press F8 during startup 2 On the Advanced Boot Options screen select Directory Services Restor
39. Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Result Preset Continue the backup only after the command is successfully executed Delete the TIB file and temporary files and fail the task if the command execution fails Continue the backup after the command is executed despite command execution failure or success N A Continue the backup concurrently with the command execution and irrespective of the command execution result A command is considered failed if its exit code is not equal to zero 4 6 19 Replication cleanup inactivity time This option is effective only if you set up replication or retention rules p 71 for the backups This option defines a time period when starting replication or applying retention rules is not allowed The operations will be performed when the inactivity time ends if the machine is powered on at that moment The operations that had started before the inactivity time began continue without interruption The inactivity time affects all locations including the primary one The preset is Disabled To specify the inactivity time select the Do not start replication cleanup within the following time check box and then select the days and the time period during the day Usage example You may want to use this option to separate the backup process from replication or cleanup For example suppose that you back up machines locally during the day and replicate the backups to a net
40. Recovering volumes p 119 and Recovering disks p 120 in this section Recommendations Recover the entire system onto uninitialized disks When migrating to UEFI based hardware use Linux based bootable media PE based bootable media and Acronis PXE Server do not support UEFI Remember that BIOS does not allow using more than 2 TB of disk space Limitations Transferring a Linux system between UEFI and BIOS is not supported Transferring a Windows system between UEFI and BIOS is not supported if a backup is stored in any of these locations Acronis Online Backup Storage 119 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Tape device Optical discs CDs DVDs or Blu ray discs When transferring a system between UEFI and BIOS is not supported Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 initializes the target disk with the same partitioning scheme as the original disk No adjustment of the operating system is performed If the target machine supports both UEFI and BIOS you need to enable the boot mode corresponding to the original machine Otherwise the system will not boot 5 3 1 Recovering volumes Let s assume you backed up the system and boot volumes or the entire machine and want to recover these volumes to a different platform The ability of the recovered system to boot up depends on the following factors Source operating system convertible or non convertible OS The fo
41. Simplified naming will be used whenever the backup destination supports it see Restrictions below When you use simplified file naming The file name of the first full backup in the archive will consist of the archive name for example MyData tib The file names of subsequent incremental or differential backups will have an index For example MyData2 tib MyData3 tib and so on This simple naming scheme enables you to create a portable image of a machine on a detachable media or move the backups to a different location by using a script Before creating a new full backup the software will delete the entire archive and start a new one This behavior is useful when you rotate USB hard drives and want each drive to keep a single full backup p 57 or all backups created during a week p 57 But you might end up with no backups if a full backup to your only drive fails This behavior can be suppressed by adding the Date variable p 55 to the archive name When you use standard file naming Each backup will have a unique file name with the exact time stamp and the backup type For example MyData_2010_03_26_17_01_38_960D tib This standard file naming allows for a wider range of backup destinations and backup schemes Restrictions When using simplified file naming the following functionality is not available 55 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Setting up full incremental and diffe
42. Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer 8 2 4 Destination selection Specify a destination where the exported object will be stored Exporting backups to the same archive is not allowed 1 Selecting the export destination Enter the full path to the destination in the Path field or select the desired destination in the tree To export data to a centralized unmanaged vault expand the Centralized vaults group and click the vault To export data to a personal vault expand the Personal vaults group and click the vault To export data to a local folder on the machine expand the Local folders group and click the required folder To export data to a network share expand the Network folders group select the required networked machine and then click the shared folder If the network share requires access credentials the program will ask for them Note for Linux users To specify a Common Internet File System CIFS network share which is mounted on a mount point such as mnt share select th
43. 127 5 7 Default recovery options 127 5 7 1 Additional settings 129 5 7 2 Error handling 129 5 7 3 Event tracing 130 5 7 4 File level security 131 5 7 5 Mount points 131 5 7 6 Notifications 132 5 7 7 Pre Post commands 133 5 7 8 Recovery priority
44. Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Direct management An operation that is performed on a managed machine p 272 using the direct console p 266 agent p 263 connection as opposed to centralized management p 265 when the operations are configured on the management server p 272 and propagated by the server to the managed machines The direct management operations include creating and managing local backup plans p 271 creating and managing local tasks p 271 such as recovery tasks creating and managing personal vaults p 273 and archives stored there viewing the state progress and properties of the centralized tasks p 266 existing on the machine viewing and managing the log of the agent s operations disk management operations such as clone a disk create volume convert volume A kind of direct management is performed when using bootable media p 265 Disaster recovery plan DRP An e mail message that contains a list of backed up data items and detailed instructions on how to recover these items from a backup If the corresponding backup option p 264 is enabled a DRP is sent to the specified e mail addresses after the first successful backup performed by the backup plan and also after any change to the list of data items or the DRP parameters Disk backup Image A backup p 263 that contains a sector based copy of a disk or a volume in a pa
45. Decreasing Acronis Secure Zone To decrease Acronis Secure Zone 1 On the Manage Acronis Secure Zone page click Decrease 2 Select volumes that will receive free space after the zone is decreased 3 Specify the new size of the zone by dragging the slider and selecting any size between the current and minimum values The minimum size is approximately 50MB depending on the geometry of the hard disk typing an exact value in the Acronis Secure Zone Size field 4 Click OK 7 2 2 3 Deleting Acronis Secure Zone To delete Acronis Secure Zone 1 On the Manage Acronis Secure Zone page click Delete 2 In the Delete Acronis Secure Zone window select volumes to which you want to add the space freed from the zone and then click OK If you select several volumes the space will be distributed proportionally to each partition If you do not select any volume the freed space becomes unallocated After you click OK Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 will start deleting the zone 7 3 Removable devices This section describes peculiarities of backing up to removable devices By a removable device we mean an RDX drive or USB flash drive A USB hard disk drive is not considered to be a removable device unless it is recognized as such by the operating system In Linux an RDX drive or USB flash drive is considered to be a removable device if it is specified by its name for example sdf If a device is specified by its moun
46. Example 2 Daily full backups with a date stamp Consider the following scenario You want to perform a daily full backup of your machine You want to move older backups to a remote location by using a script In this scenario create a backup plan with a daily schedule When creating the backup plan specify MyMachine DATE as the archive name select the Name backup files using the archive name check box and select Full as the backup type Result The backups of January 1 2012 January 2 2012 and so on are stored respectively as MyMachine 2012 01 01 tib MyMachine 2012 01 02 tib and so on Your script can move older backups based on the date stamp See also The Date variable p 55 4 3 3 3 Example 3 Hourly backups within a day Consider the following scenario 57 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 You want to perform hourly backups of your server s critical files every day You want the first backup of each day to be full and to run at midnight and the subsequent backups of the day to be differential and to run at 01 00 02 00 and so on You want to keep older backups in the archive In this scenario create a backup plan with a daily schedule When creating the backup plan specify ServerFiles Date as the archive name select the Name backup files using the archive name check box specify Differential as the backup type and schedule the
47. No user action is required A yellow background means that you need to perform additional steps to make the system bootable These steps are not possible on some machines A red background means that the system will not be able to boot due to BIOS and UEFI platform limitations Original system Target hardware BIOS Disk MBR BIOS Disk GPT UEFI Disk MBR UEFI Disk GPT 120 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Original system Target hardware BIOS Disk MBR BIOS Disk GPT UEFI Disk MBR UEFI Disk GPT BIOS OS convertible Solution Recover the operating system to an MBR disk or to an uninitialized disk The target machine must support BIOS Additional steps 1 Before recovery turn off the UEFI mode in BIOS 2 Perform the recovery under the bootable media or After recovery turn off the UEFI mode in BIOS The convertible OS will be automatically converted to support UEFI booting BIOS OS non convertible Solution Recover the operating system to an MBR disk or to an uninitialized disk UEFI OS convertible The convertible OS will be automatically converted to support BIOS booting The target machine must support UEFI Additional steps 1 Before recovery turn on the UEFI mode in BIOS 2 Perform the recovery under the bootable media or After recovery turn on the UEFI mod
48. Primary button is not selected the Active option will be inactive If the volume is intended for data storage select Logical A Basic disk can contain up to four primary volumes If they already exist the disk will have to be converted into dynamic otherwise or Active and Primary options will be disabled and you will only be able to select the Logical volume type The warning message will advise you that an OS installed on this volume will not be bootable If you use characters when setting a new volume label that are unsupported by the currently installed operation system you will get the appropriate warning and the Next button will be disabled You will have to change the label to proceed with the creation of the new volume If you click the Back button you will be returned to the previous page Set the volume size p 193 If you click the Finish button you will complete the operation planning To perform the planned operation click Commit in the toolbar and then click Proceed in the Pending Operations window If you set a 64K cluster size for FAT16 FAT32 or on 8KB 64KB cluster size for NTFS Windows can mount the volume but some programs e g Setup programs might calculate its disk space incorrectly 10 7 2 Delete volume This version of Acronis Disk Director Lite has reduced functionality because it is mainly a tool for preparing bare metal systems for recovering previously saved volume images The features of resizing the e
49. Qo Qn where Pn new subscription remaining period Po old subscription remaining period 254 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Qo old subscription storage quota Qn new subscription storage quota Example You have a 250 GB subscription and you decide to increase its storage quota 2 months before the subscription expiration The new subscription storage quota is 500 GB So the new subscription remaining period will be Pn 2 months 250 GB 500 GB 1 month To increase a storage quota 1 Go to the account management Web page 2 Select the machine for which you want to increase a storage quota and then click Increase 3 If the existing subscription has the maximum available storage quota for this subscription type the software notifies you Otherwise select the new storage quota 4 Click Increase and then click OK to confirm the operation 13 1 8 7 What is the Group column for So you can apply actions such as Renew all or Auto renew all to your selection of the subscriptions Specify the desired group name for example SalesDept near each of the subscriptions you want to group Click the Group column header to sort the subscriptions and then apply the desired actions to the group 13 1 8 8 Can I revoke a subscription from a machine You cannot return an activated subscription to the list of available subscriptions but you can reassign p
50. Step 2 Send the drive via your preferred carrier to the Acronis datacenter Step 3 Let us know when you have shipped the order by marking your order as shipped You will receive a notification message when Acronis receives the order and when the order is completed If necessary Acronis may contact you during order processing Occasional Backup creation error An error occurred when backing up Please check the backup plan parameters and try again The media has been shipped This status is set after you mark the order as shipped The media has been received by Acronis Acronis has started processing your order From this point on you cannot cancel the order Creating a new initial seeding backup will require a new Initial Seeding license The data upload has started The process of uploading data to Acronis Online Backup Storage has started The data upload has been completed The initial full backup has been successfully uploaded to the online storage You can do incremental online backups now 250 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 The order has been completed The media has been returned or Returning the media was not requested Your media has been shipped back the carrier and the tracking number are specified If a prepaid shipping label was not provided with the media the media will be discarded Occasional The order is on hold Your order was
51. Without this parameter all startup messages will be displayed followed by a command prompt To start the management console from the command prompt run the command bin product 174 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 nousb Disables loading of the USB Universal Serial Bus subsystem nousb2 Disables USB 2 0 support USB 1 1 devices still work with this parameter This parameter allows you to use some USB drives in the USB 1 1 mode if they do not work in the USB 2 0 mode nodma Disables direct memory access DMA for all IDE hard disk drives Prevents the kernel from freezing on some hardware nofw Disables the FireWire IEEE1394 interface support nopcmcia Disables detection of PCMCIA hardware nomouse Disables mouse support module_name off Disables the module whose name is given by module_name For example to disable the use of the SATA module specify sata_sis off pci bios Forces the use of PCI BIOS instead of accessing the hardware device directly You may want to use this parameter if the machine has a non standard PCI host bridge pci nobios Disables the use of PCI BIOS only direct hardware access methods will be allowed You may want to use this parameter when the bootable media fails to start which may be caused by the BIOS pci biosirq Uses PCI BIOS calls to get the interrupt routing table You may want to use this parameter if the kernel is unable to allocate interrupt
52. Yes No You can set the option to clean up the archive When there is insufficient space while backing up within the Custom p 46 backup scheme Yes No Simplified naming p 54 of backup files is unavailable is always used You can replicate backups p 73 to the removable device Yes No You can replicate backups from the removable device No No An archive with several full backups can be created Yes No Before creating a new full backup the software will delete the entire archive and start a new one You can delete any backup of an archive Yes No You can delete only a backup that does not have dependent backups Since the removable device mode determines the naming scheme for backup files the Name backup files using the archive name check box does not appear when the backup destination is a removable device 155 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 8 Operations with archives and backups 8 1 Validating archives and backups Validation is an operation that checks the possibility of data recovery from a backup Validation of a file backup imitates recovery of all files from the backup to a dummy destination Validation of a disk or volume backup calculates a checksum for every data block saved in the backup Both procedures are resource intensive Validation of an archive will validate all the archive s backups A vault or a location validation will validate all the
53. backing up recovery exporting a backup cataloging a vault An activity may be initiated by a user or by the software itself Execution of a task p 274 always causes one or more activities Agent Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Agent An application that performs data backup and recovery and enables other management operations on the machine p 272 such as task management and operations with hard disks The type of data that can be backed up depends on the agent type Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 includes the agents for backing up disks and files and the agents for backing up virtual machines residing on virtualization servers Archive See Backup archive p 263 B Backup A backup is the result of a single backup operation p 263 Physically it is a file or a tape record that contains a copy of the backed up data as of a specific date and time Backup files created by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 have a TIB extension The TIB files which are the result of a backup export p 270 or consolidation p 267 are also called backups Backup archive Archive A set of backups p 263 created and managed by a backup plan p 264 An archive can contain multiple full backups p 270 as well as incremental p 271 and differential backups p 267 Backups belonging to the same archive are always stored in the same location If the backup plan includes replication p 273 or moving of backups to multiple lo
54. configured and controlled either locally through the GUI or remotely using the console p 266 Bootable media A physical media CD DVD USB flash drive or other media supported by a machine p 272 as a boot device that contains the bootable agent p 264 or Windows Preinstallation Environment WinPE p 275 with the Acronis Plug in for WinPE p 262 A machine can also be booted into the above environments using the network boot from Acronis PXE Server or Windows Deployment Service WDS These servers with uploaded bootable components can also be thought of as a kind of bootable media Bootable media is most often used to recover an operating system that cannot start access and back up the data that has survived in a corrupted system deploy an operating system on bare metal create basic or dynamic volumes p 270 on bare metal back up sector by sector a disk that has an unsupported file system back up offline any data that cannot be backed up online because of restricted access being permanently locked by the running applications or for any other reason Built in group A group of machines permanently located on a management server p 272 Built in groups cannot be deleted moved to other groups or manually modified Custom groups cannot be created within built in groups There is no way to remove a machine from the built in group except by removing the machine from the management ser
55. destination disk Size p 111 Optional Change the recovered volume size location and other properties MBR destination To specify a destination disk 1 Select the disk to recover the MBR to 2 Click OK Volume destination To specify a target volume or unallocated space 1 Select a volume or unallocated space where you want the selected volume to be recovered to The destination volume unallocated space should be at least the same size as the uncompressed image data 2 Click OK All the data stored on the target volume will be replaced by the backed up data so be careful and watch out for non backed up data that you might need When using bootable media Disk letters seen under Windows style bootable media might differ from the way Windows identifies drives For example the D drive in the rescue utility might correspond to the E drive in Windows Be careful To be on the safe side it is advisable to assign unique names to the volumes The Linux style bootable media shows local disks and volumes as unmounted sda1 sda2 Changing volume properties Size and location When recovering a volume to a basic MBR disk you can resize and relocate the volume by dragging it or its borders with a mouse or by entering corresponding values in the appropriate fields Using this feature you can redistribute the disk space between the volumes being recovered In this case you will have to recover the volume to be reduced f
56. has changed by the file size and the date time when the file was last saved Restart the machine automatically after backup is finished This option is available only when operating under bootable media The preset is Disabled When the option is enabled Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 will restart the machine after the backup process is completed 82 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 For example if the machine boots from a hard disk drive by default and you select this check box the machine will be restarted and the operating system will start as soon as the bootable agent has finished creating the backup 4 6 2 Archive protection This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media This option is effective for both disk level and file level backup This option defines whether the archive will be protected with a password and whether the archive s content will be encrypted This option is not available when the archive already contains backups For example this option may not be available When you specify an already existing archive as the destination of the backup plan When you edit a backup plan that has already resulted in a backup The preset is Disabled To protect the archive from unauthorized access 1 Select the Set password for the archive check box 2 In the Enter the password field type a password 3 In the Confirm the password field
57. mirrored RAID 0 1 RAID 5 This can be done by deleting the target volume and creating a new volume on the resulting unallocated space Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 includes a handy disk management utility which enables you to perform the above operations both under the operating system and on bare metal To find out more about Acronis Disk Director Lite see the Disk management p 182 section 3 8 Support for UEFI based machines Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 can back up and recover machines that use Unified Extensible Firmware Interface UEFI in the same way as it does for machines that use BIOS for booting This applies to both physical and virtual machines no matter if the virtual machines are backed up at a hypervisor level or from inside a guest OS For details about transferring Windows machines between UEFI and BIOS see Recovering BIOS based systems to UEFI based or vice versa p 118 Limitations WinPE based bootable media does not support UEFI booting Use Linux based bootable media on machines with UEFI boot firmware Acronis Active Restore p 262 is not available on UEFI machines Acronis Startup Recovery Manager ASRM p 262 is not available on UEFI machines 3 9 Compatibility with encryption software Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 fully retains its functionality when interacting with file level encryption software Disk level encryption software encrypts data on the fly T
58. on the machine You want to store a copy of the backups in a network folder In this scenario create a backup plan with the Manual start scheme When creating the backup plan specify Acronis Secure Zone in the Path field select Full in the Backup type field select the Replicate just created backup to another location check box and then specify the network folder in the 2nd location field Result You can recover the machine s volumes or files from a readily available local backup which is stored in a dedicated area of the hard disk You can recover the machine from the network folder if the machine s hard disk drive fails 4 5 6 2 Example 2 Limiting the age and total size of stored backups Consider the following scenario You want to perform a weekly full backup of your machine You want to keep all backups that are younger than a month You want to keep even older backups as long as the total size of all backups stays below 200 GB In this scenario create a backup plan with the Custom scheme When creating the backup plan specify a weekly schedule for the full backup In Clean up archive select Using retention rules Click Retention rules select the Backups older than and the Archive size greater than check boxes and specify respectively 1 month and 200 GB In If the specified conditions are met select Delete the oldest backups Click OK In Apply retention rules select the Aft
59. operating on the managed machine have to send the log events of the backup operations to the specified Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP managers You can choose the types of events to be sent For detailed information about using SNMP with Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 please see Support for SNMP p 32 The preset is Use the setting set in the Machine options To select whether to send the backup operations events to the SNMP managers Choose one of the following Use the setting set in the Machine options to use the setting specified for the machine For more information refer to Machine options Send SNMP notifications individually for backup operation events to send the events of the backup operations to the specified SNMP managers Types of events to send choose the types of events to be sent All events Errors and warnings or Errors only Server name IP type the name or IP address of the host running the SNMP management application the messages will be sent to Community type the name of the SNMP community to which both the host running the SNMP management application and the sending machine belong The typical community is public Click Send test message to check if the settings are correct Do not send SNMP notifications to disable sending the log events of the backup operations to SNMP managers 4 6 9 2 Windows event log This option is effe
60. operation in the same way as under regular bootable media use Active Restore or Universal Restore If the media is being created in Windows the disk management functionality will also be available Acronis Bootable Agent and One Click Restore The One Click Restore is the minimal addition to a disk backup stored on removable media allowing for easy recovery from this backup If you boot a machine from the media and click Run Acronis One click Restore the disk will be immediately recovered from the backup contained on the same media Caution Because the one click approach does not presume user selections such as selecting volumes to recover Acronis One Click Restore always recovers the entire disk If your disk contains several volumes and 91 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 you are planning to use Acronis One Click Restore include all the volumes in the backup Any volumes missing from the backup will be lost 4 6 14 Mount points This option is effective only in Windows for a file level backup of a data source that includes mounted volumes or cluster shared volumes This option is effective only when you select for backup a folder that is higher in the folder hierarchy than the mount point A mount point is a folder on which an additional volume is logically attached If such folder a parent folder is selected for backup and the Mount points option is enabled all files located on the mounted vol
61. re type the password 4 Select one of the following Do not encrypt the archive will be protected with the password only AES 128 the archive will be encrypted using the Advanced Encryption Standard AES algorithm with a 128 bit key AES 192 the archive will be encrypted using the AES algorithm with a 192 bit key AES 256 the archive will be encrypted using the AES algorithm with a 256 bit key 5 Click OK The AES cryptographic algorithm operates in the Cipher block chaining CBC mode and uses a randomly generated key with a user defined size of 128 192 or 256 bits The larger the key size the longer it will take for the program to encrypt the archive and the more secure your data will be The encryption key is then encrypted with AES 256 using a SHA 256 hash of the password as a key The password itself is not stored anywhere on the disk or in the backup file the password hash is used for verification purposes With this two level security the backup data is protected from any unauthorized access but recovering a lost password is not possible 4 6 3 Backup cataloging Cataloging a backup adds the contents of the backup to the data catalog Using the data catalog you can easily find the required version of data and select it for recovery The Backup cataloging option specifies whether full or fast cataloging will be performed on a backup as soon as the backup is created The preset is Ful
62. scheduled sessions Number of levels Select from 2 to 16 backup levels See the example stated below for details Roll back period The guaranteed number of sessions that one can go back in the archive at any time Calculated automatically depending on the schedule parameters and the numbers of levels you select See the example below for details Backup type Specifies what backup types the backup levels will have Always full all levels of backups will be full This is the default selection for cases when a tape drive is selected as a backup location Full Differential Incremental backups of different levels will have different types Last level backups are full Backups of intermediate levels are differential First level backups are incremental Example Schedule parameters are set as follows Recur Every 1 day Frequency Once at 6 PM Number of levels 4 Backup type Full Differential Incremental This is how the first 14 days or 14 sessions of this scheme s schedule look Shaded numbers denote backup levels 50 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4 1 2 1 3 1 2 1 4 1 2 1 3 1 Backups of different levels have different types Last level in this case level 4 backups are full Backups of intermediate levels 2 3 are differential First level 1 backups are incremental A cleanu
63. select this check box if you wish to start the task manually later On schedule to schedule the task To learn more about how to configure the scheduling parameters please see the Scheduling p 59 section 8 1 6 Task credentials Provide credentials for the account under which the task will run To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Run under the current user The task will run under the credentials with which the user who starts the tasks is logged on If the task has to run on schedule you will be asked for the current user s password on completing the task creation Use the following credentials The task will always run under the credentials you specify whether started manually or executed on schedule Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK To learn more about using credentials in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 see the Owners and credentials p 23 section To learn more about operations available depending on the user privileges see the User privileges on a managed machine p 25 section 8 2 Exporting archives and backups The export operation creates a copy of an archive or a self sufficient part copy of an archive in the location you specify The original archive remains untouched The e
64. the Information panel at the bottom of the Log view Use filters to display the desired activities and log entries in the table You can also hide the unneeded columns and show the hidden ones For details see Sorting filtering and configuring table items p 18 Select the activity or log entry to take an action on log entries For details see Actions on log entries p 232 and Log entry details p 233 12 2 1 Actions on log entries All the operations described below are performed by clicking the corresponding items on the log toolbar These operations can also be performed with the context menu by right clicking the log entry or the activity The following is a guideline for you to perform actions on log entries To Do Select a single activity Select Activities in the Display drop down list and click an activity The Information pane will show log entries for the selected activity Select a single log entry Click on it Select multiple log entries non contiguous hold down CTRL and click the log entries one by one contiguous select a single log entry then hold down SHIFT and click another log entry All the log entries between the first and last selections will be selected too View a log entry s details 1 Select a log entry 2 Do one of the following Double click the selection Click Details The log entry s details will be displayed See Log entry details for details
65. you can safely delete Enn0000060A log Enn00000609 log and the lesser files Log truncation after a backup You can automate the above truncation procedure by using a script If you add the script to the Post backup command p 95 the logs will be truncated immediately after a backup This method assumes that you have scripting skills and are familiar with Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 command line utility acrocmd For detailed information about acrocmd see the Command Line Reference The script should contain the following steps 1 Mount the volumes containing the necessary database files by using the mount command Template acrocmd mount loc lt path gt credentials lt user name gt lt password gt arc lt archive name gt volume lt volume numbers gt letter lt letters gt Example acrocmd mount loc bkpsrv backups credentials user1 pass1 arc my_arc volume 1 1 letter Z 2 In the mounted volumes determine which logs have been committed to the database by using the Eseutil tool The procedure is described in step 1 of Log truncation of online databases above 3 In the respective online database or storage group delete all the log files whose numbers are less than the number of the current log file in the backup 4 Unmount the mounted volumes by using the umount command 11 1 3 Best practices when backing up application servers 11 1 3 1 Exchange Server backup If you are not us
66. you will need to correct the GRUB configuration files If the number of the Linux root partition has changed it is also recommended that you change etc fstab so that the SWAP volume can be accessed correctly Linux was recovered from an LVM volume backup to a basic MBR disk Such system cannot boot because its kernel tries to mount the root file system at the LVM volume Solution Change the loader configuration and etc fstab so that the LVM is not used and reactivate the boot loader 5 5 1 How to reactivate GRUB and change its configuration Generally you should refer to the boot loader manual pages for the appropriate procedure There is also the corresponding Knowledge Base article on the Acronis Web site The following is an example of how to reactivate GRUB in case the system disk volume is recovered to identical hardware 1 Start Linux or boot from the bootable media and then press CTRL ALT F2 2 Mount the system you are recovering mkdir mnt system mount t ext3 dev sda2 mnt system root partition mount t ext3 dev sda1 mnt system boot boot partition 3 Mount the proc and dev file systems to the system you are recovering mount t proc none mnt system proc mount o bind dev mnt system dev 4 Save a copy of the GRUB menu file by running one of the following commands cp mnt system boot grub menu lst mnt system boot grub menu lst backup or cp mnt system boot grub grub conf mnt system
67. 208 If you only need temporary access to the backed up databases for data mining or data extraction mount a disk backup and access the required data For details see Accessing SQL Server databases from a disk backup p 209 11 2 1 Recovering SQL Server databases from a disk backup This section describes how to recover SQL Server databases from a disk backup For the instructions how to find out the database paths refer to SQL Server database files p 200 To recover SQL Server databases 1 Connect the console to the machine on which you are going to perform the operation 2 Navigate to the vault containing the disk backup with the SQL Server database files 3 Click the Data view tab In the Show list click Folders files 4 Select the required SQL Server database files and click Recover By default the data will be reverted to the state of the latest backup If you need to select another point in time to revert the data to use the Versions list 209 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 5 On the recovery page under What to recover section a In Data paths select Custom b In Browse specify a folder where the files will be recovered to Note We recommend that you recover the SQL server database files to a folder local to the SQL Server since all of the SQL Server versions earlier than SQL Server 2012 do not support databases located on network shares c Leave the rest of the settings as is
68. 269 Acronis Secure Zone is considered as a personal vault p 273 Acronis Startup Recovery Manager ASRM A modification of the bootable agent p 264 residing on the system disk and configured to start at boot time when F11 is pressed Acronis Startup Recovery Manager eliminates the need for rescue media or network connection to start the bootable rescue utility Acronis Startup Recovery Manager is especially useful for mobile users If a failure occurs the user reboots the machine hits F11 on prompt Press F11 for Acronis Startup Recovery Manager and performs data recovery in the same way as with ordinary bootable media 263 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Limitation requires re activation of loaders other than Windows loaders and GRUB Acronis Universal Restore The Acronis proprietary technology that helps boot up Windows or Linux on dissimilar hardware or a virtual machine Universal Restore handles differences in devices that are critical for the operating system start up such as storage controllers motherboard or chipset Universal Restore is not available when the image being recovered is located in Acronis Secure Zone p 262 or when using Acronis Active Restore p 262 because these features are primarily meant for instant data recovery on the same machine Activity An action performed by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 for achievement of some user goal Examples
69. Copy to clipboard button Log entry data fields A log entry contains the following data fields Type Type of event Error Warning Information Date and time Date and time when the event took place Backup plan The backup plan the event relates to if any Task The task the event relates to if any Code It can be blank or the program error code if the event type is error Error code is an integer number that may be used by Acronis support service to solve the problem Module It can be blank or the number of the program module where the event has occurred It is an integer number that may be used by Acronis support service to solve the problem Owner The user name of the backup plan owner p 23 Message The event text description Date and time presentation varies depending on your locale settings 12 3 Alerts An alert is a message that warns about actual or potential problems The Alerts view lets you rapidly identify and solve the problems by monitoring the current alerts and view the alerts history 234 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Active and inactive alerts An alert can be either in an active or inactive state The active state indicates that the issue that caused the alert still exists An active alert becomes inactive when the problem that caused the alert is resolved either manually or on its own Note There is one alert type
70. Custom schedule and conditions for backups of each type Custom schedule and retention rules Parameters Parameter Meaning Full backup schedule Specifies on what schedule and under which conditions to perform a full backup For example the full backup can be set up to run every Sunday at 1 00 AM as soon as all users are logged off Incremental backup schedule Specifies on what schedule and under which conditions to perform an incremental backup If the archive contains no backups at the time of the task run a full backup is created instead of the incremental backup Differential backup schedule Specifies on what schedule and under which conditions to perform a differential backup If the archive contains no full backups at the time of the task run a full backup is created instead of the differential backup 47 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Clean up archive Specifies how to get rid of old backups either to apply retention rules p 75 regularly or clean up the archive during a backup when the destination location runs out of space By default the retention rules are not specified which means older backups will not be deleted automatically Using retention rules Specify the retention rules and when to apply them This setting is recommended for backup destinations such as shared folders When there is insufficient space while backing up The archive will be cleaned up only duri
71. Dynamic to Basic p 189 converts a dynamic disk to basic The full version of Acronis Disk Director will provide more tools and utilities for working with disks Acronis Disk Director Lite must obtain exclusive access to the target disk This means no other disk management utilities like Windows Disk Management utility can access it at that time If you receive a message stating that the disk cannot be blocked close the disk management applications that use this disk and start again If you cannot determine which applications use the disk close them all 10 6 1 Disk initialization If you add any new disk to your machine Acronis Disk Director Lite will notice the configuration change and scan the added disk to include it to the disk and volume list If the disk is still not initialized or possibly has a file structure unknown to the machine system that means that no programs can be installed on it and you will not be able to store any files there 185 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Acronis Disk Director Lite will detect that the disk is unusable by the system and needs to be initialized The Disk management view will show the newly detected hardware as a gray block with a grayed icon thus indicating that the disk is unusable by the system If you need to initialize a disk 1 Select a disk to initialize 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Initialize in the context menu You will be forward
72. Hat Kernel based Virtual Machine KVM Red Hat Enterprise Virtualization RHEV or Citrix XenServer Open Virtual Appliance OVA The virtual machine files will be saved to the destination you specify in the Storage section By default the new virtual machine will be created in the current user s documents folder If Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Agent for Hyper V or Agent for ESX i is installed These agents enable creating a new virtual machine on the virtualization server you specify By default the new virtual machine will be created in the default storage of the virtualization server Whether you can change the storage on the virtualization server or not depends on the virtualization product brand and settings VMware ESX i may have multiple storages A Microsoft Hyper V server enables creating a new virtual machine in any local folder The new virtual machine will be configured automatically the source machine configuration being copied where possible The configuration is displayed in the Virtual Machine Settings p 143 section Check the settings and make changes if necessary Then you proceed to the regular disk mapping procedure described below Existing virtual machine Available when the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Agent for Hyper V or Agent for ESX i is installed On selecting this you specify the virtualization server and the target virtual machine Then you proceed to the regular disk mapping procedure d
73. LABEL3 are volume labels A volume label is shown in all application dialog boxes for opening and saving files If you need to change a volume label 1 Right click on the selected volume and then click Change label 2 Enter a new label in the Change label window text field 3 By clicking OK in the Change label window you ll add the pending operation of changing the volume label If when setting a new volume label you use characters that are unsupported by the currently installed operating system you will get the appropriate warning and the OK button will be disabled You will have to use only supported characters to proceed with changing the volume label To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 197 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them The new label will be graphically represented in the Disk Management view of the console immediately 10 7 6 Format volume You might want to format a volume if you want to change its file system to save additional space which is being lost due to the cluster size on the FAT16 or FAT32 file systems as a quick and more or less reliable way of destroying data residing in this volume If you want to format a volume 1 Select a volume to format 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Format in the context menu You will be forwarded to the Format Volume window where you will be able to set
74. NDAS device is identified by its device ID An iSCSI device is sometimes called an iSCSI target A hardware or software component that provides interaction between the machine and the iSCSI target is called the iSCSI initiator The name of the iSCSI initiator is usually defined by an administrator of the server that hosts the device To add an iSCSI device 1 In a bootable media Linux based or PE based run the management console 2 Click Configure iSCSI NDAS devices in a Linux based media or Run the iSCSI Setup in a PE based media 3 Specify the IP address and port of the iSCSI device s host and the name of the iSCSI initiator 4 If the host requires authentication specify the user name and password for it 5 Click OK 6 Select the iSCSI device from the list and then click Connect 7 If prompted specify the user name and password to access the iSCSI device To add an NDAS device 1 In a Linux based bootable media run the management console 2 Click Configure iSCSI NDAS devices 3 In NDAS devices click Add device 4 Specify the 20 character device ID 5 If you want to allow writing data onto the device specify the five character write key Without this key the device will be available in the read only mode 6 Click OK 9 4 List of commands and utilities available in Linux based bootable media Linux based bootable media contains the following commands and command line utilities which you can use when runnin
75. SQL servers belonging to a SharePoint farm in a centralized backup plan running on a fixed schedule Use Volume Shadow Copy VSS Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Service VSS should be used to ensure consistency of the database files in the backup Without VSS the files would be in a crash consistent state that is after the recovery the system would be in the same state as if the power were disconnected at the moment when backup began While such backups are good enough for most applications applications that use databases may not be able to start from a crash consistent state A VSS provider notifies VSS aware applications that the backup is about to start This ensures that all database transactions are completed by the time Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 takes the data snapshot This in turn ensures the consistent state of the databases in the resulting backup Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 can use various VSS providers For Microsoft products Microsoft Software Shadow Copy Provider is the best choice Using VSS on a physical machine On a physical machine using VSS is configurable This also applies to a virtual machine that is backed up from inside the guest OS You may need to enable using VSS manually if the factory preset was changed from the default value You also need to make sure that VSS writers for the respective application are turned on In Windows Small Business Server 2003 the Exchange writer is turned off by
76. This option is effective only when backing up to removable media The option defines whether to display the Insert First Media prompt when backing up to removable media The preset is Disabled When the option is enabled backing up to removable media may be not possible if the user is away because the program will wait for someone to press OK in the prompt box Hence you should disable the prompt when scheduling a backup to removable media Then if the removable media is available for example a DVD is inserted the task can run unattended Reset archive bit The option is effective only for file level backup in Windows operating systems and in bootable media The preset is Disabled In Windows operating systems each file has the File is ready for archiving attribute available by selecting File gt Properties gt General gt Advanced gt Archive and Index attributes This attribute also known as the archive bit is set by the operating system each time the file is changed and can be reset by backup applications each time they include the file in a backup The archive bit value is used by various applications such as databases When the Reset archive bit check box is selected Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 will reset the archive bits of all files being backed up Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 itself does not use the archive bit value When performing incremental or differential backup it determines whether a file
77. WinPE distributions based on any of the following kernels Windows Vista PE 2 0 Windows Vista SP1 and Windows Server 2008 PE 2 1 Windows 7 PE 3 0 with or without the supplement for Windows 7 SP1 PE 3 1 To be able to create or modify PE 2 x or 3 x images install Bootable Media Builder on a machine where Windows Automated Installation Kit AIK is installed The further operations are described in the Adding the Acronis Plug in to WinPE 2 x or 3 x p 176 section If you do not have a machine with WAIK prepare as follows 1 Download and install Windows Automated Installation Kit WAIK Automated Installation Kit AIK for Windows Vista PE 2 0 http www microsoft com Downloads details aspx familyid C7D4BC6D 15F3 4284 9123 67983 0D629F2 amp displaylang en Automated Installation Kit AIK for Windows Vista SP1 and Windows Server 2008 PE 2 1 172 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 http www microsoft com downloads details aspx FamilyID 94bb6e34 d890 4932 81a5 5b50c 657de08 amp DisplayLang en Automated Installation Kit AIK for Windows 7 PE 3 0 http www microsoft com downloads details aspx familyid 696DD665 9F76 4177 A811 39C26 D3B3B34 amp displaylang en Automated Installation Kit AIK Supplement for Windows 7 SP1 PE 3 1 http www microsoft com download en details aspx id 5188 You can find system requirements for installation by following the above links 2 Optional Burn th
78. a folder on the hard drive that you are going to send For more details see How to perform initial seeding p 246 After you have sent the hard drive and the order status becomes The data upload has been completed edit the backup plan Change the backup scheme destination and replication settings to those previously described in this section The updated backup plan will produce backups that will be replicated to the online storage outside working hours 4 6 Default backup options Each Acronis agent has its own default backup options Once an agent is installed the default options have pre defined values which are referred to as presets in the documentation When creating a backup plan you can either use a default option or override the default option with the custom value that will be specific for this plan only 79 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 You can also customize a default option itself by changing its value against the pre defined one The new value will be used by default in all backup plans you will create later on this machine To view and change the default backup options connect the console to the managed machine and then select Options gt Default backup and recovery options gt Default backup options from the top menu Availability of the backup options The set of available backup options depends on The environment the agent operates in Windows bootable media Th
79. again from midnight 3 Effective From 09 15 2009 If September 15 2009 is the current date of the task s creation and say 01 15 PM is the task s creation time the task will be started when the nearest time interval comes at 03 00 PM in our example To 12 15 2009 On this date the task will be performed for the last time but the task itself is still available in the Tasks view Several daily schedules for one task There are some cases when you might need the task to be run several times a day or even several times a day with different time intervals For such cases consider adding several schedules to a single task For example suppose that the task has to be run every 3rd day starting from 09 20 2009 five times a day first at 8 AM second at 12 PM noon third at 3 PM fourth at 5 PM fifth at 7 PM The obvious way is to add five simple schedules If you spend one minute for examination you can think out a more optimal way As you can see the time interval between the first and the second 62 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 task s recurrences is 4 hours and between the third fourth and fifth is 2 hours In this case the optimal way is to add two schedules to the task First daily schedule 1 Every 3 day s 2 Every 4 hours From 08 00 00 AM Until 12 00 00 PM 3 Effective From 09 20 2009 To not set Second daily schedule 1 Every 3 da
80. all the mounted volumes click Unmount all 8 4 Operations available in vaults By using vaults you can easily access archives and backups and perform archive management operations To perform operations with archives and backups 1 In the Navigation pane select the vault whose archives you need to manage 2 In the vault view select the Archive view tab This tab displays all archives stored in the selected vault 3 Proceed as described in Operations with archives p 167 Operations with backups p 167 167 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 8 4 1 Operations with archives To perform any operation with an archive 1 In the Navigation pane select the vault that contains archives 2 On the Archive view tab of the vault select the archive If the archive is protected with a password you will be asked to provide it 3 Perform operations by clicking the corresponding buttons on the toolbar These operations can also be accessed from the Archive name actions item of the main menu The following is a guideline for you to perform operations with archives stored in a vault To Do Validate an archive Click Validate The Validation p 155 page will be opened with the pre selected archive as a source Validation of an archive will check all the archive s backups Export an archive Click Export The Export p 158 page will be opened with the pre selected archive as a
81. an operating system that cannot start access and back up the data that has survived in a corrupted system deploy an operating system on bare metal create basic or dynamic volumes on bare metal back up sector by sector a disk with an unsupported file system back up offline any data that cannot be backed up online because of restricted access being permanently locked by the running applications or for any other reason A machine can be booted into the above environments either with physical media or using the network boot from Acronis PXE Server Windows Deployment Services WDS or Remote Installation Services RIS These servers with uploaded bootable components can be thought of as a kind of bootable media too You can create bootable media or configure the PXE server or WDS RIS using the same wizard Linux based bootable media Linux based media contains Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Bootable Agent based on Linux kernel The agent can boot and perform operations on any PC compatible hardware including bare metal and machines with corrupted or non supported file systems The operations can be configured and controlled either locally or remotely using the management console PE based bootable media PE based bootable media contains a minimal Windows system called Windows Preinstallation Environment WinPE and Acronis Plug in for WinPE that is a modification of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Agent
82. and folders with the System attribute If a folder has the System attribute all of its contents including files that do not have the System attribute will be excluded Tip You can view file or folder attributes in the file folder properties or by using the attrib command For more information refer to the Help and Support Center in Windows Exclude files matching the following criteria Select this check box to skip files and folders matching any of the criteria Use the Add Edit Remove and Remove All buttons to create the list of criteria The criteria are not case sensitive in Windows and Linux For example if you choose to exclude all tmp files and the C Temp folder also excluded will be all Tmp files all TMP files and the C TEMP folder Criteria full path Specify the full path to the file or folder starting with the drive letter when backing up Windows or the root directory when backing up Linux Both in Windows and Linux you can use a forward slash in the file or folder path as in C Temp and C Temp File tmp In Windows you can also use the traditional backslash as in C Temp and C Temp File tmp Under a Windows style bootable media a volume might have a different drive letter than in Windows For more information see Working under bootable media p 178 Criteria name Specify the name of the file or folder such as Document txt All files and folders with that name will be excluded Wildcard
83. and the guest operating system Multiple virtual processors are generally available on multi processor hosts A multicore host CPU or hyperthreading may enable multiple virtual processors on a single processor host 6 3 Recovery to a manually created virtual machine This section describes the conversion method p 135 in which you create a virtual machine yourself and perform a recovery to it as if it were a physical machine To use this method you need a license for the Acronis Universal Restore p 115 functionality 6 3 1 Considerations before conversion Converting a UEFI based machine If the original machine uses Unified Extensible Firmware Interface UEFI for booting consider creating a virtual machine that is also UEFI based If your virtualization product does not support UEFI you can create a BIOS based machine provided that the original machine is running Windows Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 adjusts the Windows boot mode to the BIOS boot firmware and ensures that Windows remains bootable For Linux operating systems changing the boot mode from UEFI to BIOS is not supported Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 can convert a UEFI based machine running Linux only when the machine uses GRUB version 1 and the target machine is also UEFI based For more details see Support for UEFI based machines p 31 Choosing the disk interface When creating the virtual machine you may want its disks to have a different int
84. anyway Event Daily every 1 day s Once at 09 00 00 PM Condition User is idle Task start conditions Wait until the conditions are met Run the task anyway after 2 hour s As a result 1 If the user becomes idle before 9PM the backup task will start at 9PM 2 If the user becomes idle between 9PM and 11PM the backup task will start immediately after the user becomes idle 3 If the user is still active at 11PM the backup task starts anyway 4 4 5 2 Location s host is available Applies to Windows Linux Location s host is available means that the machine hosting the destination for storing archives on a networked drive is available Example Backing up data to the networked location is performed on workdays at 9 00 PM If the location s host is not available at that moment for instance due to maintenance work skip the backup and wait for the next workday to start the task It is assumed that the backup task should not be started at all rather than failed Event Weekly Every 1 week s on lt workdays gt Once at 09 00 00 PM Condition Location s host is available Task start conditions Skip the task execution As a result 1 If 9 00 PM comes and the location s host is available the backup task starts right on time 70 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 2 If 9 00 PM comes but the host is unavailable at the moment the backup task will st
85. archives stored in this vault location While successful validation means high probability of successful recovery it does not check all factors that influence the recovery process If you back up the operating system only a test recovery in a bootable environment to a spare hard drive can guarantee success of the recovery At least ensure that the backup can be successfully validated using the bootable media Limitation You cannot validate archives and backups in Acronis Online Backup Storage p 242 However an initial seeding backup p 245 is automatically validated immediately after its creation Different ways to create a validation task Using the Validation page is the most general way to create a validation task Here you can validate immediately or set up a validation schedule for any backup archive or vault you have permission to access Validation of an archive or of the latest backup in the archive can be scheduled as part of the backup plan For more information see Creating a backup plan p 34 To access the Validation page first select a validation object a vault an archive or a backup To select a vault click the Vaults icon in the Navigation pane and select the vault by expanding the vaults tree in the Vaults view or directly in the Navigation pane To select an archive select a vault and then in the Vault view select the Archive view tab and click the archive name To select a backup sel
86. are creating a removable media or its ISO or detachable media such as a flash drive Drivers cannot be uploaded on a PXE server or WDS RIS The drivers can be added to the list only in groups by adding the INF files or folders containing such files Selecting individual drivers from the INF files is not possible but the media builder shows the file content for your information To add drivers 1 Click Add and browse to the INF file or a folder that contains INF files 2 Select the INF file or the folder 3 Click OK The drivers can be removed from the list only in groups by removing INF files To remove drivers 1 Select the INF file 2 Click Remove 9 1 2 Adding the Acronis Plug in to WinPE 2 x or 3 x Bootable Media Builder provides three methods of integrating Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 with WinPE 2 x or 3 x Adding the Acronis Plug in to the existing PE ISO This comes in handy when you have to add the plug in to the previously configured PE ISO that is already in use Creating the PE ISO with the plug in from scratch Adding the Acronis Plug in to a WIM file for any future purpose manual ISO building adding other tools to the image and so on To be able to perform any of the above operations install Bootable Media Builder on a machine where Windows Automated Installation Kit WAIK is installed If you do not have such machine prepare as described in How to create bootable media p 171
87. are used 3 2 Credentials used in backup plans and tasks This section explains the concept of access credentials backup plan s credentials and task credentials Access credentials When browsing backup locations setting up backups or creating recovery tasks you may need to provide credentials for accessing various resources such as the data you are going to back up or the location where the backups are or will be stored If the Credentials cache p 21 option is enabled it is enabled by default the credentials which you provide during a console session are saved for use during the later sessions Thus there is no need to enter the credentials next time The credentials are cached independently for each user who uses the console on the machine 24 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Backup plan s credentials Any backup plan running on a machine runs on behalf of a user In Windows By default the plan runs under the agent service account if created by a user having administrative privileges on the machine If created by a regular user such as a member of the Users group the plan runs under this user s account When creating a backup plan you will only be asked for credentials in specific cases For example You are scheduling backups as a regular user and did not enter credentials when connecting the console to the machine This may be the case when you are using a stand alone product edition
88. attached tape device expand the lt Machine name gt group then click the required device Tape devices are available only if you have upgraded from Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 For information about using tapes see the Tape devices section of the product Help Network folders To back up data to a network folder expand the Network folders group select the required networked machine and then click the shared folder If the network share requires access credentials the program will ask for them FTP SFTP To back up data to FTP or SFTP type the server name or address in the Path field as follows ftp ftp_server port _number or sftp sftp_server port number To establish an active mode FTP connection use the following notation aftp ftp_server port _number If the port number is not specified port 21 is used for FTP and port 22 is used for SFTP After entering access credentials the folders on the server become available Click the appropriate folder on the server You can access the server as an anonymous user if the server enables such access To do so click Use anonymous access instead of entering credentials Note According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer 4 2 5 Access credentials for archive location S
89. available Replication of Active Directory data cannot take place because there are no live domain controllers This means that Changes to Active Directory that occurred after the backup had been made will be lost Recreation of the domain controller is not an option Even a backup with an expired tombstone lifetime can be used You need to recover the volumes that store Active Directory database files p 202 If these volumes store other valuable data except Active Directory copy this data to a different location before the recovery To recover a domain controller when no other domain controllers are available 1 Make sure that the newest available backup is used for recovery This is important because all changes made to Active Directory objects after the backup will be lost 2 Recover the domain controller from the backup by using a bootable media 214 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 3 Restart the domain controller Make sure that the Active Directory service has started successfully 11 4 3 Restoring the Active Directory database If the Active Directory database files are corrupted but the domain controller is able start in normal mode you can restore the database in one of the following ways Re promoting the domain controller This way of restoring the database is available only if the domain has other domain controllers It does not require having a backup To restore the dat
90. builder on a machine without an agent you need to enter the license key or have at least one license on the license server The license may be either available or assigned Linux based bootable media 1 Start the Bootable Media Builder either from the management console by selecting Tools gt Create Bootable Media or as a separate component 2 If Agent for Windows or Agent for Linux is not installed on the machine specify the license key or the license server with licenses The licenses will not get assigned or reassigned They determine which functionality to enable for the created media Without a license you can create media only for recovery from the online backup storage If Agent for Windows or Agent for Linux is installed on the machine the media inherits its functionality including Universal Restore and deduplication 3 Select the way volumes and network resources will be handled called the media style A media with Linux style volume handling displays the volumes as for example hda1 and sdb2 It tries to reconstruct MD devices and logical LVM volumes before starting a recovery A media with Windows style volume handling displays the volumes as for example C and D It provides access to dynamic LDM volumes The wizard will guide you through the necessary operations Please refer to Linux based bootable media p 172 for details PE based bootable media Acronis Plug in for WinPE can be added to
91. but there must be unused space available on each disk that you want to include in the volume and the size of the volume will depend on the size of the smallest space Access to the data on a striped volume is usually faster than access to the same data on a single physical disk because the I O is spread across more than one disk Striped volumes are created for improved performance not for their better reliability they do not contain redundant information Mirrored Volume A fault tolerant volume also sometimes called RAID 1 whose data is duplicated on two identical physical disks All of the data on one disk is copied to another disk to provide data redundancy Almost any volume can be mirrored including the system and boot volumes and if one of the disks fails the data can still be accessed from the remaining disks Unfortunately the hardware limitations on size and performance are even more severe with the use of mirrored volumes Mirrored Striped Volume A fault tolerant volume also sometimes called RAID 1 0 combining the advantage of the high I O speed of the striped layout and redundancy of the mirror type The evident disadvantage remains inherent with the mirror architecture a low disk to volume size ratio RAID 5 A fault tolerant volume whose data is striped across an array of three or more disks The disks do not need to be identical but there must be equally sized blocks of unallocated space available on each disk in th
92. certain data the current project for example This will reduce the archive size thus saving storage space In order to recover your operating system along with all the settings and applications you have to perform a disk backup 2 In the tree below the Data to back up section select the items to back up by selecting check boxes next to the items To back up all items of the selected data type present on a machine select the check box next to the machine To back up individual data items expand the machine and select check boxes next to the required items Note for Disks volumes If your operating system and its loader reside on different volumes always include both volumes in the backup The volumes must also be recovered together otherwise there is a high risk that the operating system will not start 3 Having specified the data to backup click OK 4 2 2 Access credentials for source Specify the credentials required for access to the data you are going to back up To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Use the plan s credentials The program will access the source data using the credentials of the backup plan account specified in the Plan parameters section Use the following credentials The program will access the source data using the credentials you specify Use this option if the plan s account does not have access permissions to the data Specify User name When entering the name
93. com en us library aa997694 v exchg 80 Exchange 2003 http technet microsoft com en us library aa998109 v exchg 65 11 4 Recovering Active Directory data Active Directory recovery differs depending on the type of recovery required This section considers the following disaster scenarios A domain controller is lost but other domain controllers are still available See Recovering a domain controller other DCs are available All domain controllers are lost or there was only one See Recovering a domain controller no other DCs are available The Active Directory database is corrupted and the Active Directory service does not start See Restoring the Active Directory database Certain information is accidentally deleted from Active Directory See Restoring accidentally deleted information 11 4 1 Recovering a domain controller other DCs are available When one of the several domain controllers DCs is lost the Active Directory service is still available Therefore other domain controllers will contain data that is newer than the data in the backup In these cases a type of recovery known as nonauthoritative restore is usually performed Nonauthoritative restore means that the recovery will not affect the current state of Active Directory Steps to perform If the domain has other domain controllers you can perform nonauthoritative restore of a lost domain controller in
94. comments on the archive How to back up Backup scheme p 42 Specify when and how often to back up your data define for how long to keep the created backup archives in the selected location set up schedule for the archive cleanup procedure see Replication and retention settings below Replication and retention settings p 71 Not available for removable media or when simplified naming of backup files p 54 is chosen Define whether to copy replicate the backups to another location and whether to move or delete them according to retention rules The available settings depend on the backup scheme 2nd location validation convert to virtual machine To access these settings click Show 2nd location validation convert to virtual machine 2nd location Optional To set up replication of backups select the Replicate just created backup to another location check box For more information about backup replication see Setting up replication of backups p 73 When to validate p 51 Optional Depending on the selected backup scheme define when and how often to perform validation and whether to validate the entire archive or the latest backup in the archive Convert to virtual machine p 138 Optional Applies to disk or volume backup backup of entire virtual machines or volumes of a virtual machine Set up a regular conversion of a disk or volume backup to a virtual machine 36 Copyright Acronis Internati
95. console is connected to an agent and their versions differ The preset is Enabled To make a selection select or clear the Notify when the management console is connected to a component of a different version check box Request description when ejecting a tape This option defines whether to display a prompt for you to describe a tape when you eject it from a tape device by using Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 For example you may describe the physical location where the tape will be kept recommended If a tape is ejected automatically according to the Eject tapes after successful backups option no such prompt is displayed The preset is Enabled To make a selection select or clear the Request description when ejecting a tape check box About the task execution results The option defines whether to display the pop up messages about task run results successful completion failure or success with warnings When the displaying of pop up messages is disabled you can review the task execution states and results in the Backup plans and tasks view The preset is Enabled for all results To make a setting for each result successful completion failure or success with warnings individually select or clear the respective check box 23 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 3 Understanding Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 This section attempts to give its readers a clear understanding of the product so th
96. disk that is offline and missing back online please refer to the following Microsoft knowledge base article http technet microsoft com en us library cc732026 aspx 10 7 Volume operations Acronis Disk Director Lite includes the following operations that can be performed on volumes Create Volume p 190 Creates a new volume with the help of the Create Volume Wizard Delete Volume p 194 Deletes the selected volume Set Active p 195 Sets the selected volume Active so that the machine will be able to boot with the OS installed there Change Letter p 195 Changes the selected volume letter Change Label p 196 Changes the selected volume label Format Volume p 196 Formats a volume giving it the necessary file system The full version of Acronis Disk Director will provide more tools and utilities for working with volumes Acronis Disk Director Lite must obtain exclusive access to the target volume This means no other disk management utilities like Windows Disk Management utility can access it at that time If you receive a message stating that the volume cannot be blocked close the disk management applications that use this volume and start again If you can not determine which applications use the volume close them all 10 7 1 Creating a volume You might need a new volume to Recover a previously saved backup copy in the exactly as was configuration 191 Co
97. domain controllers hold unique roles known as Flexible Single Master Operations FSMO roles or operations manager roles For the description of FSMO roles and their scopes domain wide or forest wide see Microsoft Help and Support article http support microsoft com kb 324801 Before recreating a domain controller that held the PDC Emulator role you must seize that role Otherwise you will not be able to add the recreated domain controller to the domain After recreating the domain controller you can transfer this role back For information about how to seize and transfer FSMO roles see Microsoft Help and Support article http support microsoft com kb 255504 To view which FSMO roles are assigned to which domain controller you can connect to any live domain controller by using the Ntdsutil tool as described in Microsoft Help and Support article http support microsoft com kb 234790 Follow the steps in the Using the NTDSUTIL Tool section of that article For the Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 operating systems follow all steps as they are given For the Windows Server 2008 operating systems in the step asking you to type domain management type roles instead Follow other steps as they are given 11 4 2 Recovering a domain controller no other DCs are available If all domain controllers are lost nonauthoritative restore in fact becomes authoritative the objects restored from the backup are the newest
98. from bootable media back up the machine in the off line state and immediately recover the machine from the resulting backup If you need to adjust the resulting virtual machine settings You may want to add or remove disks choose the disk provisioning mode change the volume sizes and their location on the disks and more How to perform Follow the steps described in Recovery to the New virtual machine destination p 141 c Recover the backed up disks or volumes to a manually created virtual machine by using bootable media When to use If you want to create a machine directly on a virtualization server rather than import it Tip With Agent for ESX i or Agent for Hyper V a virtual machine can be created directly on a respective virtualization server by using methods a and b If you need to recreate dynamic volumes on a Windows machine If you need to recreate logical volumes or software RAID on a Linux machine How to perform Follow the steps described in Recovery to a manually created virtual machine p 144 6 2 Conversion to an automatically created virtual machine This section describes the conversion methods p 135 in which Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 automatically creates a new virtual machine During conversion which is part of a backup plan p 138 the software creates the virtual machine in addition to creating the backup The virtual machine has the same config
99. have the right to access it To access this option click Show access credentials Where to recover This section appears after the required backup is selected and the type of data to recover is defined The parameters you specify here depend on the type of data being recovered 102 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Disks p 107 Volumes p 109 Files p 113 Acronis Active Restore Optional The Acronis Active Restore check box is available when recovering Windows starting from Windows 2000 Acronis Active Restore brings a system online immediately after the recovery is started The operating system boots from the backup image and the machine becomes operational and ready to provide necessary services The data required to serve incoming requests is recovered with the highest priority everything else is recovered in the background For details see Acronis Active Restore p 122 Access credentials p 106 Optional Provide credentials for the destination if the task credentials do not enable recovery of the selected data To access this setting click Show access credentials When to recover Recover p 114 Select when to start recovery The task can start immediately after its creation be scheduled for a specified date and time in the future or simply saved for manual execution Task parameters Task name Optional Enter a unique name for the recovery task A conscious name lets you quickl
100. if the chosen disk is converted from dynamic into basic E g if such a conversion will stop the disk from being accessed by the system the operating system will stop loading after such conversion or if the disk you want to convert to basic contains any volumes of the types that are only supported by dynamic disks all volume types except Simple volumes then you will be warned here about the possible damage to the data involved in the conversion Please note the operation is unavailable for a dynamic disk containing Spanned Striped or RAID 5 volumes 3 If you click OK in this warning window the conversion will be performed immediately After the conversion the last 8Mb of disk space is reserved for the future conversion of the disk from basic to dynamic In some cases the possible unallocated space and the proposed maximum volume size might differ e g when the size of one mirror establishes the size of the other mirror or the last 8Mb of disk space are reserved for the future conversion of the disk from basic to dynamic System disk conversion Acronis Disk Director Lite does not require an operating system reboot after dynamic to basic conversion of the disk if 1 There is a single Windows 2008 Vista operating system installed on the disk 2 The machine runs this operating system Dynamic to basic conversion of the disk comprising of system volumes takes a certain amount of time and any power loss unintentional turning
101. immediate backup is similar to creating a backup plan p 34 except for the following There are no options to schedule backups and to set up retention rules Simplified naming of backup files p 54 is used if the backup destination supports it Otherwise the standard backup naming is used The following locations do not support simplified file naming tape Acronis Secure Zone or Acronis Online Backup Storage Due to simplified file naming an RDX drive or USB flash drive can only be used in the removable media p 153 mode Conversion of a disk level backup to a virtual machine is not available as a part of the backup operation You can convert the resulting backup afterwards 4 2 Creating a backup plan Before creating your first backup plan p 264 please familiarize yourself with the basic concepts used in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 To create a backup plan perform the following steps What to back up Items to back up p 36 Select the type of data to back up and specify the data items The type of data depends on the agents installed on the machine Access credentials exclusions To access these settings click Show access credentials exclusions Access credentials p 37 Provide credentials for the source data if the plan s account does not have access permissions to the data Exclusions p 37 Set up exclusions for the specific types of files you do not wish to back up Where to
102. is All alerts To show hide alerts select clear the check boxes next to the respective alert types 21 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 2 1 3 2 Credentials cache The option specifies whether to store the credentials entered while using the management console The preset is Enabled If the option is enabled the credentials for various locations that you enter during a console session are saved for use during later sessions In Windows the credentials are stored in the Windows Credential Manager In Linux the credentials are stored in a special encrypted file If the option is disabled the credentials are stored only until the console is closed To clear the credentials cache for the current user account click the Clear credentials cache button 2 1 3 3 Fonts The option defines the fonts to be used in the Graphical User Interface of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 The Menu font setting affects the drop down and context menus The Application font setting affects all other GUI elements The preset is System Default font for both the menus and the application interface items To make a selection choose the font from the respective combo box and set the font s properties You can preview the font s appearance by clicking Browse to the right 2 1 3 4 Pop up messages The Activities Need Interaction dialog This option defines whether to display a pop up window when one or more activit
103. it prior to editing the backup plan 4 6 22 Task start conditions This option is effective in Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under bootable media This option determines the program behavior in case a backup task is about to start the scheduled time comes or the event specified in the schedule occurs but the condition or any of multiple conditions is not met For more information on conditions please see Scheduling p 59 and Conditions p 68 The preset is Wait until the conditions are met Wait until the conditions are met With this setting the scheduler starts monitoring the conditions and launches the task as soon as the conditions are met If the conditions are never met the task will never start To handle the situation when the conditions are not met for too long and further delaying the backup is becoming risky you can set the time interval after which the task will run irrespective of the condition Select the Run the task anyway after check box and specify the time interval The task will start as soon as the conditions are met OR the maximum time delay lapses depending on which comes first 99 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Time diagram Wait until conditions are met Skip the task execution Delaying a backup might be unacceptable for example when you need to back up data strictly at the specified time Then it makes sense to skip th
104. itself into the Need interaction state when it needs human interaction such as changing media or ignoring a read error The next state may be Idle if the user chooses to stop the task or Running on selecting Ignore Retry or another action such as Reboot that can put the task to the Running state 12 1 2 4 Task statuses A task can have one of the following statuses Error Warning OK A task status is derived from the result of the last run of the task Status How it is determined How to handle 1 Error Last result is Failed Identify the failed task gt Check the task log to find out the reason of the failure then do one or more of the following Remove the reason of the failure gt optionally Start the failed task manually Edit the failed task to prevent its future failure 2 Warning Last result is Succeeded with warning or the task has been stopped View the log to read the warnings gt optionally Perform actions to prevent the future warnings or failure 3 OK Last result is Succeeded or Not run yet Not run yet means that the task has never been started or has been started but has not finished yet and therefore its result is not available You may want to find out why the task has not started so far 226 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 12 1 3 Export and import of backup plans The export operation creates a file with complete configuration of the backu
105. last created backup on schedule Specify the conversion schedule p 139 if required Target host p 139 Select the resulting virtual machine type and location Available options depend on the agent that will perform conversion This may be the agent that performs the backup by default or an agent installed on another machine If the latter is the case the archive must be stored in a shared location such as a network folder or a managed vault so that the other machine can access the archive To specify another agent click Change and select a machine where Agent for ESX i Agent for Hyper V Agent for Windows or Agent for Linux is installed Storage Choose the storage on the virtualization server or the folder to place the virtual machine files in Resultant VMs Specify the name of the virtual machine The default name is Backup_of_ Machine Name You can add more variables to the name The following templates are supported Plan Name Machine Name Virtual Host Name Virtual Machine Name Virtualization Server Type Folder on VMware vCenter 139 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 If the management server is integrated with vCenter Server the resultant virtual machines will appear in the Acronis Backups folder on the vCenter You can specify a subfolder for the machines resulting from execution of the plan 6 2 2 2 Setting up a conversion schedule A disk backup p 268 created while execut
106. log events of the recovery operations in the Application Event Log Specify the types of events to be logged All events log all events information warnings and errors Errors and warnings Errors only Do not log to disable logging events of the recovery operations in the Application Event Log 5 7 4 File level security This option is effective only for recovery from file level backup of Windows files This option defines whether to recover NTFS permissions for files along with the files The preset is Recover files with their security settings If the file NTFS permissions were preserved during backup p 89 you can choose whether to recover the permissions or let the files inherit the NTFS permissions from the folder to which they are recovered 5 7 5 Mount points This option is effective only in Windows for recovering data from a file level backup Enable the Mount points option to recover files and folders that were stored on the mounted volumes and were backed up with the enabled Mount points option For details of backing up mounted volumes or cluster shared volumes see Mount points p 91 The preset is Disabled 132 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 This option is effective only when you select for backup a folder that is higher in the folder hierarchy than the mount point If you select for recovery folders within the mount point or the mount point itself the s
107. mode Re attempt if an error occurs Ignore bad sectors Event tracing Windows events log p 88 SNMP p 87 Fast incremental differential backup p 89 File level backup snapshot p 89 File level security p 89 Preserve files security settings in archives In archives store encrypted files in decrypted state Media components p 90 Dest removable media Dest removable media Mount points p 91 Multi volume snapshot p 91 Notifications E mail p 92 Win Pop up p 93 Pre Post backup commands p 93 PE only PE only Pre Post data capture commands p 95 Replication cleanup inactivity time p 76 Sector by sector backup p 97 Task failure handling p 97 Task start conditions p 98 81 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Agent for Windows Bootable media Linux based or PE based Disk backup File backup Disk backup File backup Volume Shadow Copy Service p 99 4 6 1 Additional settings Specify the additional settings for the backup operation by selecting or clearing the following check boxes Ask for the first media while backing up to removable media
108. name if no disk group exists on the machine For more information about disk groups please refer to the following Microsoft knowledge base article 222189 Description of Disk Groups in Windows Disk Management http support microsoft com kb 222189 EN US Dynamic disk A hard disk managed by Logical Disk Manager LDM that is available in Windows starting with Windows 2000 LDM helps flexibly allocate volumes on a storage device for better fault tolerance better performance or larger volume size A dynamic disk can use either the master boot record MBR or GUID partition table GPT partition style In addition to MBR or GPT each dynamic disk has a hidden database where the LDM stores the dynamic volumes configuration Each dynamic disk holds the complete information about all dynamic volumes existing in the disk group which makes for better storage reliability The database occupies the last 1MB of an MBR disk On a GPT disk Windows creates the dedicated LDM Metadata partition taking space from the Microsoft Reserved Partition MSR Disk 1 MBR LDM database 1 MB Disk 2 Protec t ive MBR GPT Microsoft Reserved Partition MSR LDM database GPT LDM Metadata partition 1 MB Dynamic disks organized on MBR Disk 1 and GPT Disk 2 disks For more information about dynamic disks please refer to the following Microsoft knowledge base articles Disk Management Windows XP Professional Resource K
109. network share expand the Network folders group select the required networked machine and then click the shared folder If the network share requires access credentials the program will ask for them To select a folder stored on NFS share expand the NFS drives group and click the folder To select FTP or SFTP server expand the corresponding group and click the appropriate folder on the server According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer To assist you with choosing the right vault the table displays the names of the archives contained in each vault you select While you are reviewing the location content archives can be added deleted or modified by another user or by the program itself according to scheduled operations Use the Refresh button to refresh the list of archives 1 Click OK 8 1 4 Access credentials for source Specify the credentials required for access to the location where the backup archive is stored To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Use the task credentials The software will access the location using the credentials of the task account specified in the Task parameters section Use the following credentials The software will access the location using the credentials you s
110. of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account Confirm password Re enter the password 2 Click OK 4 2 3 Source files exclusion This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media This option is effective for disk level backup of NTFS and FAT file systems only This option is effective for file level backup of all supported file systems The option defines which files and folders to skip during the backup process and thus exclude from the list of backed up items 38 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Note Exclusions override selection of data items to back up For example if you select to back up file MyFile tmp and to exclude all tmp files file MyFile tmp will not be backed up To specify which files and folders to exclude set up any of the following parameters Exclude all hidden files and folders Select this check box to skip files and folders that have the Hidden attribute for file systems that are supported by Windows or that start with a period for file systems in Linux such as Ext2 and Ext3 If a folder is hidden all of its contents including files that are not hidden will be excluded Exclude all system files and folders This option is effective only for file systems that are supported by Windows Select this check box to skip files
111. of the log entry s operations Save the selected log entries to a file 1 Display Activities and select activities or display Events and select log entries 2 Click Save selected to file 3 In the opened window specify a path and a name for the file All log entries of the selected activities or selected log entries will be saved to the specified file 233 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Save all the log entries to a file 1 Make sure that the filters are not set 2 Click Save all to file 3 In the opened window specify a path and a name for the file All log entries will be saved to the specified file Save all the filtered log entries to a file 1 Set filters to get a list of the log entries that satisfy the filtering criteria 2 Click Save all to file 3 In the opened window specify a path and a name for the file All log entries in the list will be saved to the specified file Delete all the log entries Click Clear log All the log entries will be deleted from the log and a new log entry will be created It will contain information about who deleted the log entries and when 12 2 2 Log entry details Displays detailed information on the log entry you have selected and lets you copy the details to the clipboard To view details of the next or the previous log entry click the down arrow button or correspondingly the up arrow button To copy the details click the
112. of this vault p 147 and to take actions on archives p 167 and backups p 167 stored in there 147 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 7 1 1 Working with vaults This section briefly describes the main GUI elements of the selected vault and suggests ways to work with them Examining information on a vault Information about the selected vault is located at the top pane of the selected vault Using the stacked bar you can estimate the vault s load The vault s load is the proportion of the vault s free space and occupied space not available if the vault is located on a tape library Free space is a space on the storage device where the vault is located For example if the vault is located on a hard disk the vault free space is the free space of the respective volume Occupied space is the total size of backup archives and their metadata if it is located in the vault You can obtain the total number of archives and backups stored in the vault and full path to the vault Browsing the vault contents and data selection You can browse the vault content and select data to recover by using the Data view tab or the Archive view tab Data view The Data view tab lets you browse and select the backed up data by versions backup date and time The Data view tab shares the same searching and cataloging functionality with the data catalog p 104 Archive view The Archive view tab displays the backed up data by ar
113. ones e g if you want to start using an OS on your machine that does not support dynamic disks you can convert your disks using the same menu items though the operation now will be named Convert to basic 189 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 System disk conversion Acronis Disk Director Lite does not require an operating system reboot after basic to dynamic conversion of the disk if 1 There is a single Windows 2008 Vista operating system installed on the disk 2 The machine runs this operating system Basic to dynamic conversion of the disk comprising of system volumes takes a certain amount of time and any power loss unintentional turning off of the machine or accidental pressing of the Reset button during the procedure could result in bootability loss In contrast to Windows Disk Manager the program ensures bootability of an offline operating system on the disk after the operation 10 6 6 Disk conversion dynamic to basic You would want to convert dynamic disks back to basic ones e g if you want to start using an OS on your machine that does not support dynamic disks If you need to convert a dynamic disk to basic 1 Select the dynamic disk to convert to basic 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Convert to basic in the context menu You will receive a final warning about the dynamic disk being converted to basic You will be advised about the changes that will happen to the system
114. other processes High to maximize the backup process speed by taking resources from other processes 4 6 4 2 HDD writing speed This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media This option is available when an internal fixed hard disk of the machine being backed up is selected as the backup destination Backing up to a fixed hard disk for example to Acronis Secure Zone may slow performance of the operating system and applications because of the large amounts of data that needs to be written to the disk You can limit the hard disk usage by the backup process to the desired level The preset is Maximum To set the desired HDD writing speed for backup Do any of the following Click Writing speed stated as a percentage of the maximum speed of the destination hard disk and then drag the slider or select a percentage in the box Click Writing speed stated in kilobytes per second and then enter the writing speed in kilobytes per second 4 6 4 3 Network connection speed This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media This option is available when a location on the network network share or an FTP SFTP server is selected as the backup destination The option defines the amount of network connection bandwidth allocated for transferring the backup data By default the speed is set to maximum i e the software uses all the network ba
115. p 264 each backup belonging to the archive is encrypted by the agent p 263 before saving the backup to its destination Encrypted vault A managed vault p 272 to which anything written is encrypted and anything read is decrypted transparently by the storage node p 274 using a vault specific encryption key stored on the node In case the storage medium is stolen or accessed by an unauthorized person the malefactor will not be able to decrypt the vault contents without access to the storage node Encrypted archives p 270 will be encrypted over the encryption performed by the agent p 263 Export An operation that creates a copy of an archive p 263 or a self sufficient part copy of an archive in the location you specify The export operation can be applied to a single archive a single backup p 263 or to your choice of backups belonging to the same archive An entire vault p 275 can be exported by using the command line interface F Full backup A self sufficient backup p 263 containing all data chosen for backup You do not need access to any other backup to recover the data from a full backup 271 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 G GFS Grandfather Father Son A popular backup scheme p 264 aimed to maintain the optimal balance between a backup archive p 263 size and the number of recovery points p 273 available from the archive GFS enables recovering with daily resolutio
116. port enter the port number If the port has not been pre configured the agent uses the default port number 9876 This port is also used as default by the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Management Console 9 1 1 4 Drivers for Universal Restore While creating bootable media you have an option to add Windows drivers to the media The drivers will be used by Universal Restore when recovering Windows on a machine with a dissimilar processor different motherboard or different mass storage device than in the backed up system 176 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 You will be able to configure the Universal Restore to search the media for the drivers that best fit the target hardware to get the mass storage drivers that you explicitly specify from the media This is necessary when the target hardware has a specific mass storage controller such as a SCSI RAID or Fiber Channel adapter for the hard disk For more information please refer to Universal Restore The drivers will be placed in the visible Drivers folder on the bootable media The drivers are not loaded into the target machine RAM therefore the media must stay inserted or connected throughout the Universal Restore operation Adding drivers to bootable media is available on the condition that 1 The Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Universal Restore add on is installed on the machine where the bootable media is created AND 2 You
117. recovering a disk containing a system volume you can choose what to do with the NT signature of the target disk Specify any of the following parameters Select automatically The software will keep the NT signature of the target disk if it is the same as the NT signature stored in the backup In other words if you recover the disk to the same disk that was backed up Otherwise the software will generate a new NT signature for the target disk This is the default selection recommended in most cases Use the following settings only if you absolutely need to Create new Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 will generate a new NT signature for the target hard disk Recover from backup Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 will replace the NT signature of the target hard disk with one from the disk backup Note You should be absolutely sure that none of the existing disks on this machine has the same NT signature Otherwise the operating system runs from the first disk at the startup discovers the same signature on the second one automatically generates a new unique NT signature and assigns it to the second disk As a result all the volumes on the second disk will lose their letters all paths will be invalid on the disk and programs won t find their files The operating system on that disk will be unbootable Recovering the disk signature may be desirable due to the following reasons 109 Copyright Acronis International Gmb
118. sector by sector backup One part of the GRUB loader resides either in the first several sectors of the disk or in the first several sectors of the volume The rest is on the file system of one of the volumes System bootability can be recovered automatically only when the GRUB resides in the first several sectors of the disk and on the file system to which direct access is possible In other cases the user has to manually reactivate the boot loader Solution Reactivate the boot loader You might also need to fix the configuration file The system uses Linux Loader LILO and was recovered from a normal not from a raw that is sector by sector backup LILO contains numerous references to absolute sector numbers and so cannot be repaired automatically except for the case when all data is recovered to the sectors that have the same absolute numbers as on the source disk Solution Reactivate the boot loader You might also need to fix the loader configuration file for the reason described in the previous item The system loader points to the wrong volume This may happen when system or boot volumes are not recovered to their original location 125 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Solution Modification of the boot ini or the boot bcd files fixes this for Windows loaders Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 does this automatically and so you are not likely to experience the problem For the GRUB and LILO loaders
119. selection Select the resulting virtual machine type or the virtualization server where the machine will be created The available options depend on the agent s installed on the machine the console is connected to If the console is connected to the management server you can choose any registered machine that is able to perform the required operation To select the virtualization server where the new virtual machine will be created 1 Choose the Create a new virtual machine on the server option 2 In the left part of the window select the virtualization server Use the right part of the window to review details on the selected server Only if the console is connected to the management server If multiple agents manage the selected ESX i host you can choose the agent that will perform recovery For better performance choose an Agent for ESX i Virtual Appliance located on that ESX i If no agent manages the ESX i and automatic deployment is turned on Agent for ESX i Virtual Appliance will be deployed immediately after you click OK Recovery will be performed by that agent It will take a license 3 Click OK to return to the Recover data page To select the virtual machine type 1 Choose the Save the virtual machine as a set of files option 2 In the left part of the window select the virtual machine type Use the right part of the window to review details on the selected virtual machine type 143 Copyright Acronis Inter
120. that is always active Backup not created This is because even if the cause of this alert was resolved and the following backups successfully created the fact that the backup was not created remains Fixing issues that caused alerts To find and fix the issue that caused the alert click Fix the issue You will be taken to the corresponding view where you can examine the issue and take the necessary steps to resolve it Optionally you can click View details to get more information about the alert you select Accepting alerts By default the Current alerts table lists both active and inactive alerts until they are not accepted To accept an alert select it and then click Accept By accepting an alert you acknowledge the alert and agree to takeresponsibility for it The accepted alerts are then moved to the Accepted alerts table with the alert state unchanged The Accepted alerts table stores the history of the accepted alerts Here you can find out who accepted the alert and when it happen The accepted alerts of both states can be removed from the table either manually by using Delete and Delete all buttons or automatically see Configuring alerts later in this section To export entire table contents to a txt or csv file click Save all to file Configuring alerts Use the following options at the top of the Alerts view to configure alerts Show hide alerts p 20 specify the alert types to display in the Alerts
121. that performs the conversion If updating the virtual machine is not possible the software re creates it from scratch The following is a detailed description of both cases If you choose to save the virtual machine as a set of files As a result of the first conversion a new virtual machine will be created Every subsequent conversion will re create this machine from scratch First a new temporary virtual machine is created If this operation succeeds the old machine is replaced If an error occurs during creation of the temporary machine the temporary machine is deleted This way the conversion always ends up with a single machine However extra storage space is required during conversion to store the temporary machine If you choose to create the virtual machine on a virtualization server The first conversion creates a new virtual machine Any subsequent conversion works as follows If there has been a full backup since the last conversion the virtual machine is re created from scratch This involves creating a temporary virtual machine as described earlier in this section Otherwise the existing virtual machine is updated to reflect changes since the last conversion If updating is not possible for example if you deleted the intermediate snapshots see below the virtual machine is re created from scratch 141 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Intermediate snapshots To be able to update the
122. the Result field at the bottom of the window Examples One day in the week schedule 63 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Run the task every Friday at 10PM starting from a certain date say 05 14 2009 and ending after six months The schedule s parameters are thus set up as follows 1 Every 1 week s on Fri 2 Once at 10 00 00 PM 3 Effective From 05 13 2009 The task will be started on the nearest Friday at 10 PM To 11 13 2009 The task will be performed for the last time on this date but the task itself will still be available in the Tasks view after this date If this date were not a Friday the task would be last performed on the last Friday preceding this date This schedule is widely used when creating a custom backup scheme The One day in the week like schedule is added to the full backups while the incremental backups are scheduled to be performed on workdays For more details see the Full and incremental backups plus cleanup example in the Custom backup scheme p 46 section Workdays schedule Run the task every week on workdays from Monday through Friday During a workday the task starts only once at 9 PM The schedule s parameters are thus set up as follows 1 Every 1 week s on lt Workdays gt selecting the lt Workdays gt check box automatically selects the corresponding check boxes Mon Tue Wed Thu and Fri and leaves the remaining ones unchanged 2 On
123. the damaged databases and then perform the backup again Tip Acronis offers a dedicated product for backing up Microsoft Exchange Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 for Microsoft Exchange Server When you use this product Agent for Exchange automatically checks consistency of the databases being backed up and skips the databases with a checksum mismatch or file header damage As opposed to this agent Eseutil K verifies the pages of all Exchange databases that are present on the server 11 1 3 2 Active Directory backup Active Directory services use a database located on the file system of a domain controller If the domain has two or more domain controllers the information stored in the database is constantly replicated between them Volumes to back up To back up Active Directory back up the following volumes of a domain controller The system volume and the boot volume The volumes where the Active Directory database and the transaction logs p 202 are located The volume with the SYSVOL folder The default location of this folder is SystemRoot SYSVOL To determine the current location of this folder examine the Sysvol value in the following registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services Netlogon Parameters Considerations for backup When setting up and performing Active Directory backup make sure that You perform a backup at least monthly If your domain has only one domain c
124. the destination disk runs out of free space while creating the backup the task enters the Need interaction state You have the ability to free additional space and retry the operation If you do so the resulting backup will be split into the parts created before and after the retry When backing up to removable media CD DVD Blu Ray Discs a stand alone tape drive an RDX or USB drive used in the removable device p 153 mode The task will enter the Need interaction state and ask for a new media when the previous one is full When backing up to an FTP server The backup will automatically be split into files no more than 2 GB in size Splitting is needed to allow data recovery directly from the FTP server When backing up to an SFTP server A single backup file will be created If the destination storage runs out of free space while creating the backup the task will fail When you replicate or move a backup p 71 to other locations these rules apply to each location independently Example Suppose that the primary location for a 3 GB backup is a hard disk the second location is an FTP server and the third location is a network share In this case the backup will be stored as a single file in the primary location as two files in the second location and as a single file again in the third location Fixed size Enter the desired file size or select it from the drop down list The backup will then be split into mu
125. the port is set to 110 User name and Password of the incoming mail server d Click OK 9 Click Send test e mail message to check whether e mail notifications work correctly with the specified settings 5 7 6 2 Messenger service WinPopup This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under bootable media The option enables you to receive WinPopup notifications about the recovery task s successful completion failure or need for interaction The preset is Disabled Before configuring WinPopup notifications make sure the Messenger service is started on both the machine executing the task and the machine that will receive messages The Messenger service is not started by default in the Microsoft Windows Server 2003 family Change the service Startup mode to Automatic and start the service To configure WinPopup notifications 1 Select the Send WinPopup notifications check box 2 In the Machine name field enter the name of the machine to which notifications will be sent Multiple names are not supported 3 Under Send notifications select the appropriate check boxes as follows When recovery completes successfully to send notification when the recovery task has completed successfully When recovery fails to send notification when the recovery task has failed When user interaction is required check box to send notif
126. the required settings click OK to create the validation task 8 1 1 Archive selection To specify an archive to validate 1 Enter the full path to the archive location in the Path field or select the required location in the tree p 104 2 In the table to the right of the tree select the archive The table displays the names of the archives contained in each location you select While you are reviewing the location content archives can be added deleted or modified by another user or by the program itself according to scheduled operations Use the Refresh button to refresh the list of archives 3 Click OK 8 1 2 Backup selection To specify a backup to validate 1 In the upper pane select a backup by its creation date time The bottom part of the window displays the selected backup content assisting you to find the right backup 2 Click OK 8 1 3 Vault selection To select a vault or a location 1 Enter the full path to the vault location in the Path field or select the desired location in the tree To select a centralized vault expand the Centralized group and click the appropriate vault To select a personal vault expand the Personal group and click the appropriate vault 157 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 To select a local folder CD DVD drive or locally attached tape device expand the Local folders group and click the required folder To select a
127. the software tries to reproduce the format of the original machine s disks If this is not possible thick format is used Implementation of Xen machines is based on Microsoft Virtual PC and inherits its limitations up to 3 IDE disks and 1 processor SCSI disks are not supported Memory Initial setting if not contained in the backup it is the default setting of the virtualization server This is the amount of memory allocated to the new virtual machine The memory adjustment range depends on the host hardware the host operating system and the virtualization product settings For example virtual machines may be allowed to use no more than 30 of memory Name Initial setting if not contained in the backup New virtual machine Enter the name for the new virtual machine If the backup was created by Agent for ESX i or Agent for Hyper V the software takes the name from the virtual machine configuration contained in the backup Processors Initial setting if not contained in the backup or if the backed up setting is not supported by the virtualization server it is the default server s setting 144 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 This is the number of processors of the new virtual machine In most cases it is set to one The result of assignment of more than one processor to the machine is not guaranteed The number of virtual processors may be limited by the host CPU configuration the virtualization product
128. the system when it fails to boot boot the machine from a separate bootable rescue media use network boot from Acronis PXE Server or Microsoft Remote Installation Services RIS 182 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 10 Disk management Acronis Disk Director Lite is a tool for preparing a machine disk volume configuration for recovering the volume images saved by the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 software Sometimes after the volume has been backed up and its image placed into a safe storage the machine disk configuration might change due to a HDD replacement or hardware loss In such case with the help of Acronis Disk Director Lite the user has the possibility to recreate the necessary disk configuration so that the volume image can be recovered exactly as it was or with any alteration of the disk or volume structure the user might consider necessary All operations on disks and volumes involve a certain risk of data damage Operations on system bootable or data volumes must be carried out very carefully to avoid potential problems with the booting process or hard disk data storage Operations with hard disks and volumes take a certain amount of time and any power loss unintentional turning off of the machine or accidental pressing of the Reset button during the procedure could result in volume damage and data loss All operations on volumes of dynamic disks in Windows XP and Windows 2000 requ
129. to MBR Dynamic disk conversion MBR to GPT Acronis Disk Director Lite does not support direct MBR to GPT conversion for dynamic disks However you can perform the following conversions to reach the goal using the program 188 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 1 MBR disk conversion dynamic to basic p 189 using the Convert to basic operation 2 Basic disk conversion MBR to GPT using the Convert to GPT operation 3 GPT disk conversion basic to dynamic p 188 using the Convert to dynamic operation 10 6 4 Disk conversion GPT to MBR If you plan to install an OS that does not support GPT disks conversion of the GPT disk to MBR is possible the name of the operation will be listed as Convert to MBR If you need to convert a GPT disk to MBR 1 Select a GPT disk to convert to MBR 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Convert to MBR in the context menu You will receive a warning window stating that you are about to convert GPT into MBR You will be explained the changes that will happen to the system after the chosen disk is converted from GPT to MBR E g if such conversion will stop a disk from being accessed by the system the operating system will stop loading after such conversion or some volumes on the selected GPT disk will not be accessible with MBR e g volumes located more than 2 TB from the beginning of the disk you will be warned here about such damage Please note a volume bel
130. to the folder where the WinPE files are located 5 Specify network settings p 174 for the machine network adapters or choose DHCP auto configuration 6 Optional Specify the Windows drivers to be added to Windows PE Once you boot a machine into Windows PE the drivers can help you access the device where the backup archive is located Also you will be able to point to these drivers when configuring Universal Restore WinPE itself needs 32 bit drivers For using Universal Restore on a 64 bit system add 64 bit drivers as well Click Add and specify the path to the necessary inf file for a corresponding SCSI RAID SATA controller network adapter tape drive or other device You will have to repeat this procedure for each driver you want to be included in the resulting WinPE boot media 7 Choose whether you want to create ISO or WIM image or upload the media on a server Acronis PXE Server WDS or RIS 8 Specify the full path to the resulting image file including the file name or specify the server and provide the user name and password to access it 9 Check your settings in the summary screen and click Proceed 10 Burn the ISO to CD or DVD using a third party tool or copy to a flash drive Once a machine boots into WinPE Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 starts automatically To create a PE image ISO file from the resulting WIM file replace the default boot wim file in your Windows PE folder with the newly cr
131. to the registry key HKLM BCD00000000 127 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 5 6 Reverting a Windows system to its factory settings If your Windows operating system was deployed by using Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 for System Builders you can revert the system to its factory settings Reverting the system to the factory settings can be started from the management console or at boot time The second method is useful if the operating system became unbootable for some reason To start the operation from the management console click Revert to factory settings in the Welcome screen To start the operation at boot time press a hot key usually F11 and then click Revert to factory settings in the appeared screen Alternatively you can continue booting the operating system Once you confirm the operation Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 will re deploy the factory image located in Acronis Secure Zone This will recover the original volume layout the pre installed Windows operating system and any original third party applications In addition the software will remove all user archives from Acronis Secure Zone and resize Acronis Secure Zone to its original size Caution All user data stored on the original disks of the machine will be lost Sometimes a system cannot be reverted to the factory settings even at boot time This may be the case if a drive failure occurred if the factory image became corr
132. up archive gt When there is insufficient space while backing up p 46 if you accept the risk of losing the last backup Deleting or moving backups with dependencies To access this setting click Show advanced settings in the Retention Rules window Retention rules presume deleting or moving some backups while retaining the others What if the archive contains incremental and differential backups that depend on each other and on the full backups they are based on You cannot say delete an outdated full backup and keep its incremental children When deletion or movement of a backup affects other backups one of the following rules is applied Retain the backup until all dependent backups become subject to deletion movement 76 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 The outdated backup marked with the icon will be kept until all backups that depend on it also become outdated Then all the chain will be deleted at once during the regular cleanup If you chose moving outdated backups to the next location the backup will be copied there without delay Only its deletion from the current location is postponed This mode helps to avoid the potentially time consuming consolidation but requires extra space for storing backups whose deletion is postponed The archive size and or the backup age or number can exceed the values you specify This mode is not available for Acronis Online Backup Storage when you copy or m
133. using Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 GUI or command line interface This method enables you to use a wide range of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 functionality Retrieving files p 258 from file level backups by using a Web browser To do this you only need a machine with Internet access 13 1 5 3 Is the online storage available under Acronis bootable media Recovery from Acronis Online Backup Storage is available but backup to the storage is not 13 1 5 4 Can I use Acronis Universal Restore when recovering a system from the online storage Yes Acronis Universal Restore is always available when recovering a system from the online storage Using Acronis Universal Restore when recovering from other types of storage will require a separate license 13 1 5 5 What if a network connection is lost during online backup or recovery The software will try to reach the online storage every 30 seconds After 30 unsuccessful attempts the backup or recovery task will fail You can change the number of attempts and the interval between the attempts in the Error handling gt Re attempt if an error occurs option Every backup plan or recovery task includes this option 13 1 5 6 What happens if I run out of space When a machine s backups are about to exceed the storage space allowed by its subscription you receive an e mail notification with an alert In addition you can see this alert on the account management Web page nea
134. vault can be organized on a local or networked drive or detachable media such as an external USB drive There are no settings for limiting a vault size or the number of backups in a vault You can limit the size of each archive using cleanup p 266 but the total size of archives stored in the vault is limited by the storage size only Virtual machine On Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Management Server p 272 a machine p 272 is considered virtual if it can be backed up from the virtualization host without installing an agent p 263 on the machine Such machine appears in the Virtual machines section If an agent is installed into the guest system the machine appears in the Machines with agents section W WinPE Windows Preinstallation Environment A minimal Windows system based on any of the following kernels Windows Vista PE 2 0 Windows Vista SP1 and Windows Server 2008 PE 2 1 Windows 7 PE 3 0 with or without the supplement for Windows 7 SP1 PE 3 1 WinPE is commonly used by OEMs and corporations for deployment test diagnostic and system repair purposes A machine can be booted into WinPE via PXE CD ROM USB flash drive or hard disk Acronis Plug in for WinPE p 262 enables running the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Agent p 263 in the preinstallation environment
135. vault located in a local folder Acronis Secure Zone or on a network share expand the Personal group and click the required vault 165 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 If the archive is stored in a local folder on the machine expand the Local folders group and click the required folder Mounting is not available if the archive is stored on optical media such as CD DVD or Blu ray Discs BD If the archive is stored on a network share expand the Network folders group select the required networked machine and then click the shared folder If the network share requires access credentials the program will ask for them 2 In the table to the right of the tree select the archive The table displays the names of the archives contained in each vault folder you select While you are reviewing the location content archives can be added deleted or modified by another user or by the program itself according to scheduled operations Use the Refresh button to refresh the list of archives 3 Click OK 8 3 2 Backup selection To select a backup 1 Select one of the backups by its creation date time 2 To assist you with choosing the right backup the bottom table displays the volumes contained in the selected backup To obtain information on a volume right click it and then click Information 3 Click OK 8 3 3 Access credentials To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following
136. virtual machine the software stores a few intermediate snapshots of it They are named Backup and Replica and should be kept Unneeded snapshots are deleted automatically The latest Replica snapshot corresponds to the result of the latest conversion You can go to this snapshot if you want to return the machine to that state for example if you worked with the machine and now want to discard the changes made to it Other snapshots are for internal use by the software 6 2 3 Recovery to the New virtual machine destination Rather than converting a TIB file to a virtual disk file which requires additional operations to bring the virtual disk into use Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 performs the conversion by recovery of a disk backup to a fully configured and operational new virtual machine You have the ability to adapt the virtual machine configuration to your needs when configuring the recovery operation With Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Agent for Windows or Agent for Linux you can create a new virtual machine in a local or network folder You can start the machine using the respective virtualization software or prepare the machine files for further usage The following table summarizes the available virtual machine formats and the actions you can take to add the machine to a virtualization server VM format Further action and tool to use Target virtualization platform VMware Workstation Export using VMware W
137. web applications 7 Use Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio to identify the database files For detailed instructions refer to SQL Server database files p 200 To find the configuration or service database files in SharePoint 2007 1 Open Central Administration site 2 Select Application Management gt Create or configure this farm s shared services 3 Right click a shared services provider and select Edit properties In the opened page you will see the database server and database name Write them down or copy to a text file 4 Repeat step 3 for other shared services providers 5 Use Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio to identify the database files For detailed instructions refer to SQL Server database files p 200 11 1 2 Truncating transaction logs This section describes how to truncate transaction logs when protecting Microsoft Exchange and Microsoft SQL servers by using disk backups The recommendations for SQL servers also apply to SQL servers included in a Microsoft SharePoint farm Active Directory databases normally use circular logging so they do not need log truncation 11 1 2 1 Transaction log truncation and log file shrinking for SQL Server Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 does not truncate transaction logs after creating a disk backup If you do not use the native backup engine of Microsoft SQL Server or any other third party backup solution that automatically manages transaction logs you ca
138. when operating under the bootable media The option enables you to receive e mail notifications about the backup task s successful completion failure or when user interaction is required The preset is Disabled To configure e mail notification 1 Select the Send e mail notifications check box to activate notifications 2 Under Send e mail notifications select the appropriate check boxes as follows When backup completes successfully When backup fails When user interaction is required 3 Select the Add full log to notification check box if you want the e mail notification to include log entries for the operation 4 In the E mail addresses field type the destination e mail address You can enter several addresses separated by semicolons 5 In the Subject field type the notification subject or leave the default subject variable Other variables are not supported Details In the received e mails the default variable will be transformed into the following phrase Task lt task name gt lt task result gt on machine lt machine name gt You can type any text before or after the variable 6 In the SMTP server field enter the name of the outgoing mail server SMTP 7 In the Port field set the port of the outgoing mail server By default the port is set to 25 8 If the outgoing mail server requires authentication enter User name and Password of the sender s e mail account If the SMTP server d
139. you work with the console Here you create edit and manage backup plans recovery tasks and perform other operations The main area displays different views and action pages according the items you select in the menu or Navigation tree 18 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 2 1 2 1 Views A view appears on the main area when clicking any item in the Navigation tree in the Navigation pane p 16 Log view Common way of working with views Generally every view contains a table of items a table toolbar with buttons and the Information panel Use filtering and sorting p 18 capabilities to search the table for the item in question In the table select the desired item In the information panel collapsed by default view the item s details To expand the panel click the arrow mark Perform actions on the selected item There are several ways of performing the same action on selected items By clicking the buttons on the table toolbar By selecting the items in the Actions menu By right clicking the item and selecting the operation in the context menu Sorting filtering and configuring table items The following is a guideline to sort filter and configure table items in any view To Do the following Sort items by any column Click a column s header to sort items in ascending order Click it once again to sort items in descending order 19 Copyr
140. 0 using Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 A dynamic volume is a volume located on dynamic disks p 269 or more exactly on a disk group p 268 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 supports the following dynamic volume types RAID levels simple spanned striped RAID 0 mirrored RAID 1 a mirror of stripes RAID 0 1 RAID 5 Backing up dynamic volumes Dynamic volumes are backed up in the same way as basic volumes When creating a backup plan through the GUI all types of volumes are available for selection as Items to back up When using the command line specify the dynamic volumes with the DYN prefix Command line examples acrocmd backup disk volume DYN1 DYN2 loc srv1 backups credentials netuser1 pass1 arc dyn1_2_arc This will back up volumes DYN1 and DYN2 to a network shared folder acrocmd backup disk volume DYN loc srv1 backups credentials netuser1 pass1 arc alldyn_arc This will back up all dynamic volumes of the local machine to a network shared folder Recovering dynamic volumes A dynamic volume can be recovered 30 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Over any type of existing volume To unallocated space of a disk group To unallocated space of a basic disk To a disk which has not been initialized Recovery over an existing volume When a dynamic volume is recovered over an existing volume either basic or dyna
141. 012 5 1 1 What to recover 1 Specifying the archive location In the Data path field specify the archive location path or click Browse and select the required location as described in Selecting archive location p 104 2 Selecting data The backed up data can be selected using the Data view tab or the Archive view tab The Data view tab displays all the backed up data by versions the date and time of backup creation within the selected archive location The Archive view tab displays the backed up data by the archives Selecting data using the Data view Since the Data view tab shares the same functionality with the data catalog selecting data on the Data view tab is performed in the same way as in the catalog For more information about selecting data see Data catalog p 104 Selecting data using the Archive view 1 Expand the required archive and select one of the successive backups by its creation date and time Thus you can revert the disk data to a certain moment in time If the list of archives is not displayed for example if the archive metadata has been lost click Refresh If the list of archives is too long you can filter the archives by selecting only the required type of archives to display To do this select the required archive type in the Show list 2 For disk or volume backups only in the Backup contents select the type of data to display from the drop down box Disks to recover disks as
142. 256 it to a different machine in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 GUI 13 1 8 9 Can I cancel my subscription Just wait until the subscription expires Refunds are not available for the online backup subscriptions 13 2 Where do I start On the Acronis Web site log in to your account create one if you are not registered yet and navigate to Online Backup gt for Business This is your account management Web page Here you can get a trial subscription locate an Acronis partner or buy subscriptions online The newly obtained subscriptions are listed as available subscriptions in the Manage subscriptions tab If you purchased your subscriptions from an Acronis partner register them manually using the Enter new registration code link The registration codes come with the purchase confirmation e mail Next install Acronis software if not yet installed and assign p 255 each subscription to a machine The subscriptions become activated After that you can start backing up to Acronis Online Backup Storage 13 3 Choosing a subscription Normally you choose a subscription based on the operating system your machine is running Server operating systems supported by Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online 255 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Windows 2000 SP4 all editions except for the Datacenter and Professional editions Windows Server 2003 2003 R2 the Standard Enterprise editions x86 x64
143. B flash drives the Name backup files using the archive name check box does not appear Instead make sure that the removable device mode p 153 is set to Removable media 4 3 3 5 Example 5 Daily backups with weekly drive swaps Consider the following scenario You want to perform daily backups of your machine a full backup each Monday and incremental backups on Tuesday through Sunday You want to store the backups on a locally attached USB hard drive in the archive MyMachine You have two such drives Either of them has drive letter D in the operating system when attached to the machine 58 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 You want to swap the drives each Monday so that one drive contains backups of the current week Monday through Sunday and the other drive those of the previous week In this scenario you need to create two backup plans as follows a When creating the first backup plan Specify MyMachine as the archive name Specify D as the archive location where D is the letter either of the drives has in the operating system when attached to the machine Select the Name backup files using the archive name check box Select Full as the backup type Schedule the backups to run every week on Monday b When creating the second backup plan specify the same settings as in the first backup plan but select Incremental as the backup type and
144. DITIONS REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON INFRINGEMENT ARE DISCLAIMED EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID Third party code may be provided with the Software and or Service The license terms for such third parties are detailed in the license txt file located in the root installation directory You can always find the latest up to date list of the third party code and the associated license terms used with the Software and or Service at http kb acronis com content 7696 Acronis patented technologies Technologies used in this product are covered by the following patents U S Patent 7 047 380 U S Patent 7 246 211 U S Patent 7 318 135 U S Patent 7 366 859 U S Patent 7 636 824 U S Patent 7 831 789 U S Patent 7 886 120 U S Patent 7 934 064 U S Patent 7 949 635 U S Patent 7 979 690 U S Patent 8 069 320 U S Patent 8 073 815 U S Patent 8 074 035 4 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Table of contents 1 Introducing Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 10 1 1 What s new in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 10 1 2 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 components
145. H 2002 2012 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 schedules tasks using the signature of the source hard disk If you recover the same disk signature you don t need to re create or edit the tasks created previously Some installed applications use disk signature for licensing and other purposes This enables you to keep all the Windows Restore Points on the recovered disk To recover VSS snapshots used by Windows Vista s Previous Versions feature Keep existing The program will leave the NT signature of the target hard disk untouched How the automatic mapping works Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 automatically maps the disks or volumes to the target disks only if the system bootability can be preserved Otherwise the automatic mapping is canceled and you have to map the disks or volumes manually Also you have to map the volumes manually if they are Linux logical volumes or Linux software RAID MD devices For more information on recovering logical volumes and MD devices see Recovering MD devices and logical volumes The automatic mapping is performed as follows 1 If the disk or volume is recovered to its original location the mapping process reproduces the original disk volume layout The original location for a disk or volume means exactly the same disk or volume that has been backed up A volume will not be considered original if its size location or other physical parameters have been ch
146. If SQL Server database file locations were customized proceed as follows 1 In Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio expand the necessary instance 2 Right click the database and then click Properties This will open the Database Properties dialog box 3 In the Select a page pane click Files and view the paths specified in the Database files section 11 1 1 2 Exchange Server database files Exchange databases have three types of files Database file edb Contains message headers message text and standard attachments An Exchange 2003 2007 database uses two files edb for text data and stm for MIME data Transaction log files log Contains the history of changes made to the database Only after a change has been securely logged it is then written to the database file This approach guarantees a reliable recovery of the database in a consistent state in case of a sudden database interruption Each log file is 1024 KB in size or 5120 KB in Exchange 2003 When an active log file is full Exchange closes it and creates a new log file Checkpoint file chk Tracks how far Exchange has progressed in writing logged information to the database file To find out the database file and log file paths proceed as follows Exchange 2010 Execute the following commands by using Exchange Management Shell Get MailboxDatabase Format List Property Name EdbFilePath LogFolderPath Exchange 2007 Execute the
147. K_LOGGED 2 Add the following sqlcmd command to the Post backup command p 95 sqlcmd S myServer instanceName i C myScript sql Where myServer name of the server instanceName name of the instance C myScript sql path to the script file created in the step 1 To automate transaction log truncation and shrinking for multiple SQL instances If you have more than one instance on the machine and want to apply the above procedure to these instances proceed as follows 1 Create a separate script file for each instance e g C script1 sql and C script2 sql 2 Create a batch file e g C truncate bat that will contain the commands for the corresponding instance sqlcmd S myServer instance1 i C script1 sql sqlcmd S myServer instance2 i C script2 sql 205 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 3 In the Post backup command specify the path to the batch file 11 1 2 2 Transaction log truncation for Exchange Server Before committing a transaction to a database file Exchange logs it to a transaction log file To track which of the logged transactions have been committed to the database Exchange uses checkpoint files Once the transactions are committed to the database and tracked by the checkpoint files the log files are no longer needed by the database If log files are not deleted they will eventually consume all the available disk space and the Exchange databases will be take
148. NTDS of a domain controller However their location is configurable The database files and the transaction logs may be stored on different volumes Make sure that both volumes are included in the backup To determine the current location of the database files and transaction logs examine the DSA Database file and Database log files path values in the following registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services Netlogon Parameters 11 1 1 4 SharePoint database files SharePoint stores content auxiliary SharePoint services data and farm configuration in Microsoft SQL Server databases To find database files in SharePoint 2010 1 Open Central Administration site 2 Select Upgrade and Migration gt Review database status You will see the SQL instance and database name for all of the databases 3 Use Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio to identify the files of the necessary database For detailed instructions refer to SQL Server database files p 200 To find the content database files in SharePoint 2007 1 Open Central Administration site 2 Select Application Management gt Content Databases 3 Select a web application 203 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 4 Selecta database In the opened page you will see the database server and database name Write them down or copy to a text file 5 Repeat step 4 for other databases of the web application 6 Repeat steps 3 5 for other
149. On schedule in Apply retention rules 2nd location 3rd location and so on Specifies where to copy or move p 71 the backups from the current location This option is available only if you selected either the Replicate just created backup to another location check box under How to back up or Move the oldest backups to another location in the Retention rules window Examples Weekly full backup The following scheme yields a full backup performed every Friday night Full backup Schedule Weekly every Friday at 10 00 PM 48 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Here all parameters except Schedule in Full backup are left empty All backups in the archive are kept indefinitely no archive cleanup is performed Full and incremental backup plus cleanup With the following scheme the archive will consist of weekly full backups and daily incremental backups We further require that a full backup begin only after all users have logged off Full backup Schedule Weekly every Friday at 10 00 PM Full backup Conditions User is logged off Incremental Schedule Weekly every workday at 9 00 PM Also let all backups older than one year be deleted from the archive and let the cleanup be performed upon creating a new backup Retention rules Delete backups older than 12 months Apply the rules After backing up By default a one year old full backup will not be deleted until all incremental backups that dep
150. SNMP notifications This option is effective for both Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media The option defines whether the agent s operating on the managed machine have to send the log events to the specified Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP managers You can choose the types of events to be sent You can override the settings set here exclusively for the events that occur during backup or during recovery in the Default backup and recovery options In this case the settings set here will be effective for operations other than backup and recovery such as archive validation or cleanup You can further override the settings set in the default backup and recovery options when creating a backup plan or a recovery task The settings you obtain in this case will be plan specific or task specific For detailed information about using SNMP with Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 please see Support for SNMP p 32 The preset is Disabled 239 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 To set up sending SNMP messages 1 Select the Send messages to SNMP server check box 2 Specify the appropriate options as follows Types of events to send choose the types of events All events Errors and warnings or Errors only Server name IP type the name or IP address of the host running the SNMP management application the messages will
151. SharePoint items from an unattached database 1 Attach the content database to SQL server as described in steps 1 5 of Accessing SQL Server databases from a disk backup p 209 2 Recover the data as described in http technet microsoft com en us library hh269602 3 Detach the database and unmount the previously mounted volume as described in steps 7 8 of Accessing SQL Server databases from a disk backup p 209 221 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 12 Administering a managed machine This section describes the views that are available through the navigation tree of the console connected to a managed machine and explains how to work with each view 12 1 Backup plans and tasks The Backup plans and tasks view keeps you informed of data protection on a given machine It lets you monitor and manage backup plans and tasks To find out what a backup plan is currently doing on the machine check the backup plan execution state p 223 A backup plan execution state is a cumulative state of the plan s most recent activities The status of a backup plan p 224 helps you to estimate whether the data is successfully protected To keep track of a task s current progress examine its state p 225 Check a task status p 225 to ascertain the result of a task Typical workflow Use filters to display the desired backup plans tasks in the backup plans table By default the table displays all the plans of t
152. Step 2 Place the hard drive into an anti static bag to protect the drive from electrostatic discharge If you do not have an anti static bag simply wrap the hard drive into aluminum foil Step 3 Use a sturdy box that is at least twice the size of the drive Pack the drive with a bubble wrap around all 6 sides so it can fit tight into the box and cannot be moved within DO NOT use Styrofoam peanuts for packing as they do not provide enough protection DO NOT send your media in jiffy bags 248 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Step 4 Choose the transport company that you will use for shipping On that company s web site prepare and print two prepaid shipping labels 1 Shipping label for sending your hard drive This label is placed on the top of the box You should send your package to one of the Acronis data centers The data center address can be obtained on the Initial seeding Recovery tab of your account management page by clicking Datacenter address We recommend that you use overnight shipping if you want to start doing incremental backups as soon as possible The data is generally available the next business day after the data center receives it 2 Shipping label for returning your hard drive Put this label in the box When returning your hard drive we will reuse the same packaging unless it is damaged If you do not enclose the label your drive will be securely discarded You might want to use th
153. To plan the Clone basic disk operation 1 Select a disk you want to clone 2 Select a disk as target for the cloning operation 3 Select a cloning method and specify advanced options The new volume structure will be graphically represented in the Disk management view immediately It is advisable that you deactivate Acronis Startup Recovery Manager p 262 ASRM if it is active before cloning a system disk Otherwise the cloned operating system might not boot You can activate the ASRM again after the cloning is completed If deactivation is not possible choose the As is method to clone the disk 10 6 2 1 Selecting source and target disks The program displays a list of partitioned disks and asks the user to select the source disk from which data will be transferred to another disk The next step is selection of a disk as target for the cloning operation The program enables the user to select a disk if its size will be sufficient to hold all the data from the source disk without any loss 186 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 If there is some data on the disk that was chosen as the target the user will receive a warning The selected target disk is not empty The data on its volumes will be overwritten meaning that all the data currently located on the chosen target disk will be lost irrevocably 10 6 2 2 Cloning method and advanced options The Clone basic disk operation usually means that the inf
154. UB version 1 and that the target virtualization platform is ESXi 5 For more details see Support for UEFI based machines p 31 Logical and dynamic volumes The resulting machine will have basic volumes even if Linux logical volume structure is present in the backup The same applies to dynamic volumes used in Windows systems If you want to recreate logical or dynamic volumes on the machine perform the conversion as described in Recovery to a manually created virtual machine p 144 Custom loader reactivation During conversion the disk interfaces may be changed as a result of migration to a different platform or just manually The software sets the system disk interface to be the same as the default interface for the new platform The default interface is SCSI for VMware and IDE for other supported platforms If the system disk interface changes the name of the boot device also changes while the boot loader still uses the old name Conversion of logical volumes to basic ones may also prevent the system from booting up For these reasons if the machine uses a custom boot loader you might need to configure the loader to point to the new devices and reactivate it Configuring GRUB is normally not needed because Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 does this automatically Should the need arise use the procedure described in How to reactivate GRUB and change its configuration p 125 For more considerations about phy
155. Use the current user credentials The program will access the location using the credentials of the current user Use the following credentials The program will access the location using the credentials you specify Use this option if the current user account does not have access permissions to the location You might need to provide special credentials for a network share or a storage node vault Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer 8 3 4 Volume selection Select the volumes to mount and configure the mounting parameters for each of the selected volumes as follows 166 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 1 Select the check box for each volume you need to mount 2 Click on the selected volume to set its mounting parameters Access mode choose the mode you want the volume to be mounted in Read only enables exploring and opening files within the backup without committing any changes Read write with this mode the program assumes that the backup content will be modifie
156. a personal vault p 275 Once created on a managed machine the zone is always present in the list of Personal vaults All the archive management operations available in vaults are also applicable for Acronis Secure Zone To learn more about archive management operations see Operations with archives and backups p 166 7 2 2 1 Increasing Acronis Secure Zone To increase Acronis Secure Zone 1 On the Manage Acronis Secure Zone page click Increase 2 Select volumes from which free space will be used to increase the Acronis Secure Zone 3 Specify the new size of the zone by dragging the slider and selecting any size between the current and maximum values The maximum size is equal to the disk s unallocated space plus the total free space of all selected partitions typing an exact value in the Acronis Secure Zone Size field When increasing the size of the zone the program will act as follows first it will use the unallocated space Volumes will be moved if necessary but not resized Moving of locked volumes requires a reboot 153 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 If there is not enough unallocated space the program will take free space from the selected volumes proportionally reducing the volumes size Resizing of locked partitions requires a reboot Reducing a system volume to the minimum size might prevent the machine s operating system from booting 4 Click OK 7 2 2 2
157. a whole with all their volumes Volumes to recover individual basic and or dynamic volumes Files to recover individual files and folders 3 In the Backup contents select the check boxes for the items you need to recover 4 Click OK Selecting MBR When recovering a system volume you will usually select the disk s MBR if The operating system cannot boot The disk is new and does not have MBR You are recovering custom or non Windows boot loaders such as LILO and GRUB The disk geometry is different to that stored in the backup There are probably other times when you may need to recover the MBR but the above are the most common When recovering the MBR of one disk to another Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 recovers Track 0 which does not affect the target disk s partition table and partition layout Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 automatically updates Windows loaders after recovery so there is no need to recover the MBR and Track 0 for Windows systems unless the MBR is damaged 104 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 5 1 1 1 Selecting archive location Location Details Online backup storage If the archive is stored in Acronis Online Backup Storage click Log in and specify the credentials to log in to the online storage Then expand the Online backup storage group and select the account Exporting and mounting are not supported for backups stor
158. abase use the Dcpromo tool to demote the domain controller with the corrupted database and then to promote that domain controller again To re promote the domain controller run the following commands dcpromo forceremoval dcpromo adv Recovering the database from a backup This way of restoring the database can be used regardless of whether the domain has other domain controllers To restore the database recover the Active Directory database files p 202 In addition if you have made any changes to Group Policy Objects GPOs since backup you also need to recover the SYSVOL folder p 207 To recover the Active Directory database from a backup 1 Restart the domain controller and press F8 during startup 2 On the Advanced Boot Options screen select Directory Services Restore Mode 3 Optional Create a copy of the current Active Directory database files to be able to undo the changes if need be 4 Change the original account of the Acronis agent service to the Directory Services Restore Mode DSRM Administrator account a Open the Services snap in b In the list of services double click Acronis Managed Machine Service c On the Log On tab in This account specify the user name and password that you use to log on to Directory Services Restore Mode and then click Apply d On the General tab click Start After the service starts click OK Details This change is needed because the Acronis agent service on a do
159. ackup amp Recovery 11 5 agent installation This setting can be changed at any time using the product GUI Options gt Machine options gt Customer Experience Program The option can also be configured using the Group Policy infrastructure A setting defined by a Group Policy cannot be changed using the product GUI unless the Group Policy is disabled on the machine 12 6 3 Alerts 12 6 3 1 Alert management Remove from Accepted alerts items older than This option defines whether to delete the accepted alerts from the Accepted alerts table The preset is Disabled When enabled you can specify the keeping period for the accepted alerts The accepted alerts older than this period will be deleted from the table automatically Automatically move inactive alerts to Accepted alerts This option defines whether to accept all the alerts that become inactive and move them to the Accepted alerts table automatically The preset is Disabled When enabled you can specify the alert types to apply this option to 12 6 3 2 Time based alerts Last backup The option defines whether to alert if no backup was performed on a given machine for a period of time You can configure the time period that is considered critical for your business The preset is alert if the last successful backup on a machine was completed more than 5 days ago 237 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 The alert is displayed in the Alerts
160. ackup scheme you can also specify when to automatically delete the backups from each of the locations 4 5 3 Setting up retention of backups You can set retention rules for backups when creating a backup plan p 34 The available retention rules depend on the chosen backup scheme Applying retention rules can be restricted by the Replication cleanup inactivity time p 76 option Simple scheme Each backup is retained until its age exceeds a limit you specify Then it is either deleted or moved To set up deleting the backups In Retention rules select Delete backups older than and then specify the retention period To set up moving the backups In Retention rules select Move backups older than specify the retention period Under Where to replicate move backups specify the location The retention rules are applied after creating a backup For the second and next locations creating a backup means copying or moving a backup there from the previous location Grandfather Father Son GFS scheme Backups of each type daily weekly and monthly are retained for the periods you specify in Keep backups and then deleted The retention rules are applied after creating a backup They are applied sequentially in the primary the second and all next locations Tower of Hanoi scheme Each backup is retained based on its level p 49 and then deleted You specify the number of levels in Number of levels T
161. ackupAndRecovery drp xsl in Linux To set up sending DRPs 1 Select the Send disaster recovery plan check box 87 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 2 Enter the e mail address in the E mail Address field You can enter several e mail addresses in a semicolon delimited format 3 Optional Change the default value of the Subject field if necessary 4 Enter the parameters of access to the SMTP server For more detailed information see E mail notifications p 132 5 Optional Click Send test e mail message to check if the settings are correct 4 6 8 Error handling These options are effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media These options enable you to specify how to handle errors that might occur during backup Do not show messages and dialogs while processing silent mode The preset is Disabled With the silent mode enabled the program will automatically handle situations requiring user interaction except for handling bad sectors which is defined as a separate option If an operation cannot continue without user interaction it will fail Details of the operation including errors if any can be found in the operation log Re attempt if an error occurs The preset is Enabled Number of attempts 30 Interval between attempts 30 seconds When a recoverable error occurs the program re attempts to perform the unsuccessful operation You can set the time inter
162. after the trial subscription expires buy the same type subscription and renew the trial subscription specifying the paid subscription Your backed up data will be kept online Regular backups of your machines will continue uninterrupted The service will not need to perform a new full backup To get a trial subscription do either of the following Go to the account management Web page click Try Now Free for 60 Days and select the necessary subscription type Install Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 on the machine you want to back up start the product click Back up now or Create backup plan click Location and click Get trial subscription Log in to your account create one if you are not registered yet A trial subscription will be automatically created and assigned to the machine 13 4 Activating online backup subscriptions To be able to back up a machine to the online storage you need to purchase and activate a subscription to the Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online service You can purchase subscriptions on the Acronis Web site or from an Acronis reseller Before activating a subscription please take into account the following considerations 256 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 As soon as a subscription is activated its subscription period starts To avoid losing subscription time activate the subscription only when you are ready to back up the machine If a machine already has a
163. ailable on your account management Web page Then click Renew all The confirmation window will summarize which subscriptions will be renewed If identical subscriptions are not found for some of the machines you have the option to cancel automatic renewal and renew each subscription individually What does Auto renew mean Auto renewal means that when the current subscription expires the next subscription will be automatically selected from the available subscriptions The next subscription must be identical to the current subscription If an identical subscription is not found auto renewal will not take place and your backups may fail No subscriptions will be bought automatically Only those subscriptions available at the time of auto renewal can be used You can select auto renewal for each individual subscription or set up bulk auto renewal of all of the activated subscriptions you have 13 1 8 6 How do I increase a storage quota for a machine Replace the subscription assigned to the machine with another subscription that has a larger storage quota The new subscription has the same type as the old one For example you can replace a workstation subscription only with another workstation subscription with a larger quota The storage quota increase is free of charge After the completion the operation cannot be reverted The new subscription will have a lesser subscription period It is calculated in the following way Pn Po
164. al location for example a network share as a personal vault Plan See Backup plan p 264 R Recovery point Date and time to which the backed up data can be reverted Registered machine A machine p 272 managed by a management server p 272 A machine can be registered on only one management server at a time A machine becomes registered as a result of the registration p 273 procedure Registration A procedure that adds a managed machine p 272 to a management server p 272 Registration sets up a trust relationship between the agent p 263 residing on the machine and the server During registration the console retrieves the management server s client certificate and passes it to the agent which uses it later to authenticate clients attempting to connect This helps prevent any attempts by network attackers from establishing a fake connection on behalf of a trusted principal the management server Replenishable pool A tape pool that is allowed to take tapes from the Free tapes pool when required Replication Copying a backup p 263 to another location By default the backup is copied immediately after creation A user has the option to postpone copying the backup by setting up replication inactivity time This feature replaces and enhances the dual destination backup feature which was available in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Retention rules A part of backup plan p 264 that speci
165. al machine settings p 143 you can change the name of the virtual machine the disk provisioning mode the allocated memory and other settings Machines of the same type and with the same name cannot be created in the same folder If you get an error message caused by identical names change either the VM name or the path 8 The destination disk for each of the source disks or source volumes and the MBRs will be selected automatically If required you can change the destination disks On a Microsoft Virtual PC be sure to recover the disk or volume where the operating system s loader resides to the Hard disk 1 Otherwise the operating system will not boot This cannot be fixed by changing the boot device order in BIOS because a Virtual PC ignores these settings 9 In When to recover specify when to start the recovery task 10 Optional In Task review Recovery options and change the settings from the default ones if need be You can specify in Recovery options gt VM power management whether to start the new virtual machine automatically after the recovery is completed This option is available only when the new machine is created on a virtualization server 11 Click OK If the recovery task is scheduled for the future specify the credentials under which the task will run In the Backup plans and tasks view you can examine the state and progress of the recovery task 6 2 3 2 Virtual machine type virtualization server
166. and click OK to proceed with recovery 6 After the recovery is complete attach the databases according to the instructions described in the Attaching SQL Server databases p 210 section Details If for any reason you did not recover all of the SQL Server database files you will not be able to attach the database However the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio will inform you about all the paths and names of the missing files and it will help you to identify what particular files the database consists of 11 2 2 Accessing SQL Server databases from a disk backup If you want to access the SQL Server databases for data mining or other short term purposes you can use the Mount image operation instead of recovery Just mount volumes containing the required database files from a disk backup image in the Read write mode and you are free to attach databases modify database files and work with them as if they were on a physical disk You can mount volumes if the disk backup is stored in a local folder except optical media such as CD DVD or Blu ray Discs Acronis Secure Zone or on a network share To attach databases contained in a disk backup to SQL Server 1 Connect the console to the SQL Server where Agent for Windows is installed 2 In the main menu select Actions gt Mount image 3 In the What to mount section select the source archive and specify the backup 4 In the Mount settings section a In Mount for select A
167. and the requirements of the volume type you have previously decided upon If you are creating a dynamic volume and select one or several basic disks as its destination you will receive a warning that the selected disk will be converted to dynamic automatically If need be you will be prompted to add the necessary number of disks to your selection according to the chosen type of the future volume If you click the Back button you will be returned to the previous page Select the type of volume being created p 192 If you click the Next button you will proceed to the next page Set the volume size p 193 Set the volume size On the third wizard page you will be able to define the size of the future volume according to the previously made selections In order to choose the necessary size between the minimum and the maximum values use the slider or enter the necessary values into the special windows between the minimum and the maximum values or click on the special handle and hold and drag the borders of the disk s picture with the cursor The maximum value normally includes the most possible unallocated space But in some cases the possible unallocated space and the proposed maximum volume size might differ e g when the size of one mirror establishes the size of the other mirror or the last 8Mb of the disk space is reserved for the future conversion of the disk from basic to dynamic For basic volumes if some unallocated spa
168. anged after backup Changing the volume letter or label does not prevent the software from recognizing the volume 2 If the disk or volume is recovered to a different location When recovering disks The software checks the target disks for size and volumes A target disk must contain no volumes and its size must be large enough to place the disk being recovered Not initialized target disks will be initialized automatically If the required disks cannot be found you have to map the disks manually When recovering volumes The software checks the target disks for unallocated space If there is enough unallocated space the volumes will be recovered as is If unallocated space on the target disks is less than the size of the volumes being recovered the volumes will be proportionally shrunk by decreasing their free space in order to fit the unallocated space If the shrunk volumes still cannot fit the unallocated space you have to map the volumes manually 5 1 4 2 Selecting target volumes Available volume destinations depend on the agents operating on the machine Recover to Physical machine Available when the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Agent for Windows or Agent for Linux is installed 110 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 The selected volumes will be recovered to the physical disks of the machine the console is connected to On selecting this you proceed to the regular volume mapping p
169. anings depending on the context 272 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 A volume information about which is stored in the extended partition table In contrast to a primary volume information about which is stored in the Master Boot Record A volume created using Logical Volume Manager LVM for Linux kernel LVM gives an administrator the flexibility to redistribute large storage space on demand add new and take out old physical disks without interrupting user service Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Agent p 263 for Linux can access back up and recover logical volumes when running in Linux with 2 6 x kernel or a Linux based bootable media p 265 M Machine A physical or virtual computer uniquely identified by an operating system installation Machines with multiple operating systems multi boot systems are considered as multiple machines Managed machine A machine p 272 either physical or virtual where at least one Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Agent p 263 is installed Managed vault A centralized vault p 266 managed by a storage node p 274 Archives p 263 in a managed vault can be accessed as follows bsp node_address vault_name archive_name Physically managed vaults can reside on a network share SAN NAS on a hard drive local to the storage node or on a tape library locally attached to the storage node The storage node performs cleanup p 266 and valid
170. ans Schedule whether the task is scheduled or set to start manually 231 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Last start time how much time has passed since the last plan or task start Deployment state the deployment states of the backup plan only for centralized backup plans Last finish time how much time has passed since the last plan or task end Last result the result of the last plan or task run Type backup plan or task type Owner the name of the user who created or last modified the plan Next start time when the plan or task will start the next time Comments description of the plan if provided Tasks The Tasks tab displays a list of all tasks of the selected backup plan To view the selected task details click Details Progress The Progress tab lists all the selected backup plan s activities that are currently running or waiting for their turn to run History The History tab lets you examine the history of all the backup plan s accomplished activities What to back up The Source tab provides the following information on the data selected for backup Source type the type of data selected for backing up Items to back up items selected to back up and their size Where to back up The Destination tab provides the following information Name name of the archive Location name of the
171. art How the settings you make will be processed This helps you to understand how creating the Acronis Secure Zone will transform a disk containing multiple volumes Acronis Secure Zone is always created at the end of the hard disk When calculating the final layout of the volumes the program will first use unallocated space at the end If there is no or not enough unallocated space at the end of the disk but there is unallocated space between volumes the volumes will be moved to add more unallocated space to the end When all unallocated space is collected but it is still not enough the program will take free space from the volumes you select proportionally reducing the volumes size Resizing of locked volumes requires a reboot However there should be free space on a volume so that the operating system and applications can operate for example for creating temporary files The program will not decrease a volume where free space is or becomes less than 25 of the total volume size Only when all volumes on the disk have 25 or less free space will the program continue decreasing the volumes proportionally As is apparent from the above setting the maximum possible zone size is not advisable You will end up with no free space on any volume which might cause the operating system or applications to work unstably and even fail to start 7 2 2 Managing Acronis Secure Zone Acronis Secure Zone is considered as
172. art on the next workday if the location s host is available 3 If the location s host will never be available on workdays at 9 00 PM the task never starts 4 4 5 3 Fits time interval Applies to Windows Linux Restricts a backup task s start time to a specified interval Example A company uses different locations on the same network attached storage for backing up users data and servers The workday starts at 8AM and ends at 5 PM Users data should be backed up as soon as the users log off but not earlier than 4 30 PM and not later than 10 PM Every day at 11 PM the company s servers are backed up So all the users data should be preferably backed up before this time in order to free network bandwidth By specifying the upper limit as 10 PM it is supposed that the backing up of users data does not take more than one hour If a user is still logged on within the specified time interval or logs off at any other time do not back up the users data i e skip task execution Event When logging off The following user Any user Condition Fits the time interval from 04 30 00 PM until 10 00 00 PM Task start conditions Skip the task execution As a result 1 if the user logs off between 04 30 00 PM and 10 00 00 PM the backup task will start immediately following the logging off 2 if the user logs off at any other time the task will be skipped What if What if a task is scheduled to be e
173. as individual folders or files File backup File level data protection is based on backing up files and folders residing on the machine where the agent is installed or on a network share Files can be recovered to their original location or to another place It is possible to recover all files and folders that were backed up or select which of them to recover Other operations Conversion to a virtual machine Agent for Windows performs the conversion by recovering a disk backup to a new virtual machine of any of the following types VMware Workstation Microsoft Virtual PC Parallels Workstation Citrix XenServer Open Virtual Appliance OVA or Red Hat Kernel based Virtual Machine KVM Files of the fully configured and operational machine will be placed in the folder you select You can start the machine using the respective virtualization software or prepare the machine files for further usage Disk management Agent for Windows includes Acronis Disk Director Lite a handy disk management utility Disk management operations such as cloning disks converting disks creating formatting and deleting volumes changing a disk partitioning style between MBR and GPT or changing a disk label can be performed either in the operating system or using bootable media 1 2 1 1 Universal Restore The Universal Restore add on enables you to use the restore to dissimilar hardware functionality on the machine where the agent is installed and create b
174. ask will start anyway or force the condition tell the user to log off enable the required network connection Waiting while another task locks the necessary resources A one time waiting case may occur when a task start is delayed or a task run lasts much longer than usual for some particular reason and prevents another task from starting This situation is resolved automatically when the obstructing task comes to an end Consider stopping a task if it hangs for too long to enable the next task to start Persistent task overlapping may result from an incorrectly scheduled plan or plans It makes sense to edit the plan in this case 4 Idle All the tasks are idle No action is required 12 1 2 2 Backup plan statuses A backup plan can have one of the following statuses Error Warning OK A backup plan status is derived from the results of the last run of the plans tasks activities Status How it is determined How to handle 1 Error At least one task has failed Otherwise see 2 Identify the failed tasks gt Check the tasks log to find out the reason of the failure then do one or more of the following Remove the reason of the failure gt optionally Start the failed task manually Edit the local plan to prevent its future failure if a local plan has failed 2 Warning At least one task has succeeded with warnings Otherwise see 3 View the log to read the warnings gt optionally Per
175. at are older than 3 months this is a backup scheme validate the last backup immediately after its creation this is a validation rule protect the archive with a password this is an option Physically a backup plan is a bundle of tasks p 274 executed on a managed machine p 272 A backup plan can be created directly on the machine imported from another machine local plan or propagated to the machine from the management server centralized plan p 265 Backup scheme A part of the backup plan p 264 that includes the backup schedule and optionally the retention rules and the cleanup p 266 schedule For example perform a full backup p 270 monthly on the last day of the month at 10 00AM and an incremental backup p 271 on Sundays at 10 00PM Delete backups that are older than 3 months Check for such backups every time the backup operation is completed Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 provides the ability to use well known optimized backup schemes such as GFS and Tower of Hanoi to create a custom backup scheme or to back up data once 265 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Bootable agent A bootable rescue utility that includes most of the functionality of the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Agent p 263 Bootable agent is based on Linux kernel A machine p 272 can be booted into a bootable agent using either bootable media p 265 or Acronis PXE Server Operations can be
176. at they can use the product in various circumstances without step by step instructions 3 1 Owners This section explains the concept of a backup plan task owner and an archive owner Plan task owner A local backup plan owner is the user who created or last modified the plan Tasks belonging to a backup plan are owned by the backup plan owner Tasks that do not belong to a backup plan such as the recovery task are owned by the user who has created or last modified the task Managing a plan task owned by another user Having Administrator privileges on the machine a user can modify tasks and local backup plans owned by any user registered in the operating system When a user opens a plan or task for editing which is owned by another user all passwords set in the task are cleared This prevents the modify settings leave passwords trick The program displays a warning each time you are trying to edit a plan task last modified by another user On seeing the warning you have two options Click Cancel and create your own plan or task The original task will remain intact Continue editing You will have to enter all credentials required for the plan or task execution Archive owner An archive owner is the user who saved the archive to the destination To be more precise this is the user whose account was specified when creating the backup plan in the Where to back up step By default the plan s credentials
177. ation Delete a single or multiple backups Select one of the backups you want to delete then click Delete The program duplicates your selection in the Backups deletion p 169 window that has check boxes for each archive and each backup Review the selection and correct if need be select the check boxes for the desired backups then confirm the deletion Delete all archives and backups in the vault Please be aware that if filters have been applied to the vaults list you see only a part of the vault content Be sure that the vault does not contain archives you need to retain before starting the operation Click Delete all The program duplicates your selection in the Backups deletion p 169 window that has check boxes for each archive and each backup Review the selection and correct if need be then confirm the deletion 8 4 3 Converting a backup to full When the chain of incremental backups in an archive becomes long conversion of an incremental backup to a full one increases the reliability of your archive You may also want to convert a differential backup if there are incremental backups that depend on it During the conversion the selected incremental or differential backup is replaced with a full backup for the same point in time The previous backups in the chain are not changed All subsequent incremental and differential backups up to the nearest full backup are also updated The new backup versions are create
178. ation Starting the operations Any operation can be launched From the volume or disk context menu both in the table and the graphic panel From the Disk management menu of the console From the Operations bar on the Actions and Tools pane Note that the list of available operations in the context menu the Disk management menu and the Operations bar depends on the selected volume or disk type The same is true for unallocated space as well Displaying operation results The results of any disk or volume operation you have just planned are immediately displayed in the Disk management view of the console For example if you create a volume it will be immediately shown in the table as well as in graphical form at the bottom of the view Any volume changes including changing the volume letter or label are also immediately displayed in the view 10 6 Disk operations Acronis Disk Director Lite includes the following operations that can be performed on disks Disk Initialization p 184 initializes the new hardware added to the system Basic disk cloning p 185 transfers complete data from the source basic MBR disk to the target Disk conversion MBR to GPT p 187 converts an MBR partition table to GPT Disk conversion GPT to MBR p 188 converts a GPT partition table to MBR Disk conversion Basic to Dynamic p 188 converts a basic disk to dynamic Disk conversion
179. ation p 274 for each archive stored in the managed vault An administrator can specify additional operations that the storage node will perform deduplication p 267 encryption Management server Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Management Server A central server that drives data protection within the enterprise network Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Management Server provides the administrator with a single entry point to the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 infrastructure an easy way to protect data on numerous machines p 272 using centralized backup plans p 265 and grouping enterprise wide monitoring and reporting functionality the ability to create centralized vaults p 266 for storing enterprise backup archives p 263 the ability to manage storage nodes p 274 the centralized catalog p 267 of all data stored on the storage nodes If there are multiple management servers on the network they operate independently manage different machines and use different centralized vaults for storing archives Media builder A dedicated tool for creating bootable media p 265 273 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 P Personal vault A local or networked vault p 275 created using direct management p 267 Once a personal vault is created a shortcut to it appears on the managed machine in the Vaults list Multiple machines can use the same physic
180. back up Location p 39 Specify a path to the location where the backup archive will be stored and the archive name The archive name has to be unique within the location Otherwise backups of the newly created backup plan will be placed to the existing archive that belongs to another backup 35 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 plan The default archive name is Archive N where N is the sequence number of the archive in the location you have selected Select the mode the removable device will be used in p 153 If the specified location is an RDX drive or USB flash drive select the device mode Removable media or Fixed drive Backup file naming access credentials archive comments To access these settings click Show backup file naming access credentials archive comments File naming p 54 Optional Select the Name backup files using the archive name as in Acronis True Image Echo rather than auto generated names check box if you want to use simplified file naming for the archive s backups Not available when backing up to a managed vault tape Acronis Secure Zone or Acronis Online Backup Storage When backing up to an RDX drive or USB flash drive the file naming scheme is determined by the removable device mode p 153 Access credentials p 41 Optional Provide credentials for the location if the plan account does not have access permissions to the location Archive comments Optional Enter
181. backups to run every hour from midnight Result The 24 backups of January 1 2012 will be stored as ServerFiles 2012 01 01 tib ServerFiles 2012 01 01 2 tib and so on up to ServerFiles 2012 01 01 24 tib The following day the backups will start with the full backup ServerFiles 2012 01 02 tib See also The Date variable p 55 4 3 3 4 Example 4 Daily full backups with daily drive swaps Consider the following scenario You want to perform a daily full backup of your machine You want to store the backup on a locally attached USB hard drive in the file MyMachine tib You have two such drives Each of them has the drive letter D when attached to the machine You want to swap the drives before each backup so that one drive contains today s backup and the other drive yesterday s backup You want each new backup to replace the backup on the currently attached drive In this scenario create a backup plan with a daily schedule When creating the backup plan Specify MyMachine as the archive name Specify D as the archive location Select the Name backup files using the archive name check box Select Full as the backup type Result Each hard disk drive will contain one full backup While one drive is attached to the machine you can keep the other drive off site for extra data protection If you choose to back up to locally attached RDX drives or US
182. be sent to Community type the name of the SNMP community to which both the host running SNMP management application and the sending machine belong The typical community is public Click Send test message to check if the settings are correct To disable sending SNMP messages clear the Send messages to SNMP server check box The messages are sent over UDP The next section contains additional information about Setting up SNMP services on the receiving machine p 239 12 6 5 2 Setting up SNMP services on the receiving machine Windows To install the SNMP service on a machine running Windows 1 Start gt Control Panel gt Add or Remove Programs gt Add Remove Windows Components 2 Select Management and Monitoring Tools 3 Click Details 4 Select the Simple Network Management Protocol check box 5 Click OK You might be asked for lmmib2 dll that can be found on the installation disc of your operating system Linux To receive SNMP messages on a machine running Linux the net snmp for RHEL and SUSE or the snmpd for Debian package has to be installed SNMP can be configured using the snmpconf command The default configuration files are located in the etc snmp directory etc snmp snmpd conf configuration file for the Net SNMP SNMP agent etc snmp snmptrapd conf configuration file for the Net SNMP trap daemon 12 6 5 3 Windows event log This option is effective only in Windows op
183. ble Acronis Online Backup Storage tape device or on a hard drive local to the machine Acronis Secure Zone is considered as a personal vault available to all users that can log on the system Personal vaults are created automatically when backing up any of the above locations Personal vaults can be used by local backup plans or local tasks Sharing a personal vault Multiple machines can refer to the same physical location for example to the same shared folder However each of the machines has its own shortcut in the Vaults tree Users that back up to a shared folder can see and manage each other s archives according to their access permissions for that folder To ease archive identification the Personal vault view has the Owner column that displays the owner of each archive To find out more about the owner concept see Owners and credentials p 23 Metadata The meta folder is created during backup in every personal vault This folder contains additional information about archives and backups stored in the vault such as archive owners or the machine name If you accidentally delete the meta folder it will be automatically recreated next time you access the vault But some information like owner names and machine names may be lost 7 1 2 1 Actions on personal vaults To access actions on personal vaults click Vaults gt Personal in the Navigation pane All the operations described here are performed by clicking the correspon
184. ble on the Initial Seeding Recovery tab A license purchased in Acronis online store becomes available immediately after the payment is processed 13 1 7 8 How do I track a Large Scale Recovery order status On the Acronis Web site the Initial Seeding Recovery tab shows you the status of all your orders In addition you will receive e mail notifications about most important events Available The license can be used for any machine An order was created This status is set upon completion of the Large Scale Recovery order form This means that the license cannot be used for any other machine From this point on you can cancel the order if something goes wrong This will return the license to the pool of available licenses The order is being processed Order processing in the datacenter started Writing data Your backups are being written onto the media From this point on you cannot cancel the order Writing data has been completed Your backups have been successfully written to the media Ready to ship the media Your order has been processed and the media will be shipped shortly The order has been completed The media has been shipped The media has been shipped to you the carrier and the tracking number are specified Occasional The order is on hold Your order was placed on hold due to technical difficulties processing the order Acronis is working on re
185. bles unattended onsite operation when booting from a PXE server or WDS RIS 4 Optional Remote logon settings user name and password to be entered on the console side at connection to the agent If you leave these fields empty the connection will be enabled on typing any symbols in the prompt window 5 Optional Network settings p 174 TCP IP settings to be assigned to the machine network adapters 6 Optional Network port p 175 the TCP port that the bootable agent listens for incoming connection 7 The type of media to create You can 173 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 create CD DVD or other bootable media such as removable USB flash drives if the hardware BIOS allows for boot from such media build an ISO image of a bootable disc to burn it later on a blank disc upload the selected components to Acronis PXE Server upload the selected components to a WDS RIS 8 Optional Windows system drivers to be used by Acronis Universal Restore p 175 This window appears only if the Acronis Universal Restore add on is installed and a media other than PXE or WDS RIS is selected 9 Path to the media ISO file or the name or IP and credentials for PXE or WDS RIS 9 1 1 1 Kernel parameters This window lets you specify one or more parameters of the Linux kernel They will be automatically applied when the bootable media starts These parameters are typ
186. boot grub grub conf backup 5 Edit the mnt system boot grub menu lst file for Debian Ubuntu and SUSE Linux distributions or the mnt system boot grub grub conf file for Fedora and Red Hat Enterprise Linux distributions for example as follows vi mnt system boot grub menu lst 6 In the menu lst file respectively grub conf find the menu item that corresponds to the system you are recovering This menu items have the following form title Red Hat Enterprise Linux Server 2 6 24 4 root hd0 0 kernel vmlinuz 2 6 24 4 ro root dev sda2 rhgb quiet initrd initrd 2 6 24 4 img The lines starting with title root kernel and initrd respectively determine The title of the menu item The device on which the Linux kernel is located typically this is the boot partition or the root partition such as root hd0 0 in this example 126 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 The path to the kernel on that device and the root partition in this example the path is vmlinuz 2 6 24 4 and the root partition is dev sda2 You can specify the root partition by label such as root LABEL identifier in the form root UUID some_uuid or device name such as root dev sda2 The path to the initrd service on that device 7 Edit the file mnt system etc fstab to correct the names of any devices that have changed as a result of the recovery 8 Start the GRUB shell by running one of the follo
187. can back up directly to the device or back up to a local or network folder and then copy the backup to the device Make sure that the device has only one volume and that the file system on that volume is NTFS or FAT32 13 1 6 5 Can I send more than one backup under a single Initial Seeding license No An Initial Seeding license allows you to create only one backup on the machine However if you have made a mistake or have decided to create another backup for any reason you can cancel the initial seeding order As a result the license will become available again 13 1 6 6 Can I send backups taken from a number of machines on a single hard drive Yes However the number of required licenses is still one per machine 246 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 13 1 6 7 How to buy an Initial Seeding license You can buy an Initial Seeding license from an Acronis partner or in Acronis online store Follow the link http www acronis com my backup recovery online buy to locate a partner or to buy online Having purchased a license from an Acronis partner you receive a confirmation e mail with a registration code Click Enter new registration code on the same Web page and register the license The license becomes available on the Initial Seeding Recovery tab A license purchased in Acronis online store becomes available immediately after the payment is processed 13 1 6 8 How to perform initial seeding 1 Ma
188. cations 1 Select when to send alert notifications As soon as an alert appears to send a notification every time a new alert occurs Click Select the types of alerts to specify the types of alerts to send notifications about On schedule send notification about all current alerts to send a cumulative alert notification including all alerts which occurred over a time interval you specify Click Select the types of alerts to specify the types of alerts to send notifications about Set up the notification Frequency and Time 2 Click OK 12 6 5 Event tracing It is possible to duplicate log events generated by the agent s operating on the managed machine in the Application Event Log of Windows or send the events to the specified SNMP managers If you do not modify the event tracing options anywhere except for here your settings will be effective for each local backup plan and each task created on the machine You can override the settings set here exclusively for the events occurred during backup or during recovery see Default backup and recovery options In this case the settings set here will be effective for operations other than backup and recovery such as archive validation or cleanup You can further override the settings set in the default backup and recovery options when creating a backup plan or a recovery task The settings you obtain in this case will be plan specific or task specific 12 6 5 1
189. cations the backups in each location form a separate archive 264 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Backup operation An operation that creates a copy of the data that exists on a machine s p 272 hard disk for the purpose of recovering or reverting the data to a specified date and time Backup options Configuration parameters of a backup operation p 263 such as pre post backup commands maximum network bandwidth allotted for the backup stream or data compression level Backup options are a part of a backup plan p 264 Backup plan Plan A set of rules that specify how the given data will be protected on a given machine A backup plan specifies what data to back up the backup archive p 263 name and location the backup scheme p 264 This includes the backup schedule and optionally the retention rules p 273 optionally additional operations to perform with the backups replication p 273 validation p 274 conversion to a virtual machine the backup options p 264 For example a backup plan can contain the following information back up volume C this is the data the plan will protect name the archive MySystemVolume and place it in server backups this is the backup archive name and location perform a full backup monthly on the last day of the month at 10 00AM and an incremental backup on Sundays at 10 00PM Delete backups th
190. ce at 09 00 00 PM 3 Effective From empty If you have created the task say on Monday at 11 30 AM the task will be started on the same day at 9 PM If the task was created say on Friday after 9 PM then it will be started for the first time on the nearest workday Monday in our example at 9 PM End date empty The task will be restarted for an indefinite number of weeks This schedule is widely used when creating a custom backup scheme The Workdays like schedule is added to the incremental backups while the full backup is scheduled to be performed one day in the week For more details see the Full and incremental backups plus cleanup example in the Custom backup scheme p 46 section Several weekly schedules for one task In the case when the task needs to be run on different days of the weeks with different time intervals consider adding a dedicated schedule to every desired day of the week or to several days For example you need the task to be run with the following schedule Monday twice at 12 PM noon and 9 PM Tuesday every 3 hours from 9 AM till 9 PM Wednesday every 3 hours from 9 AM till 9 PM Thursday every 3 hours from 9 AM till 9 PM Friday twice at 12 PM and 9 PM i e same as on Monday Saturday once at 9 PM 64 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Sunday once at 9 PM Combining the identical times the following three schedules can be added t
191. ce disk and Event ID 7 occurs when Windows discovers a bad block on a disk whereas an Error event with Event source disk and Event ID 15 occurs when a disk is not ready for access yet Examples Bad block emergency backup One or more bad blocks that have suddenly appeared on a hard disk usually indicate that the hard disk drive will soon fail Suppose that you want to create a backup plan that will back up hard disk data as soon as such a situation occurs When Windows detects a bad block on a hard disk it records an event with the event source disk and the event number 7 into the System log the type of this event is Error When creating the plan type or select the following in the Schedule area Log name System Event source disk Event type Error Event ID 7 Important To ensure that such a task will complete despite the presence of bad blocks you must make the task ignore bad blocks To do this in Backup options go to Error handling and then select the Ignore bad sectors check box Pre update backup in Vista Suppose that you want to create a backup plan that will automatically perform a backup of the system for example by backing up the volume where Windows is installed every time that Windows is about to install updates Having downloaded one or more updates and scheduled their installation the Microsoft Windows Vista operating system records an event with the event source Microsoft Wind
192. ce is left on the disk you also will be able to choose the position of the new volume on the disk If you click the Back button you will be returned to the previous page Select destination disks p 192 If you click the Next button you will proceed to the next page Set the volume options p 193 Set the volume options On the next wizard page you can assign the volume Letter by default the first free letter of the alphabet and optionally a Label by default none Here you will also specify the File system and the Cluster size The wizard will prompt you to choose one of the Windows file systems FAT16 disabled if the volume size has been set at more than 2 GB FAT32 disabled if the volume size has been set at more than 2 TB NTFS or to leave the volume Unformatted 194 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 In setting the cluster size you can choose between any number in the preset amount for each file system Note the program suggests the cluster size best suited to the volume with the chosen file system If you are creating a basic volume which can be made into a system volume this page will be different giving you the opportunity to select the volume Type Primary Active Primary or Logical Typically Primary is selected to install an operating system to a volume Select the Active default value if you want to install an operating system on this volume to boot at machine startup If the
193. centralized log and more Centralized task A task p 274 propagated to a machine from the management server p 272 Such task can be modified only by editing the original task or centralized backup plan p 265 on the management server Centralized vault A networked location allotted by the management server p 272 administrator to serve as storage for the backup archives p 263 A centralized vault can be managed by a storage node p 274 or be unmanaged The total number and size of archives stored in a centralized vault are limited by the storage size only As soon as the management server administrator creates a centralized vault the vault name and path to the vault are distributed to all machines registered p 273 on the server The shortcut to the vault appears on the machines in the Vaults list Any backup plan p 264 existing on the machines including local plans can use the centralized vault On a machine that is not registered on the management server a user having the privilege to back up to the centralized vault can do so by specifying the full path to the vault If the vault is managed the user s archives will be managed by the storage node as well as other archives stored in the vault Cleanup Deleting backups p 263 from a backup archive p 263 or moving them to a different location in order to get rid of outdated backups or prevent the archive from exceeding the desired size Cleanup consists ofap
194. characters You can use one or more wildcard characters and in the criterion These characters can be used both within the full path and in the file or folder name The asterisk substitutes for zero or more characters in a file name For example the criterion Doc txt covers files such as Doc txt and Document txt The question mark substitutes for exactly one character in a file name For example the criterion Doc txt covers files such as Doc1 txt and Docs txt but not the files Doc txt or Doc11 txt 39 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Exclusion examples Criterion Example Description Windows and Linux By name F log F Excludes all files named F log Excludes all folders named F By mask log F Excludes all files with the log extension Excludes all files and folders with names starting with F such as folders F F1 and files F log F1 log By mask F log Excludes all log files with names consisting of four symbols and starting with F Windows By file path C Finance F log Excludes the file named F log located in the folder C Finance By folder path C Finance F or C Finance F Excludes the folder C Finance F be sure to specify the full path starting from the drive letter Linux By file path home user Finance F log Excludes the file named F log located in the folder directory home user Finance By folder path home user Fi
195. chives Use the Archive view to perform operations with archives and backups stored in the vault For more information about these operations see the following sections Operations with archives stored in a vault p 167 Operations with backups p 167 Sorting filtering and configuring table items p 18 What does the icon mean When browsing archives on the Archive view tab you may encounter a backup with the icon This icon means that the backup is marked for deletion but cannot be deleted immediately because other backups depend on it and consolidation is either not possible or disabled by retention rules You cannot perform any operation on backups marked for deletion They disappear from the Archive view after they are physically deleted This happens when all of the dependent backups are also deleted or at next cleanup after you enable consolidation in the retention rules 7 1 2 Personal vaults A vault is called personal if it was created using direct connection of the console to a managed machine Personal vaults are specific for each managed machine Personal vaults are visible to any user that can log on to the system A user s right to back up to a personal vault is defined by the user s permission for the folder or device where the vault is located 148 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 A personal vault can be organized on a network share FTP server detachable media or remova
196. ckaged form Normally only sectors that contain data are copied Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 provides an option to take a raw image that is copy all the disk sectors which enables imaging of unsupported file systems Disk group A number of dynamic disks p 269 that store the common configuration data in their LDM databases and therefore can be managed as a whole Normally all dynamic disks created within the same machine p 272 are members of the same disk group As soon as the first dynamic disk is created by the LDM or another disk management tool the disk group name can be found in the registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services dmio Boot Info Primary Disk Group Name The next created or imported disks are added to the same disk group The group exists until at least one of its members exists Once the last dynamic disk is disconnected or converted to basic the group is discontinued though its name is kept in the above registry key In case a dynamic disk is created or connected again a disk group with an incremental name is created When moved to another machine a disk group is considered as foreign and cannot be used until imported into the existing disk group The import updates the configuration data on both the local 269 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 and the foreign disks so that they form a single entity A foreign group is imported as is will have the original
197. cond disk as simple Recovery to a disk that has not been initialized In this case the target disk will be automatically initialized to the MBR partitioning style The dynamic volumes will be recovered as basic ones If the volumes cannot fit into unallocated space they will be proportionally resized by decreasing their free space The table below demonstrates the resulting volume types depending on the backed up source and the recovery target Backup source Recovered to Dynamic volume Basic volume Dynamic volume Dynamic volume Type as of the target Dynamic volume Type as of the target Unallocated space disk group Dynamic volume Type as of the source Dynamic volume Simple Basic volume or unallocated space on a basic disk Basic volume Basic volume Moving and resizing volumes during recovery You can manually resize the resulting basic volume during recovery or change the volume s location on the disk A resulting dynamic volume cannot be moved or resized manually 31 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Preparing disk groups and volumes Before recovering dynamic volumes to bare metal you should create a disk group on the target hardware You also might need to create or increase unallocated space on an existing disk group This can be done by deleting volumes or converting basic disks to dynamic You might want to change the target volume type basic simple spanned striped
198. configure it from scratch 8 The log lifetime is limited to the current session You can save the entire log or the filtered log entries to a file 9 3 1 Setting up a display mode For a machine booted from media a display video mode is detected automatically based on the hardware configuration monitor and graphics card specifications If for some reason the video mode is detected incorrectly do the following 179 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 1 In the boot menu press F11 2 Add to the command prompt the following command vga ask and then proceed with booting 3 From the list of supported video modes choose the appropriate one by typing its number for example 318 and then press ENTER If you do not wish to follow this procedure every time you boot from media on a given hardware configuration re create the bootable media with the appropriate mode number in our example vga 0x318 typed in the Kernel parameters window see the Bootable Media Builder p 172 section for details 9 3 2 Configuring iSCSI and NDAS devices This section describes how to configure Internet Small Computer System Interface iSCSI devices and Network Direct Attached Storage NDAS devices when working under bootable media These devices are connected to the machine through a network interface and appear as if they were locally attached devices On the network an iSCSI device is identified by its IP address and an
199. continue If you are about to clone a disk comprising of a system volume pay attention to the Advanced options By clicking Finish you ll add the pending operation of the disk cloning To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 197 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them Using advanced options When cloning a disk comprising of a system volume you need to retain an operating system bootability on the target disk volume It means that the operating system must have the system volume information e g volume letter matched with the disk NT signature which is kept in the MBR disk record But two disks with the same NT signature cannot work properly under one operating system If there are two disks having the same NT signature and comprising of a system volume on a machine at the startup the operating system runs from the first disk discovers the same signature on the second one automatically generates a new unique NT signature and assigns it to the second disk As a result all the volumes on the second disk will lose their letters all paths will be invalid on the disk and programs won t find their files The operating system on that disk will be unbootable You have the following two alternatives to retain system bootability on the target disk volume 1 Copy NT signature to provide the target disk with the source disk NT signature matched with the Regist
200. cover the volume as logical to access the data only File system By default the recovered volume will have the same file system as the original volume has You can change the volume s file system during recovery if required Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 can make the following file system conversions FAT 16 gt FAT 32 and Ext2 gt Ext3 For volumes with other native file systems this option is not available Assume you are going to recover a volume from an old low capacity FAT16 disk to a newer disk FAT16 would not be effective and might even be impossible to set on the high capacity hard disk That s because FAT16 supports volumes up to 4 GB so you will not be able to recover a 4 GB FAT16 volume to a volume that exceeds that limit without changing the file system It would make sense here to change the file system from FAT16 to FAT32 Older operating systems MS DOS Windows 95 and Windows NT 3 x 4 x do not support FAT32 and will not be operable after you recover a volume and change its file system These can be normally recovered on a FAT16 volume only Volume partition alignment Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 automatically eliminates volume misalignment a situation when volume clusters are not aligned with disk sectors The misalignment occurs when recovering volumes created with the Cylinder Head Sector CHS addressing scheme to a hard disk drive HDD or solid state drive SSD drive that has a 4 KB sector s
201. cted Cleared Selected Cleared Do not perform the data capture until the command execution is complete Selected Selected Cleared Cleared Result Preset Perform the data capture only after the command is successfully executed Fail the task if the command execution fails Perform the data capture after the command is executed despite execution failure or success N A Perform the data capture concurrently with the command and irrespective of the command execution result A command is considered failed if its exit code is not equal to zero 4 6 18 2 Post data capture command To specify a command batch file to be executed after data capture 1 In the Command field type a command or browse to a batch file The program does not support interactive commands i e commands that require user input for example pause 2 In the Working directory field specify a path to a directory where the command batch file will be executed 3 In the Arguments field specify the command s execution arguments if required 4 Depending on the result you want to obtain select the appropriate options as described in the table below 5 Click Test command to check if the command is correct Check box Selection Fail the task if the command execution fails Selected Cleared Selected Cleared Do not back up until the command execution is complete Selected Selected Cleared Cleared 97 Copyright
202. cted registry keys in Windows or on the file system in Linux Tower of Hanoi A popular backup scheme p 264 aimed to maintain the optimal balance between a backup archive p 263 size and the number of recovery points p 273 available from the archive Unlike the GFS p 270 scheme that has only three levels of recovery resolution daily weekly monthly resolution the Tower of Hanoi scheme continuously reduces the time interval between recovery points as the backup age increases This allows for very efficient usage of the backup storage For more information please refer to Tower of Hanoi backup scheme p 49 U Unmanaged vault Any vault p 275 that is not a managed vault p 272 V Validation An operation that checks the possibility of data recovery from a backup p 263 275 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Validation of a file backup imitates recovery of all files from the backup to a dummy destination Validation of a disk backup calculates a checksum for every data block saved in the backup Both procedures are resource intensive While the successful validation means a high probability of successful recovery it does not check all factors that influence the recovery process If you back up the operating system only a test recovery under the bootable media to a spare hard drive can guarantee successful recovery in the future Vault A place for storing backup archives p 263 A
203. ctive only in Windows operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media This option defines whether the agent s operating on the managed machine have to log events of the backup operations in the Application Event Log of Windows to see this log run eventvwr exe or select Control Panel gt Administrative tools gt Event Viewer You can filter the events to be logged The preset is Use the setting set in the Machine options To select whether to log the backup operations events in the Application Event Log of Windows Choose one of the following Use the setting set in the Machine options to use the setting specified for the machine For more information refer to Machine options Log the following event types to log events of the backup operations in the Application Event Log Specify the types of events to be logged All events log all events information warnings and errors Errors and warnings 89 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Errors only Do not log to disable logging events of the backup operations in the Application Event Log 4 6 10 Fast incremental differential backup The option is effective in Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media This option is effective for incremental and differential disk level backup This option defines whether a file change is detected using the file size and time s
204. d and creates an incremental backup to capture the changes Assign letter in Windows Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 will assign an unused letter to the mounted volume If required select another letter to assign from the drop down list Mount point in Linux specify the directory where you want the volume to be mounted 3 If several volumes are selected for mounting click on every volume to set its mounting parameters described in the previous step 4 Click OK 8 3 5 Managing mounted images Once a volume is mounted you can browse files and folders contained in the backup using a file manager and copy the desired files to any destination Thus if you need to take out only a few files and folders from a volume backup you do not have to perform the recovery procedure Exploring images Exploring mounted volumes lets you view and modify if mounted in the read write mode the volume s content To explore a mounted volume select it in the table and click Explore The default file manager window opens allowing the user to examine the mounted volume contents Unmounting images Maintaining the mounted volumes takes considerable system resources It is recommended that you unmount the volumes after the necessary operations are completed If not unmounted manually a volume will remain mounted until the operating system restarts To unmount an image select it in the table and click Unmount To unmount
205. d along with retention rules the archive will be cleaned up using consolidation p 267 which is a more time consuming and resource intensive operation 4 2 6 2 Grandfather Father Son scheme At a glance Daily Son weekly Father and monthly Grandfather backups Custom day for weekly and monthly backups Custom retention periods for backups of each type Description Let us suppose that we want to set up a backup plan that will regularly produce a series of daily D weekly W and monthly M backups Here is a natural way to do this the following table shows a sample two month period for such a plan Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Jan 1 Jan 7 D D D D W Jan 8 Jan 14 D D D D W Jan 15 Jan 21 D D D D W Jan 22 Jan 28 D D D D M Jan 29 Feb 4 D D D D W Feb 5 Feb 11 D D D D W Feb 12 Feb 18 D D D D W Feb 19 Feb 25 D D D D M Feb 26 Mar 4 D D D D W Daily backups run every workday except Friday which is left for weekly and monthly backups Monthly backups run every fourth Friday and weekly backups run on all other Fridays Parameters You can set up the following parameters of a Grandfather Father Son GFS scheme Start backup at Specifies when to start a backup The default value is 12 00 PM Back up on Specifies the days on which to perform a backup The default value is W
206. d disk including hidden volumes such as the vendor s maintenance partitions and the zero track with the master boot record 29 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 The following items are not included in a disk or volume backup as well as in a file level backup The swap file pagefile sys and the file that keeps the RAM content when the machine goes into hibernation hiberfil sys After recovery the files will be re created in the appropriate place with the zero size Windows shadow storage The path to it is determined in the registry value VSS Default Provider which can be found in the registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Control BackupRestore FilesNotToBa ckup This means that in operating systems starting from Windows Vista Windows Restore Points are not backed up Linux A volume backup stores all files and directories of the selected volume independent of their attributes a boot record and the file system super block A disk backup stores all disk volumes as well as the zero track with the master boot record With the sector by sector raw mode option enabled a disk backup stores all the disk sectors The sector by sector backup can be used for backing up disks with unrecognized or unsupported file systems and other proprietary data formats 3 7 Backup and recovery of dynamic volumes Windows This section explains in brief how to back up and recover dynamic volumes p 27
207. d first and only after that are the old ones deleted Therefore the location must have enough space to temporarily store both the old and the new versions Example 169 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 You have the following backup chain in your archive F1 I2 I3 I4 D5 I6 I7 I8 F9 I10 I11 D12 F13 Here F means full backup I incremental D differential You convert to full the I4 backup The I4 D5 I6 I7 I8 backups will be updated while I10 I11 D12 will remain unchanged because they depend on F9 Tips on usage Conversion does not create a copy of a backup To obtain a self sufficient copy of the backup on a flash drive or removable media use the export p 158 operation Conversion is not allowed for backups stored on tapes and CD DVD When you mount an image p 164 in the read write mode the software creates an incremental backup containing the changes you make to the backup content The subsequent backups do not contain these changes Naturally if you convert any of the subsequent backups to full none of these changes will appear in the resulting full backup 8 4 4 Deleting archives and backups The Backups deletion window displays the same tab as for the vaults view but with check boxes for each archive and backup The archive or backup you have chosen to delete has the check mark Review the archive or backup that you have selected to delete If you need to delete other archives and backups s
208. de working hours Reduced costs of storing the backed up data Store your backups on a fast storage for as long as a need to access them is likely Then move them to a lower cost storage to keep them there for a longer term This enables you to meet legal requirements on data retention Replication and retention in backup schemes The following table shows availability of replication and retention rules in various backup schemes Backup scheme Can copy backups Can move backups Can delete backups Manual start p 51 Yes No No Simple p 42 Yes Yes Yes Grandfather Father Son GFS p 43 Yes No Yes Tower of Hanoi p 49 Yes No Yes Custom p 46 Yes Yes Yes 73 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Initial seeding p 51 No No No Notes Setting up both copying and moving backups from the same location is not possible With simplified naming of backup files p 54 neither replication nor use of retention rules is available 4 5 1 Supported locations You can copy or move a backup from any of these locations A local folder on a fixed drive A network folder An FTP or SFTP server Acronis Secure Zone You can copy or move a backup to any of these locations A local folder on a fixed drive A network folder An FTP or SFTP server Acronis Online Backup Storage A removable device p 153 used i
209. default For instructions on how to turn it on see the following Microsoft Knowledge Base article http support microsoft com kb 838183 To enable using VSS by default in any backup plan created on a machine 1 Connect the console to the machine 2 On the top menu select Options gt Default backup and recovery options gt Default backup options gt Volume Shadow Copy Service 3 Click Use Volume Shadow Copy Service 4 In the Snapshot provider list click Software System provider When the console is connected to the management server you can set the same default setting for all of the registered machines Using VSS on a virtual machine When backing up a virtual machine at a hypervisor level using VSS is not configurable VSS is always used if VMware Tools or Hyper V Integration Services are installed in a respective guest system Installing these tools services is a common requirement for backing up at a hypervisor level If you encounter errors mentioning quiesced snapshot when backing up ESX i virtual machines then reinstalling or updating VMware Tools and rebooting the virtual machine will usually help For more information see http kb acronis com content 4559 Truncating transaction logs Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 does not truncate the transaction log after creating a disk backup This is not a problem for Active Directory because it normally uses circular logging Available solutions for other applicati
210. delete archives contained in the folder Refresh vault table information Click Refresh While you are reviewing the vault content archives can be added to the vault deleted or modified Click Refresh to update the vault information with the most recent changes Creating a personal vault To create a personal vault 1 In the Name field type a name for the vault being created 2 Optional In the Comments field add a description of the vault 3 Click Path and specify a path to the folder that will be used as the vault A personal vault can be organized on a network share FTP server detachable media Acronis Online Backup Storage tape device or on a hard drive local to the machine 4 Optional If the vault is created on a tape device a Click Drives to specify the tape drive s to be used when backing up to the vault By default all available drives will be used Click Use the following drives only and select or clear required check boxes b Click Tape pool and specify the pool whose tapes will be used by the vault By default the Acronis pool is selected 5 Click OK As a result the created vault appears in the Personal group of the vaults tree Merging and moving personal vaults What if I need to move the existing vault from one place to another Proceed as follows 1 Make sure that none of the backup plans uses the existing vault while moving files or disable the given plans See Actions on backup p
211. ding buttons on the vaults toolbar These operations can be also accessed from the Vault name actions item of the main menu The following is a guideline for you to perform operations with personal vaults To Do Create a personal vault Click Create The procedure of creating personal vaults is described in depth in the Creating a personal vault p 149 section Edit a vault 1 Select the vault 2 Click Edit The Edit personal vault page lets you edit the vault s name and information in the Comments field Change user account for accessing a vault Click Change user In the appearing dialog box provide the credentials required for accessing the vault Create Acronis Secure Zone Click Create Acronis Secure Zone The procedure of creating the Acronis Secure Zone is described in depth in the Creating Acronis Secure Zone p 150 section Explore a vault s content Click Explore In the appearing Explorer window examine the selected vault s content 149 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Validate a vault Click Validate You will be taken to the Validation p 155 page where this vault is already pre selected as a source The vault validation checks all the archives stored in the vault Delete a vault Click Delete The deleting operation actually removes only a shortcut to the folder from the Vaults view The folder itself remains untouched You have the option to keep or
212. e original farm Recovering from an unattached database The method is available for SharePoint 2010 only This method allows you to recover only the following types of items sites lists or document libraries To recover SharePoint items via attaching the content database to a farm 1 Attach the content database to a SQL server as described in steps 1 5 of Accessing SQL Server databases from a disk backup p 209 220 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 2 Attach the content database to a non original SharePoint farm To do this a Make sure that you are performing this procedure under a farm administrator account that is a member of the db_owner role of the database If not add the account to this role by using Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio b Run the following command on a front end Web server In SharePoint 2010 Mount SPContentDatabase lt database gt DatabaseServer lt database server gt WebApplication lt site url gt In SharePoint 2007 stsadm exe o addcontentdb url lt site url gt databasename lt database gt databaseserver lt database server gt 3 Open the SharePoint site and select the document to download 4 After the downloading is complete detach the content database from the SharePoint farm 5 Detach the database and unmount the previously mounted volume as described in steps 7 8 of Accessing SQL Server databases from a disk backup p 209 To recover
213. e Mode 3 Log on to Directory Services Restore Mode DSRM open Registry Editor and then expand the following registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services NTDS Parameters 4 In that registry key examine the DSA Previous Restore Count value If this value is present write down its setting Do not add the value if it is absent 5 Add the following value to that registry key Value type DWORD 32 bit Value Value name Database restored from backup Value data 1 6 Restart the domain controller in normal mode 7 Optional After the domain controller restarts open Event Viewer expand Application and Services Logs and then select the Directory Services log In the Directory Services log look for a recent entry for Event ID 1109 If you find this entry double click it to ensure that the InvocationID attribute has changed This means that the Active Directory database has been updated 8 Open Registry Editor and verify that the setting in the DSA Previous Restore Count value has increased by one as compared with step 4 If the DSA Previous Restore Count value was absent in step 4 verify that it is now present and that its setting is 1 If you see a different setting and you cannot find the entry for Event ID 1109 make sure that the recovered domain controller has current service packs and then repeat the entire procedure For more details about USNs and USN rollback see the foll
214. e WAIK to DVD or copy to a flash drive 3 Install the Microsoft NET Framework from this kit NETFXx86 or NETFXx64 depending on your hardware 4 Install Microsoft Core XML MSXML 5 0 or 6 0 Parser from this kit 5 Install Windows AIK from this kit 6 Install Bootable Media Builder on the same machine It is recommended that you familiarize yourself with the help documentation supplied with Windows AIK To access the documentation select Microsoft Windows AIK gt Documentation from the start menu 9 1 1 Linux based bootable media When using the media builder you have to specify 1 Optional The parameters of the Linux kernel Separate multiple parameters with spaces For example to be able to select a display mode for the bootable agent each time the media starts type vga ask For a list of parameters see Kernel parameters p 173 2 The Acronis bootable components to be placed on the media Universal Restore will be enabled if Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Universal Restore is installed on the machine where the media is created 3 Optional The timeout interval for the boot menu plus the component that will automatically start on timeout If not configured the Acronis loader waits for someone to select whether to boot the operating system if present or the Acronis component If you set say 10 sec for the bootable agent the agent will launch 10 seconds after the menu is displayed This ena
215. e Welcome screen or in the Navigation pane enabling you to perform machine specific operations 16 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Management Console Welcome screen Key elements of the console workspace Name Description Navigation pane Contains the Navigation tree Lets you navigate to the different views For details see Navigation pane p 16 Main area Here you configure and monitor backup recovery and other operations The main area displays views and action pages p 17 depending on the items selected in the menu or Navigation tree Menu bar Appears across the top of the program window Lets you perform most of operations available in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 The menu items change dynamically depending on the item selected in the Navigation tree and the main area 2 1 1 Navigation pane The navigation pane includes the Navigation tree Navigation tree The Navigation tree enables you to navigate across the program views You can choose between the Full list or the Short list of views The Short list contains the most frequently used views from the Full list The Short list displays Machine name This is the root of the tree also called a Welcome screen It displays the name of the machine the console is currently connected to Use this view for quick access to the main operations available on the managed machine 17 Copyrig
216. e backup rather than wait for the conditions especially if the events occur relatively often 4 6 23 Volume Shadow Copy Service This option is effective only for Windows operating systems The option defines whether a Volume Shadow Copy Service VSS provider has to notify VSS aware applications that the backup is about to start This ensures the consistent state of all data used by the applications in particular completion of all database transactions at the moment of taking the data snapshot by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Data consistency in turn ensures that the application will be recovered in the correct state and become operational immediately after recovery The preset is Use Volume Shadow Copy Service Use VSS When Use Volume Shadow Copy Service is selected choose a snapshot provider from the following list Hardware software Select automatically VSS will use the hardware based provider that supports the source volume If none is found VSS will use Acronis VSS Provider Software Select automatically In most cases VSS will use Acronis VSS Provider 100 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Software Acronis VSS Provider VSS will use Acronis VSS Provider for taking snapshots Software System provider selected by default VSS will use the system provider Microsoft Software Shadow Copy provider for taking snapshots We recommend choosing the system provider when bac
217. e changes will take effect on all the machines where the plan will be deployed You may want to change the direct specification of the item to backup such as C or C Users with a template such as SYSTEM or All Profiles Folder For more information about templates see Selection rules for volumes and Selection rules for files and folders You may also want to change credentials used by the plan To deploy a backup plan as file 1 Create a backup plan on one of the machines 2 Export it to an xml file p 226 3 Optional Edit the export file See Editing the export file p 226 for more information 4 Deploy this xml file to the dedicated folder The dedicated folder path In Windows 230 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 The default path to the dedicated folder is ALLUSERSPROFILE Acronis BackupAndRecovery import in Windows Vista and later versions of Windows or ALLUSERSPROFILE Application Data Acronis BackupAndRecovery import in versions of Windows earlier than Windows Vista The path is stored in the registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Acronis MMS Configuration Import FolderPath The absence of the key means that the agent does not monitor the dedicated folder To change the path edit the key The change will be applied after a restart of Acronis Managed Machine Service In Linux The default path to the dedicated folder is usr lib Acronis BackupAndRecovery import The path is st
218. e in BIOS Solution Recover the operating system to a GPT disk or to an uninitialized disk UEFI OS non convertible Solution Recover the operating system to a GPT disk or to an uninitialized disk 5 3 2 Recovering disks Let s assume you backed up a whole disk with all its volumes and want to recover this disk to a different target platform The ability of the recovered system to boot up in different modes depends on the operating systems installed on the source disk Operating systems can be convertible i e allow changing the boot mode from BIOS to UEFI and back or non convertible For the list of convertible operating systems see Recovering volumes p 119 When a source disk contains one or more operating systems and all of them are convertible the boot mode can be automatically changed Depending on the current boot mode the target disk may be initialized either to GPT or to MBR partitioning style If at least one operating system on a source disk is non convertible or the source disk contains any boot volumes of the non convertible OSes the boot mode cannot be changed automatically and the software will initialize the target disk as the source one To boot up the target machine you have to turn on off the UEFI mode in BIOS manually Otherwise the system will not boot after recovery 121 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 The following table summarizes all cases of recoverin
219. e location is a local drive or more precisely any device available through the machine s BIOS This may be Acronis Secure Zone a USB hard drive a flash drive or any internal hard drive Active Restore does not support disks with the GPT partitioning style as a source being recovered as a recovery destination or as an archive location This also means that Unified Extensible Firmware Interface UEFI is not supported The only supported boot mode is BIOS How it works When configuring a recovery operation you select disks or volumes to recover from a backup Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 scans the selected disks or volumes in the backup If this scan finds a supported operating system use of Acronis Active Restore becomes available If you do not enable Active Restore the system recovery will proceed in the usual way and the machine will become operational after the recovery is completed If you enable Active Restore the sequence of actions will be set as follows Once the system recovery is started the operating system boots from the backup The machine becomes operational and ready to provide necessary services The data required to serve incoming requests is recovered with the highest priority everything else is recovered in the background Because serving requests is performed simultaneously with recovery the system operation can slow down even if recovery priority p 135 in the recovery options is set to Low Altho
220. e most cost efficient delivery method for having your hard drive returned 249 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Step 5 Securely seal the box with a sturdy tape Then stick the shipping label for sending your hard drive to the top of the box so the label does not wrap around the edge of the package 13 1 6 10 How do I track an Initial Seeding order status On the Acronis Web site the Initial Seeding Recovery tab shows you the status of all your orders In addition you will receive e mail notifications about the most important events Available The license is available for using on any machine An order was created The backup is about to start and the license cannot be used for the same or any other machine From this point on you can cancel the order if something goes wrong This will return the license to the pool of available licenses A full backup has started This status is set when the first backup starts The order start time occurs at this moment A full backup has been successfully completed The backup has been completed and the order is ready to ship You can now ship the media Step 1 Package the media following the drive packaging and shipment instructions p 246 to avoid damage during shipment If you want the media to be returned to you after the data is uploaded prepare a prepaid return shipping label and place it inside the package together with the drive
221. e operations that have been planned to be performed on disks and volumes This approach enables you to control all planned operations double check the intended changes and if necessary cancel operations before they are executed To prevent you from performing any unintentional change on your disk the program will first display the list of all pending operations The Disk management view contains the toolbar with icons to launch the Undo Redo and Commit actions intended for pending operations These actions might also be launched from the Disk management menu of the console All planned operations are added to the pending operation list The Undo action lets you undo the latest operation in the list While the list is not empty this action is available The Redo action lets you reinstate the last pending operation that was undone The Commit action forwards you to the Pending Operations window where you will be able to view the pending operation list Clicking Proceed will launch their execution You will not be able to undo any actions or operations after you choose the Proceed operation You can also cancel the commitment by clicking Cancel Then no changes will be done to the pending operation list Quitting Acronis Disk Director Lite without committing the pending operations effectively cancels them so if you try to exit Disk management without committing the pending operations you will receive the appropriate warning 198 Cop
222. e recovery options The set of available recovery options depends on The environment the agent operates in Windows bootable media The type of data being recovered disk file The operating system being recovered from the disk backup 128 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 The following table summarizes the availability of the recovery options Agent for Windows Bootable media Linux based or PE based Disk recovery File recovery also from a disk backup Disk recovery File recovery also from a disk backup Additional settings p 129 Validate backup archive before recovery Restart the machine automatically if it is required for recovery Restart the machine automatically after recovery is finished Check file system after recovery Change SID after recovery Windows recovery Windows recovery Set current date and time for recovered files Error handling p 129 Do not show messages and dialogs while processing silent mode Re attempt if an error occurs Event tracing Windows events log p 131 SNMP p 130 File level security p 131 Recover files with their security settings Mount points p 131 Notifications E mail p 132 Win Pop up p 133
223. e retained until the incremental one also becomes obsolete Then both backups will be deleted D Data catalog Allows a user to easily find the required version of data and select it for recovery On a managed machine p 272 users can view and search data in any vault p 275 accessible from this machine The centralized catalog available on the management server p 272 contains all data stored on its storage nodes p 274 Physically data catalog is stored in catalog files Every vault uses its own set of catalog files which normally are located directly in the vault If this is not possible such as for tape storages the catalog files are stored in the managed machine s or storage node s local folder Also a storage node locally stores catalog files of its remote vaults for the purpose of fast access Deduplicating vault A managed vault p 272 in which deduplication p 267 is enabled Deduplication A method of storing different duplicates of the same information only once Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 can apply the deduplication technology to backup archives p 263 stored on storage nodes p 274 This minimizes storage space taken by the archives backup traffic and network usage during backup Differential backup A differential backup stores changes to the data against the latest full backup p 270 You need access to the corresponding full backup to recover the data from a differential backup 268
224. e s parameters are set up as follows 1 Months September October November 2 On lt all gt lt workdays gt 3 Every 6 hours From 12 00 00 AM Until 06 00 00 PM 4 Effective From 08 30 2009 Actually the task will be started on the first workday of September By setting up this date we just define that the task must be started in 2009 To 12 01 2010 Actually the task will end on the last workday of November By setting up this date we just define that the task must be discontinued in 2010 after autumn ends in the northern hemisphere Several monthly schedules for one task In the case when the task needs to be run on different days or weeks with different time intervals depending on the month consider adding a dedicated schedule to every desired month or several months 66 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Suppose that the task goes into effect on 11 01 2009 During northern winter the task runs once at 10PM on every workday During northern spring and autumn the task runs every 12 hours on all workdays During northern summer the task runs every first and fifteenth of every month at 10 PM Thus the following three schedules are added to the task First schedule 1 Months December January February 2 On lt All gt lt All workdays gt 3 Once at 10 00 00 PM 4 Effective From 11 01 2009 To not set Second schedule 1 Months March April May Septe
225. e type of the data being backed up disk file The backup destination networked location or local disk The backup scheme manual start or using the scheduler The following table summarizes the availability of the backup options Agent for Windows Bootable media Linux based or PE based Disk backup File backup Disk backup File backup Additional settings p 81 Ask for the first media while backing up to removable media Dest removable media Dest removable media Dest removable media Dest removable media Reset archive bit Restart the machine automatically after backup is finished Archive protection p 82 password encryption Backup cataloging p 82 Backup performance Backup priority p 83 HDD writing speed p 84 Dest HDD Dest HDD Dest HDD Dest HDD Network connection speed p 84 Dest network share Dest network share Dest network share Dest network share Backup splitting p 84 Compression level p 85 Disaster recovery plan p 86 Error handling p 87 80 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Agent for Windows Bootable media Linux based or PE based Disk backup File backup Disk backup File backup Do not show messages and dialogs while processing silent
226. e volume Parity a calculated value that can be used to reconstruct data in case of failure is also striped across the disk array And it is always stored on a different disk than the 192 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 data itself If a physical disk fails the portion of the RAID 5 volume that was on that failed disk can be re created from the remaining data and the parity A RAID 5 volume provides reliability and is able to overcome the physical disk size limitations with a higher than mirrored disk to volume size ratio 10 7 1 2 Create volume wizard The Create volume wizard lets you create any type of volume including system and active select a file system label assign a letter and also provides other disk management functions Its pages will enable you to enter operation parameters proceeding step by step further on and return to any previous step if necessary to change any previously selected options To help you with your choices each parameter is supplemented with detailed instructions If you want to create a volume Run the Create volume wizard by selecting Create volume on the Wizards bar or right click any unallocated space and select Create volume in the appearing context menu Select the type of volume being created At the first step you have to specify the type of volume you want to create The following types of volume are available Basic Simple Spanned Striped
227. eated WIM file For the above example type copy c AcronisMedia wim c winpe_x86 ISO sources boot wim use the Oscdimg tool For the above example type oscdimg n bc winpe_x86 etfsboot com c winpe_x86 ISO c winpe_x86 winpe_x86 iso For more information on customizing Windows PE see the Windows Preinstallation Environment User s Guide Winpe chm 178 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 9 2 Connecting to a machine booted from media Once a machine boots from bootable media the machine terminal displays a startup window with the IP address es obtained from DHCP or set according to the pre configured values Remote connection To connect to the machine remotely select Connect gt Manage a remote machine in the console menu and specify one of the machine s IP addresses Provide the user name and password if these have been configured when creating the bootable media Local connection Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Management Console is always present on the bootable media Anyone who has physical access to the machine terminal can run the console and connect Just click Run management console in the bootable agent startup window 9 3 Working under bootable media Operations on a machine booted with bootable media are very similar to backup and recovery under the operating system The difference is as follows 1 Under a Windows style bootable media a volume has the same drive letter as i
228. eating a backup plan p 34 you specify the primary location for the backups In addition you can do the following 72 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Replicate copy each backup to a second location immediately after creation Retain the backups according to the retention rules you specify and then either move them to a second location or delete them Similarly you can copy or move backups from a second location to a third location and so on Up to five consecutive locations are supported including the primary one Note The replication feature replaces and enhances the Dual destination option which was available in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Example You back up your machine to a local folder The backup is immediately copied to a network folder In the original local folder the backup is stored for just one month The following picture illustrates this example Usage scenarios Reliable disaster recovery p 77 Store your backups both on site for immediate recovery and off site to secure the backups from local storage failure or a natural disaster Keeping only the latest recovery points p 77 Delete older backups from a fast storage according to retention rules in order to not overuse expensive storage space Using Acronis cloud to protect data from a natural disaster p 77 Replicate the archive to the online storage by transferring only the data changes outsi
229. eceive a confirmation e mail containing the registration codes for each of them You then enter the registration codes on the account management Web page and these subscriptions and licenses become available for use 261 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Renew a subscription Assign a subscription that has the same storage quota as the current activated subscription This subscription will become activated as soon as the current subscription expires Storage quota The amount of storage space that a machine can use according to the subscription Subscription Permission for a machine to use a specific amount of space in the online storage for a specific period of time Subscription period The period during which the subscription remains activated You can back up and recover the machine during this period Recovery is possible for extra 30 days after this period ends Unassign a subscription Make an assigned subscription available again You can unassign a subscription as long as it is not activated 262 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 14 Glossary A Acronis Active Restore The Acronis proprietary technology that brings a system online immediately after the system recovery is started The system boots from the backup p 268 and the machine becomes operational and ready to provide necessary services The data required to serve incoming requests is recovered with the highest prio
230. econds but no more than 5 times The attempts will be stopped as soon as the connection is resumed OR the specified number of attempts is performed depending on which comes first 5 7 3 Event tracing It is possible to duplicate log events of the recovery operations performed on the managed machine in the Application Event Log of Windows or send the events to the specified SNMP managers 5 7 3 1 SNMP notifications This option is effective for both Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media The option defines whether the agent s operating on the managed machine have to send the log events of the recovery operations to the specified Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP managers You can choose the types of events to be sent For detailed information about using SNMP with Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 please see Support for SNMP p 32 The preset is Use the setting set in the Machine options To select whether to send the recovery operations events to the SNMP managers Choose one of the following Use the setting set in the Machine options to use the setting specified for the machine For more information refer to Machine options Send SNMP notifications individually for recovery operation events to send the events of the recovery operations to the specified SNMP managers Types of events to send choose the types of eve
231. ect an archive in the Archive view expand the archive by clicking the expand button to the left of the archive name and then click the backup After selecting the validation object select Validate from the context menu The Validation page will be opened with the pre selected object as a source All you need to do is to select when to validate and optionally provide a name for the task To create a validation task perform the following steps What to validate Validate Choose an object to validate Archive p 161 in this case you need to specify the archive Backup p 156 specify the archive first Then select the desired backup in this archive 156 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Vault p 156 select a vault or other location to validate archives from Credentials p 157 Optional Provide credentials for accessing the source if the task account does not have enough privileges to access it When to validate Start validation p 157 Specify when and how often to perform validation Task parameters Task name Optional Enter a unique name for the validation task A conscious name lets you quickly identify the task among the others Task s credentials p 158 Optional The validation task will run on behalf of the user who is creating the task You can change the task credentials if necessary Comments Optional Enter comments on the task After you configure all
232. ect the backed up data and the destination the data will be recovered to As a result a recovery task will be created Recovery of a disk or volume over a volume locked by the operating system requires a reboot After the recovery is completed the recovered operating system goes online automatically If the machine fails to boot or if you need to recover a system to bare metal boot the machine using the bootable media and configure the recovery operation in the same way as the recovery task Step 6 Management The Navigation pane at the left part of the console enables you to navigate across the product views that are used for different administering purposes Use the Backup plans and tasks view to manage backup plans and tasks run edit stop and delete plans and tasks view their states and progress Use the Alerts view to rapidly identify and solve the problems Use the Log view to browse the operations log The location where you store backup archives is called a vault p 275 Navigate to the Vaults p 146 view to obtain information about your vaults Navigate further to the specific vault to view backups and their contents You can also select the data to recover and perform manual operations with backups mounting validating deleting 2 1 Using the management console As soon as the console starts the respective items appear across the console s workspace in the menu in the main area with th
233. ed in Acronis Online Backup Storage Personal If the archive is stored in a personal vault expand the Personal group and click the required vault Machine name Local machine Local folders If the archive is stored in a local folder on the machine expand the lt Machine name gt group and select the required folder CD DVD BD If the archive is stored on optical media such as CD DVD or Blu ray Discs BD expand the lt Machine name gt group then select the required drive First insert the last disc Then insert the discs in order starting from the first one when the program prompts RDX USB If the archive is stored on an RDX drive or USB flash drive expand the lt Machine name gt group then select the required drive For information about using these drives see the Removable devices p 153 section Tape device If the archive is stored on a locally attached tape device expand the Tape devices group then click the required device Tape devices are available only if you have upgraded from Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 For information about using tapes see the Tape devices section of the product Help Network folders If the archive is stored on a network share expand the Network folders group then select the required networked machine and then click the shared folder If the network share requires access credentials the program will ask for them FTP SFTP If the archive is stored on an FTP or SFTP server t
234. ed in F TLs you need to back up both volumes C and F Determining paths to all database files of an instance by using Transact SQL The following Transact SQL script can be used as is to determine paths to all database files of an instance Create Table temp DatabaseName sysname Name sysname physical_name nvarchar 500 size decimal 18 2 FreeSpace decimal 18 2 Exec sp_msforeachdb Use Insert Into temp DatabaseName Name physical_name Size FreeSpace Select DB_NAME AS DatabaseName Name physical_name Cast Cast Round cast size as decimal 8 0 1024 0 2 as decimal 18 2 as nvarchar Size Cast Cast Round cast size as decimal 8 0 1024 0 2 as decimal 18 2 Cast FILEPROPERTY name SpaceUsed 8 0 1024 0 as decimal 18 2 as nvarchar As FreeSpace From sys database_files Select From temp drop table temp 201 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Determining locations of database files by using SQL Server Management Studio Default locations SQL Server database files are in their default locations unless you have customized the paths manually To find out the default locations of database files 1 Run Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio and connect to the necessary instance 2 Right click the instance name and select Properties 3 Open the Database Settings page and view the paths specified in the Database default locations section Custom locations
235. ed machine you can export an archive or part of an archive to and from any location accessible to the agent residing on the machine These include personal vaults locally attached tape devices removable media and in the advanced product versions managed and unmanaged centralized vaults 160 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 When the console is connected to a management server two export methods are available Export from a managed vault The export is performed by the storage node that manages the vault The destination can be a network share or a local folder of the storage node Export from an unmanaged centralized vault The export is performed by the agent installed on the managed machine you specify The destination can be any location accessible to the agent including a managed vault Tip When configuring export to a deduplicating managed vault choose a machine where the deduplication add on to the agent is installed Otherwise the export task will fail Operations with an export task An export task starts immediately after you complete its configuration An export task can be stopped or deleted in the same way as any other task Once the export task is completed you can run it again at any time Before doing so delete the archive that resulted from the previous task run if the archive still exists in the destination vault Otherwise the task will fail You cannot edit an export task to specify an
236. ed to the Disk Initialization window that will provide the basic hardware details such as the disk s number capacity and state to aid you in the choice of your possible action 3 In the window you will be able to set the disk partitioning scheme MBR or GPT and the disk type basic or dynamic The new disk state will be graphically represented in the Disk Management view of the console immediately 4 By clicking OK you ll add a pending operation of the disk initialization To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 197 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them After the initialization all the disk space remains unallocated and so still impossible to be used for program installation or file storage To be able to use it proceed normally to the Create volume operation If you decide to change the disk settings it can be done later using the standard Acronis Disk Director Lite disk tools 10 6 2 Basic disk cloning Sometimes it is necessary to transfer all the disk data onto a new disk It can be a case of expanding the system volume starting a new system layout or disk evacuation due to a hardware fault In any case the reason for the Clone basic disk operation can be summed up as the necessity to transfer all the source disk data to a target disk exactly as it is Acronis Disk Director Lite allows the operation to be carried out to basic MBR disks only
237. either of these ways Recover a domain controller from a backup by using a bootable media Ensure that there is no USN rollback problem p 215 Recreate a domain controller by installing the operating system and making the machine a new domain controller by using the dcpromo exe tool Both operations are followed by automatic replication Replication makes the domain controller database up to date Just make sure the Active Directory service has started successfully Once replication completes the domain controller will be up and running again 213 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Recovery vs re creation Recreation does not require having a backup Recovery is normally faster than re creation However recovery is not possible in the following cases All available backups are older than the tombstone lifetime Tombstones are used during replication to ensure that an object deleted on one domain controller becomes deleted on other domain controllers Thus proper replication is not possible after the tombstones have been deleted The domain controller held a Flexible Single Master Operations FSMO role and you have assigned that role to a different domain controller seized the role In this case restoring the domain controller would lead to two domain controllers holding the same FSMO role within the domain and cause a conflict Recovering a domain controller that holds a FSMO role Some
238. eld In Backup options go to Replication cleanup inactivity time p 76 and specify the working hours for example Monday through Friday from 8 00 until 17 00 Result After the backup plan starts the data is backed up to the local folder If the backup finishes outside the working hours replication starts immediately Otherwise replication is postponed until the end of the working hours Note In the online storage the second and further backups of an archive will always be incremental no matter what type they are in the original location This leads to efficient use of storage space for your online backup subscription Replicating large amounts of data to the online storage If you are planning to back up 10 GB of data or more especially over a slow Internet connection you may want to send the first backup to the online storage on a physical hard drive This option is provided by the Initial Seeding service p 245 which you can buy in addition to your online backup subscription The Initial Seeding service might be unavailable in your region To find more information click here http kb acronis com content 15118 During the subsequent backups only changes to the original data will be sent to the online storage and will not affect network traffic as much In this scenario create a backup plan with the Initial seeding scheme When creating the backup plan specify a local folder in the Path field This can be
239. elect the respective check boxes then click Delete selected and confirm the deletion What happens if I delete a backup that is a base of an incremental or differential backup To preserve archive consistency the program will consolidate the two backups For example you delete a full backup but retain the next incremental one The backups will be combined into a single full backup which will be dated the incremental backup date When you delete an incremental or differential backup from the middle of the chain the resulting backup type will be incremental Please be aware that consolidation is just a method of deletion but not an alternative to deletion The resulting backup will not contain data that was present in the deleted backup and was absent from the retained incremental or differential backup There should be enough space in the vault for temporary files created during consolidation Backups resulting from consolidation always have maximum compression 170 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 9 Bootable media Bootable media Bootable media is physical media CD DVD USB drive or other media supported by a machine BIOS as a boot device that boots on any PC compatible machine and enables you to run Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Agent either in a Linux based environment or Windows Preinstallation Environment WinPE without the help of an operating system Bootable media is most often used to recover
240. elected items will be recovered regardless of the Mount points option value Please be aware that if the volume is not mounted at the moment of recovery the data will be recovered directly to the folder that has been the mount point at the time of backing up 5 7 6 Notifications Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 provides the ability of notifying users about recovery completion through e mail or the messaging service 5 7 6 1 E mail This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media The option enables you to receive e mail notifications about the recovery task s successful completion failure or when user interaction is required The preset is Disabled To configure e mail notification 1 Select the Send e mail notifications check box to activate notifications 2 Under Send e mail notifications select the appropriate check boxes as follows When recovery completes successfully When recovery fails When user interaction is required 3 In the E mail addresses field type the destination e mail address You can enter several addresses separated by semicolons 4 In the Subject field type the notification subject or leave the default subject variable Other variables are not supported Details In the received e mails the default variable will be transformed into the following phrase Task lt task name gt lt ta
241. end on it become subject to deletion too For more information see Retention rules p 75 Monthly full weekly differential and daily incremental backups plus cleanup This example demonstrates the use of all options available in the Custom scheme Suppose that we need a scheme that will produce monthly full backups weekly differential backups and daily incremental backups Then the backup schedule can look as follows Full backup Schedule Monthly every Last Sunday of the month at 9 00 PM Incremental Schedule Weekly every workday at 7 00 PM Differential Schedule Weekly every Saturday at 8 00 PM Further we want to add conditions that have to be satisfied for a backup task to start This is set up in the Conditions fields for each backup type Full backup Conditions Location available Incremental Conditions User is logged off Differential Conditions User is idle As a result a full backup originally scheduled at 9 00 PM may actually start later as soon as the backup location becomes available Likewise backup tasks for incremental and differential backups will wait until all users are logged off and users are idle respectively Finally we create retention rules for the archive let us retain only backups that are no older than six months and let the cleanup be performed after each backup task and also on the last day of every month Retention rules Delete backups older than 6 months Apply the rul
242. ent source shown in the Source field and the event number shown in the Event ID field When you are finished click OK to close the Event Properties dialog box 4 4 5 Conditions Conditions add more flexibility to the scheduler enabling to execute backup tasks with respect to certain conditions Once a specified event occurs see the Scheduling p 59 section for the list of available events the scheduler checks the specified condition and executes the task if the condition is met The scheduler behavior in case the event occurs but the condition or any of multiple conditions is not met is defined by the Task start conditions p 98 backup option There you can specify how important the conditions are for the backup strategy conditions are obligatory put the backup task run on hold until all the conditions are met conditions are preferable but a backup task run has higher priority put the task on hold for the specified time interval If the time interval lapses and the conditions are still not met run the task anyway With this setting the program will automatically handle the situation when the conditions are not met for too long and further delaying the backup is undesirable backup task start time matters skip the backup task if the conditions are not met at the time when the task should be started Skipping the task run makes sense when you need to back up data strictly at the specified time espec
243. er it retrieves the list of available NICs This list is sorted by the slots the NICs occupy the closest to the processor on top The bootable agent assigns each known NIC the appropriate settings identifying the NICs by their MAC addresses After the NICs with known MAC addresses are configured the remaining NICs are assigned the settings that you have made for non existent NICs starting from the upper non assigned NIC You can customize bootable media for any machine and not only for the machine where the media is created To do so configure the NICs according to their slot order on that machine NIC1 occupies the slot closest to the processor NIC2 is in the next slot and so on When the bootable agent starts on that machine it will find no NICs with known MAC addresses and will configure the NICs in the same order as you did Example The bootable agent could use one of the network adapters for communication with the management console through the production network Automatic configuration could be done for this connection Sizeable data for recovery could be transferred through the second NIC included in the dedicated backup network by means of static TCP IP settings 9 1 1 3 Network port While creating bootable media you have an option to pre configure the network port that the bootable agent listens for incoming connection The choice is available between the default port the currently used port the new
244. er backup check box Result Backups that are younger than one month are kept regardless of their total size Backups that are older than one month are kept only if the total size of all backups older plus younger does not exceed 200 GB Otherwise the software deletes some or all of the older backups starting from the oldest one 4 5 6 3 Example 3 Replicating backups to the online storage This example assumes that you have activated p 255 an online backup subscription p 242 for the machine that you are backing up The following scenario assumes that the amount of data you want to back up is relatively small up to a few gigabytes For larger backups see Replicating large amounts of data to the online storage later in this section 78 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Consider the following scenario You want to occasionally back up your machine to a local folder You want to keep a copy of the resulting archive off site in Acronis Online Backup Storage No matter when you start the backup you want the replication to take place outside working hours when demand on the Internet connection is lower In this scenario create a backup plan with the desired backup scheme When creating the backup plan specify a local folder in the Path field Select the Replicate just created backup to another location check box and then specify the online storage in the 2nd location fi
245. er the Internet may take days This process will deliver a faster recovery 13 1 7 3 Do I need to perform initial seeding to be able to use Large Scale Recovery No these services are independent 13 1 7 4 Is Large Scale Recovery a paid service Yes you need to buy one Large Scale Recovery license per machine The license enables you to get a disk with all of the currently available backups of this machine To obtain backups that will be created in the future you will need a new Large Scale Recovery license 13 1 7 5 Can I perform large scale recovery on a different machine Yes You can recover the data an unlimited number of times on any machine you wish Acronis Universal Restore is included to help you recover an operating system to dissimilar hardware 251 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 13 1 7 6 Can I obtain backups taken from a number of machines on a single hard drive No A separate hard drive is required for each machine 13 1 7 7 How to buy a Large Scale Recovery license You can buy a Large Scale Recovery license from an Acronis partner or in Acronis online store Follow the link http www acronis com my backup recovery online buy to locate a partner or to buy online Having purchased a license from an Acronis partner you receive a confirmation e mail with a registration code Click Enter new registration code on the same Web page and register the license The license becomes availa
246. erating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media This option defines whether the agent s operating on the managed machine have to log events in the Application Event Log of Windows to see this log run eventvwr exe or select Control Panel gt Administrative tools gt Event Viewer You can filter the events to be logged 240 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 You can override the settings set here exclusively for the events that occur during backup or during recovery in the Default backup and recovery options In this case the settings set here will be effective for operations other than backup and recovery such as archive validation or cleanup You can further override the settings set in the default backup and recovery options when creating a backup plan or a recovery task The settings you obtain in this case will be plan specific or task specific The preset is Disabled To enable this option select the Log events check box Use the Types of events to log check box to filter the events to be logged in the Application Event Log of Windows All events all events information warnings and errors Errors and warnings Errors only To disable this option clear the Log events check box 12 6 6 Log cleanup rules This option specifies how to clean up the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 agent log This option defines the maximum size of the age
247. erface than those of the original machine You may want to change all disk interfaces from IDE to SCSI when migrating a machine to ESX i because SCSI is a default disk interface for ESX i and it provides better performance You need to change the system disk interface from SCSI to IDE when migrating a machine to Hyper V because Hyper V does not support booting from SCSI disks If the original machine uses a custom boot loader either recover the system disk to a disk with the same interface or manually configure the boot loader The reason is that when the interface of the system disk changes the name of the boot device also changes however the boot loader still uses the old name Configuring GRUB is normally not needed because Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 does this automatically 6 3 2 Steps to perform To perform a recovery to a manually created virtual machine 1 When recovering Windows Prepare Windows drivers p 116 that correspond to the target virtualization platform For machines running Linux the necessary drivers are normally already present in the operating system 145 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 2 Create a bootable media p 172 with the Universal Restore functionality by using Acronis Bootable Media Builder 3 Create a virtual machine by using your virtualization product s native tools 4 Boot the virtual machine from the media 5 When recovering Windows If yo
248. es After backing up On schedule Cleanup schedule Monthly on the Last day of All months at 10 00 PM 49 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 By default a backup is not deleted as long as it has dependent backups that must be kept For example if a full backup has become subject to deletion but there are incremental or differential backups that depend on it the deletion is postponed until all the dependent backups can be deleted as well For more information see Retention rules p 75 4 2 6 4 Tower of Hanoi scheme At a glance Up to 16 levels of full differential and incremental backups Next level backups are twice as rare as previous level backups One backup of each level is stored at a time Higher density of more recent backups Parameters You can set up the following parameters of a Tower of Hanoi scheme Schedule Set up a daily p 60 weekly p 62 or monthly p 64 schedule Setting up schedule parameters allows for the creation of simple schedules example of a simple daily schedule a backup task will be run every 1 day at 10 AM as well as more complex schedules example of a complex daily schedule a task will be run every 3 days starting from January 15 During the specified days the task will be repeated every 2 hours from 10 AM to 10 PM Thus complex schedules specify the sessions on which the scheme should run In the discussion below days can be replaced with
249. es section Selecting the backed up data for recovery 1 To access the Data view tab navigate to Vaults view and click the required vault 2 In the Show field select the type of data to display Select Machines disks volumes to browse and search for entire disks and volumes in disk level backups Select Folders files to browse and search for files and folders in both file level and disk level backups 3 In the Display data backed up for field specify the time period for which the backed up data will be displayed 4 Do any of the following Select the data to recover in the catalog tree or in the table to the right of the catalog tree In the search string type the information that helps to identify the required data items this can be a machine name a file or folder name or a disk label and then click Search You can use the asterisks and question marks wildcards As a result in the Search window you will see the list of backed up data items whose names fully or partially coincide with the entered value If the list of matches is too long you can refine the search criteria by specifying the date or time range of backup creation and the size range of backed up items When the required data is found select it and click OK to return to the Data view 5 Use the Versions list to select the point of time to revert the data to By default the data will be reverted to latest point of time avai
250. es can be easily shared to networked users Band aid database recovery solution mount up an image that contains an SQL database from a recently failed machine This will provide access to the database until the failed machine is recovered Offline virus clean if a machine is attacked the administrator shuts it down boots with bootable media and creates an image Then the administrator mounts this image in read write mode scans and cleans it with an antivirus program and finally recovers the machine Error check if recovery failed due to a disk error mount the image in the read write mode Then check the mounted disk for errors with the chkdsk r command To mount an image perform the following steps Source Archive p 164 Specify the path to the archive location and select the archive containing disk backups Backup p 165 Select the backup Access credentials p 165 Optional Provide credentials for the archive location Mount settings Volumes p 165 Select volumes to mount and configure the mount settings for every volume assign a letter or enter the mount point choose the read write or read only access mode When you complete all the required steps click OK to mount the volumes 8 3 1 Archive selection To select an archive 1 Enter the full path to the location in the Path field or select the desired folder in the folders tree If the archive is stored in a personal
251. es taken by the recovery process leaving more resources to other processes running on the machine Normal to run the recovery process with normal speed allocating resources on a par with other processes High to maximize the recovery process speed by taking resources from the other processes 6 Conversion to a virtual machine Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 offers a number of ways of converting a disk backup into a virtual machine This section helps you choose the method that best fits your needs and provides step by step instructions for conversion 6 1 Conversion methods Depending on your needs you can choose among the following conversion methods a Make the conversion a part of a backup plan When to use 136 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 If you want the backup and the conversion to be executed on a schedule This helps you maintain a standby virtual server ready to power on in case your physical server fails If you do not need to adjust the resulting virtual machine settings How to perform When creating a backup plan p 34 enable conversion of a backup to a virtual machine p 138 b Recover the backed up disks or volumes to the New virtual machine destination When to use If you want to do the conversion once or occasionally as required If you want to do a lossless physical to virtual migration In this case you boot the original machine
252. es to each machine even before powering it on To add a text label to a backup 1 On the Create backup plan p 34 page click Show plan s credentials comments label 2 In Label enter the text label or select it from the drop down menu Parameters specification Parameter Value Description acronisTag label lt string gt A user defined label The label can be set by a user when creating a backup plan acronisTag hostname lt string gt Host name FQDN acronisTag os type lt string gt Operating system acronisTag os servicepack 0 1 2 The version of the Service Pack installed in the system For Windows OS only acronisTag os sid lt string gt Machine s SID For example S 1 5 21 874133492 782267321 3928949834 For Windows OS only Values of the acronisTag os type parameter Windows NT 4 winNTGuest Windows 2000 Professional win2000ProGuest Windows 2000 Server win2000ServGuest Windows 2000 Advanced Server win2000ServGuest Windows XP All Editions winXPProGuest Windows XP All Editions 64 bit winXPPro64Guest Windows Server 2003 All Editions winNetStandardGuest Windows Server 2003 All Editions 64 bit winNetStandard64Guest Windows 2008 winLonghornGuest Windows 2008 64 bit winLonghorn64Guest Windows Vista winVistaGuest Windows Vista 64 bit winVista64Guest Windows 7 windows7Guest Windows 7 64 bit windows7_64Guest Windows Server 2008 R2 64 bit wind
253. escribed below Please be aware that the target machine will be powered off automatically before the recovery If you prefer to power it off manually modify the VM power management option Disks volumes Map automatically 108 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 attempts to map the selected disks to the target disks as described in the How the automatic mapping works p 109 section If you are unsatisfied with the mapping result you can re map disks manually To do this you have to unmap the disks in a reverse order that is the last mapped disk should be unmapped first Then map the disks manually as described below Disk Disk MODEL p 108 Select the destination disk for each of the source disks NT signature p 108 Select the way the recovered disk s signature will be handled The disk signature is used by Windows and the Linux kernel version 2 6 and later Disk destination To specify a destination disk 1 Select a disk where you want the selected disk to recover to The destination disk s space should be at least the same size as the uncompressed image data 2 Click OK All the data stored on the target disk will be replaced by the backed up data so be careful and watch out for non backed up data that you might need NT signature The NT signature is a record that is kept in the MBR It uniquely identifies the disk for the operating system When
254. ew plan s task s log Click Log You will be taken to the Log p 232 view containing the list of the log entries grouped by the plan task related activities Run a plan task Backup plan 1 Click Run 2 In the drop down list select the plan s task you need run Running the backup plan starts the selected task of that plan immediately in spite of its schedule and conditions Task Click Run The task will be executed immediately in spite of its schedule and conditions Stop a plan task Click Stop Backup plan Stopping the running backup plan stops all its tasks Thus all the task operations will be aborted Task Stopping a task aborts its operation recovery validation exporting conversion etc The task enters the Idle state The task schedule if created remains valid To complete the operation you will have to run the task over again What will happen if I stop the recovery task Recovering disks the aborted operation may cause changes in the target disk Depending on the time that has passed since the task run the target disk may not be initialized or the disk space may be unallocated or some volumes may be recovered and others not To recover the entire disk run the task once again Recovering volumes the target volume will be deleted and its space unallocated the same result you will get if the recovery is unsuccessful To recover the lost volume run the task once again
255. fies when and how to delete or move the backups p 263 created by the plan 274 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 S Static group A group of machines which a management server p 272 administrator populates by manually adding machines to the group A machine remains in a static group until the administrator removes it from the group or from the management server Storage node Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Storage Node A server aimed to optimize usage of various resources required for protection of enterprise data This goal is achieved by organizing managed vaults p 272 Storage Node enables the administrator to use a single centralized catalog p 267 of data stored in the managed vaults relieve managed machines p 272 of unnecessary CPU load by performing cleanup p 266 validation p 274 and other operations with backup archives p 263 which otherwise would be performed by agents p 263 drastically reduce backup traffic and storage space taken by the archives p 263 by using deduplication p 267 prevent access to the backup archives even in case the storage medium is stolen or accessed by a malefactor by using encrypted vaults p 270 T Task A set of actions to be performed by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 at a certain time or event The actions are described in a non human readable service file The time or event schedule is stored in the prote
256. find the subscriptions that I purchased If you purchased your subscriptions from an Acronis partner you should have received an e mail confirming the registration codes for each subscription Create an account on the Acronis web site if you do not have one already and log in to it Navigate to Online Backup gt for Business This is your account management Web page Click Enter new registration code and enter the registration codes The subscriptions will appear in the list of available subscriptions under the Manage subscriptions tab If you purchased your subscriptions online using the Acronis Web site they are available immediately on your account management Web page The newly obtained subscriptions are listed at the Manage subscriptions tab 13 1 8 3 When does my subscription begin Your subscription begins when you choose to have it begin not at the time of purchase The time count will begin as soon as the subscription is activated The first activation occurs when you assign a subscription to a certain machine To do so you need to have Acronis software installed 13 1 8 4 What happens when my subscription expires A month before the subscription expiration date you receive an e mail notification with an alert In addition you can see this alert on the account management Web page near the machine This means you need to renew p 252 the subscription to continue backing up the machine If you do not renew the subscriptio
257. following commands by using Exchange Management Shell To obtain database file paths Get MailboxDatabase Format List Property Name EdbFilePath StorageGroup To obtain log file paths Get MailboxDatabase ForEach Get StorageGroup _ StorageGroupName Format List Property Name LogFolderPath 202 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Exchange 2003 1 Start Exchange System Manager 2 Click Administrative Groups Note If Administrative Groups does not appear it may not be turned on To turn on Administrative Groups right click Exchange Organization and then click Properties Click to select the Display Administrative Groups check box 3 To find out transaction log location do the following a Right click the storage group and then click Properties b On the General tab you will see transaction log location 4 To find out database file location edb do the following a Expand the required storage group b Right click the database and then click Properties c On the Database tab you will see database file location and database streaming file location 11 1 1 3 Active Directory database files An Active Directory database consists of the following files 1 NTDS dit database file 2 Edb chk checkpoint file 3 Edb log transaction logs 4 Res1 log and Res2 log two reserve log files The files are typically located in the systemroot NTDS folder such as C Windows
258. for the password appear at any operation relating to the zone 151 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 After you configure the required settings click OK In the Result confirmation p 152 window review the expected layout and click OK to start creating the zone 7 2 1 1 Acronis Secure Zone Disk The Acronis Secure Zone can be located on any fixed hard drive Acronis Secure Zone is always created at the end of the hard disk A machine can have only one Acronis Secure Zone Acronis Secure Zone is created using unallocated space if available or at the expense of the volumes free space The Acronis Secure Zone cannot be organized on a dynamic disk To allocate space for Acronis Secure Zone 1 Choose a hard disk if several on which to create the zone The unallocated space and free space from all volumes of the first enumerated disk are selected by default The program displays the total space available for the Acronis Secure Zone 2 If you need to allocate more space for the zone you can select volumes from which free space can be taken Again the program displays the total space available for the Acronis Secure Zone depending on your selection You will be able to set the exact zone size in the Acronis Secure Zone Size p 151 window 3 Click OK 7 2 1 2 Acronis Secure Zone Size Enter the Acronis Secure Zone size or drag the slider to select any size between the minimum and the maximum ones The mini
259. form actions to prevent the future warnings or failure 3 OK All the tasks are completed successfully No action is required Note that a backup plan can be OK if none of the tasks has been started yet 225 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 12 1 2 3 Task states A task can be in one of the following states Idle Waiting Running Need interaction The initial task state is Idle Once the task is started manually or the event specified by the schedule occurs the task enters either the Running state or the Waiting state Running A task changes to the Running state when the event specified by the schedule occurs AND all the conditions set in the backup plan are met AND no other task that locks the necessary resources is running In this case nothing prevents the task from running Waiting A task changes to the Waiting state when the task is about to start but another task using the same resources is already running In particular more than one backup tasks cannot run simultaneously on a machine A backup task and a recovery task also cannot run simultaneously if they use the same resources Once the other task unlocks the resource the waiting task enters the Running state A task may also change to the Waiting state when the event specified by the schedule occurs but the condition set in the backup plan is not met See Task start conditions p 98 for details Need interaction Any running task can put
260. format extract them using a third party application The best practice is to store drivers for all the hardware used in your organization in a single repository sorted by device type or by the hardware configurations You can keep a copy of the repository on a DVD or a flash drive pick some drivers and add them to the bootable media create the custom bootable media with the necessary drivers and the necessary network configuration for each of your servers Or you can simply specify the path to the repository every time Universal Restore is used Check access to the drivers in bootable environment Make sure you have access to the device with drivers when working under bootable media Even if you configure system disk recovery in a Windows environment the machine will reboot and recovery will proceed in the Linux based environment Use WinPE based media if the device is available in Windows but Linux based media does not detect it 117 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 What if you do not have drivers Windows 7 includes more drivers than the older Windows operating systems There is a great chance that Universal Restore finds all necessary drivers in the Windows 7 driver folder So you may not necessarily have to specify the external path to the drivers Nevertheless performing Universal Restore is critical so the system uses the correct drivers The Windows default driver storage folder is determined in the registry va
261. formation can be recovered in case of an accidental data loss Suppose that you need to Perform backups at the end of each working day Be able to recover an accidentally deleted or inadvertently modified file if this has been discovered relatively quickly Have access to a weekly backup for 10 days after it was created Keep monthly backups for half a year Backup scheme parameters can then be set up as follows Start backup at 6 00 PM Back up on Workdays Weekly monthly Friday Keep backups Daily 1 week Weekly 10 days Monthly 6 months With this scheme you will have a week to recover a previous version of a damaged file from a daily backup as well as 10 day access to weekly backups Each monthly full backup will be available for six months since the creation date Work schedule Suppose you are a part time financial consultant and work in a company on Tuesdays and Thursdays On these days you often make changes to your financial documents statements and update the spreadsheets etc on your laptop To back up this data you may want to Track changes to the financial statements spreadsheets etc performed on Tuesdays and Thursdays daily incremental backup Have a weekly summary of file changes since last month Friday weekly differential backup Have a monthly full backup of your files Moreover assume that you want to retain acces
262. g a command shell To start the command shell press CTRL ALT F2 while in the bootable media s management console 180 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Acronis command line utilities acrocmd acronis asamba lash Linux commands and utilities busybox ifconfig rm cat init rmmod cdrecord insmod route chmod iscsiadm scp chown kill scsi_id chroot kpartx sed cp ln sg_map26 dd ls sh df lspci sleep dmesg lvm ssh dmraid mdadm sshd e2fsck mkdir strace e2label mke2fs swapoff echo mknod swapon egrep mkswap sysinfo fdisk more tar fsck mount tune2fs fxload mtx udev gawk mv udevinfo gpm pccardctl udevstart grep ping umount growisofs pktsetup uuidgen grub poweroff vconfig gunzip ps vi halt raidautorun zcat hexdump readcd 181 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 hotplug reboot 9 5 Acronis Startup Recovery Manager Acronis Startup Recovery Manager is a modification of the bootable agent p 264 residing on the system disk in Windows or on the boot partition in Linux and configured to start at boot time on pressing F11 It eliminates the need for a separate media or network connection to start the bootable rescue utility Acronis Startup Recovery Manager is especially useful for mobile users If a failure occurs reboot the machine wait for the prompt Press F11 for Acr
263. g disks of a BIOS based system to UEFI based and vice versa Green background means that the system will be bootable No user action is required Yellow background means that you need to perform additional steps to make the system bootable These steps are not possible on some machines Original system Target hardware BIOS UEFI BIOS OS convertible The target disk will be initialized as GPT The OS will be automatically converted to support UEFI booting If you want to recover the source disk as is 1 Turn off the UEFI mode in BIOS 2 Boot from a bootable media and perform the recovery BIOS OS non convertible The target disk will be initialized as the source one MBR The target machine must support BIOS Additional steps 1 Turn off the UEFI mode in BIOS 2 Boot from a bootable media and perform the recovery UEFI OS convertible The target disk will be initialized as MBR The OS will be automatically converted to support BIOS booting If you want to recover the source disk as is 1 Turn on the UEFI mode in BIOS 2 Boot from a bootable media and perform the recovery UEFI OS non convertible The target disk will be initialized as the source one GPT The target machine must support UEFI Additional steps 1 Turn on the UEFI mode in BIOS 2 Boot from a bootable media and perform the recovery Recovery to large d
264. g in to the online storage Then expand the Online backup storage group and select the account Prior to backing up to the online storage you need to buy a subscription p 254 to the online backup service and activate p 255 the subscription on the machine s you want to back up Online backup is not available under bootable media Online backup of Microsoft Exchange Server data by using Agent for Exchange is not possible Note Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online might be unavailable in your region To find more information click here http www acronis com my backup recovery online Personal To back up data to a personal vault expand the Vaults group and click the vault Acronis Secure Zone is considered as a personal vault available to all users that can log on the system Machine Local machine Local folders To back up data to a local folder of the machine expand the lt Machine name gt group and select the required folder CD DVD BD To back up data to optical media such as CD DVD or Blu ray Discs BD expand the lt Machine name gt group then select the required drive 41 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Destination Details RDX USB To back up data to an RDX drive or USB flash drive expand the lt Machine name gt group then select the required drive For information about using these drives see the Removable devices p 153 section Tape device To back up data to a locally
265. g procedure described below Existing virtual machine Available when the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Agent for Hyper V or Agent for ESX i is installed On selecting this you specify the virtualization server and the target virtual machine Then you proceed to the regular volume mapping procedure described below Please be aware that the target machine will be powered off automatically before recovery If you prefer to power it off manually modify the VM power management option Disks volumes Map automatically Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 attempts to map the selected volumes to the target disks as described in the How the automatic mapping works p 109 section If you are unsatisfied with the mapping result you can re map volumes manually To do this you have to unmap the volumes in a reverse order that is the last mapped volume should be unmapped first Then map the volumes manually as described below Recover Disk MBR to If the Master Boot Record is selected for recovery Disk p 111 Choose the disk to recover the Master Boot Record to NT signature p 108 Select the way the disk s signature contained in the MBR will be handled The disk signature is used by Windows and the Linux kernel version 2 6 and later 111 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Recover Volume Letter to Disk Volume Sequentially map each of the source volumes to a volume or an unallocated space on the
266. gs as is and click OK to proceed with recovery 11 3 2 Mounting Exchange Server databases After recovering the database files you can bring the databases online by mounting them Mounting is performed by using Exchange Management Console Exchange System Manager or Exchange Management Shell The recovered databases will be in a Dirty Shutdown state A database that is in a Dirty Shutdown state can be mounted by the system if it is recovered to its original location that is information about the original database is present in Active Directory When recovering a database to an alternate location such as a new database or as the recovery database the database cannot be mounted until you bring it to a Clean Shutdown state by using the Eseutil r lt Enn gt command lt Enn gt specifies the log file prefix for the database or storage group that contains the database into which you need to apply the transaction log files The account you use to attach a database must be delegated an Exchange Server Administrator role and a local Administrators group for the target server For details about how to mount databases see the following articles Exchange 2010 http technet microsoft com en us library aa998871 aspx Exchange 2007 http technet microsoft com en us library aa998871 v EXCHG 80 aspx Exchange 2003 http technet microsoft com en us library bb124040 aspx 11 3 3 Granular recovery of mailboxes RDB RSG
267. has to be recovered Restart the machine automatically after recovery is finished This option is effective when operating under bootable media The preset is Disabled This option enables booting the machine into the recovered operating system without user interaction 5 7 2 Error handling These options are effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media These options enable you to specify how to handle errors that might occur during recovery Do not show messages and dialogs while processing silent mode The preset is Disabled 130 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 With the silent mode enabled the program will automatically handle situations requiring user interaction where possible If an operation cannot continue without user interaction it will fail Details of the operation including errors if any can be found in the operation log Re attempt if an error occurs The preset is Enabled Number of attempts 30 Interval between attempts 30 seconds When a recoverable error occurs the program re attempts to perform the unsuccessful operation You can set the time interval and the number of attempts The attempts will be stopped as soon as the operation succeeds OR the specified number of attempts is performed depending on which comes first For example if the network location becomes unavailable or not reachable the program will attempt to reach the location every 30 s
268. have access permissions to the destination Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer 164 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 8 3 Mounting an image Mounting volumes from a disk backup image lets you access the volumes as though they were physical disks Multiple volumes contained in the same backup can be mounted within a single mount operation The mount operation is available when the console is connected to a managed machine running either Windows or Linux Mounting volumes in the read write mode enables you to modify the backup content that is save move create delete files or folders and run executables consisting of one file In this mode the software creates an incremental backup containing the changes you make to the backup content Please be aware that none of the subsequent backups will contain these changes You can mount volumes if the disk backup is stored in a local folder except optical disks Acronis Secure Zone or on a network share Usage scenarios Sharing mounted imag
269. he Grandfather Father Son backup scheme The scheme does not allow data to be backed up more than once a day You set the days of week when the daily backup will be performed and select from these days the day of weekly monthly backup Then you set the retention periods for the daily referred to as sons weekly referred to as fathers and monthly referred to as grandfathers backups The expired backups will be deleted automatically Tower of Hanoi to use the Tower of Hanoi backup scheme This scheme allows you to schedule when and how often to back up sessions and select the number of backup levels up to 16 The data can be backed up more than once a day By setting up the backup schedule and selecting backup levels you automatically obtain the rollback period the guaranteed number of sessions that you can go back at any time The automatic cleanup mechanism maintains the required rollback period by deleting the expired backups and keeping the most recent backups of each level Custom to create a custom scheme where you are free to set up a backup strategy in the way your enterprise needs it most specify multiple schedules for different backup types add conditions and specify the retention rules Manual start to create a backup task for manual start Initial seeding to save locally a full backup whose final destination is Acronis Online Backup Storage Note for Microsoft Exchange users Fo
270. he events available under Windows operating systems Event Time Daily Weekly Monthly Time passed since the last successful backup has completed specify the length of time User logon any user current user specify the user s account User logoff any user current user specify the user s account Shutting down is not the same as logging off The task will not run at a system shutdown System startup System shutdown An event in Windows event log specify the parameters of the event Condition For backup operations only you can specify a condition or multiple conditions in addition to the events Once any of the events occurs the scheduler checks the condition and runs the task if the condition is met With multiple conditions all of them must be met simultaneously to enable task execution The table below lists the conditions available under Windows operating systems Condition run the task only if 60 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 User is idle a screen saver is running or the machine is locked Location s host is available The task run time is within the specified time interval All users are logged off The specified period of time has passed since the last successful backup completed The scheduler behavior in case the event occurs but the condition or any of multiple conditions is not met is defined by the Task start conditions p 98 backup option What
271. he managed machine sorted by name You can also hide the unneeded columns and show the hidden ones For details see Sorting filtering and configuring table items p 18 In the backup table select the backup plan task Use the toolbar s buttons to take an action on the selected plan task For details see Actions on backup plans and tasks p 221 To review detailed information on the selected plan task use the information panel at the bottom of the window The panel is collapsed by default To expand the panel click the arrow mark The content of the panel is also duplicated in the Plan details p 230 and Task details p 231 windows respectively 12 1 1 Actions on backup plans and tasks The following is a guideline for you to perform operations with backup plans and tasks Restrictions Without the Administrator privileges on the machine a user cannot run or modify plans or tasks owned by other users It is not possible to modify or delete a currently running backup plan or task To Do Create a new backup plan or task Click New then select one of the following Backup plan p 34 Recovery task p 101 Validation task p 155 222 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 To Do View details of a plan task Click Details In the respective Plan Details p 230 or Task Details p 231 window review the plan or task details Vi
272. he retention rules are applied after creating a backup They are applied sequentially in the primary the second and all next locations Custom scheme Each backup is retained until the rules you specify are met Then it is either deleted or moved To set up deleting the backups In Clean up archive select Using retention rules In the Retention Rules window p 75 specify the rules and select If the specified conditions are met Delete the oldest backups In Apply retention rules specify when to apply the rules To set up moving the backups In Clean up archive select Using retention rules In the Retention Rules window p 75 specify the rules and select If the specified conditions are met Move the oldest backups to another location Click OK and then specify the location under Where to replicate move backups In Apply retention rules specify when to apply the rules 75 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 You can choose to apply the retention rules before creating a backup after creating a backup on a schedule or combine these options For the second and next locations creating a backup means copying or moving a backup there from the previous location 4 5 4 Retention rules for the Custom scheme In the Retention Rules window you can select how long to store backups in the location and whether to move or delete them afterward The rules will be applied to all the backups taken
273. his is why data contained in the backup is not encrypted Disk level encryption software often modifies system areas boot records or partition tables or file system tables These factors affect disk level backup and recovery the ability of the recovered system to boot and access to Acronis Secure Zone Under some conditions Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 is compatible with the following disk level encryption software Microsoft BitLocker Drive Encryption McAfee Endpoint Encryption PGP Whole Disk Encryption To ensure reliable disk level recovery follow the common rules and software specific recommendations 32 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Common installation rule The strong recommendation is to install the encryption software before installing Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 The way of using Acronis Secure Zone Acronis Secure Zone must not be encrypted with disk level encryption This is the only way to use Acronis Secure Zone 1 Install encryption software then install Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 2 Create Acronis Secure Zone 3 Exclude Acronis Secure Zone when encrypting the disk or its volumes Common backup rule You can do a disk level backup in the operating system Do not try to back up using bootable media or Acronis Startup Recovery Manager Software specific recovery procedures Microsoft BitLocker Drive Encryption To recover a system that was enc
274. ht Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Backup plans and tasks Use this view to manage backup plans and tasks on the managed machine run edit stop and delete plans and tasks view their progress Vaults Use this view to manage personal vaults and archives stored in there add new vaults rename and delete the existing ones validate vaults explore backup content perform operations on archives and backups etc Alerts Use this view to examine warning messages for the managed machine The Full list additionally displays Disk management Use this view to perform operations on the machine s hard disk drives Log Use this view to examine information on operations performed by the program on the managed machine Mounted images This node is displayed if at least one volume is mounted Use this view to manage mounted images Operations with pane How to expand minimize panes By default the Navigation pane appears expanded You might need to minimize the pane in order to free some additional workspace To do this click the chevron The pane will be minimized and the chevron changes its direction Click the chevron once again to expand the pane How to change the panes borders 1 Point to the pane s border 2 When the pointer becomes a double headed arrow drag the pointer to move the border 2 1 2 Main area views and action pages The main area is a basic place where
275. ially if the events are relatively often Conditions are available only when the custom backup scheme p 46 is used You can set conditions for full incremental and differential backup separately Adding multiple conditions Multiple conditions must be met simultaneously to enable task execution Example It is required to run the backup task after free space on the managed machine is changed by at least 1 GB but only if all users are logged off and more than 12 hours have passed since the last backup 69 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Set the schedule conditions and the Task start conditions backup option as follows Schedule When free space changed Value Run task if free space has changed by at least 1 GB Condition User logged off Value Run the task on schedule only if all users are logged off Condition Time since last backup Value Time since the last backup 12 hour s Task start conditions Wait until the conditions are met If the free space changes by more than 1 GB the scheduler will wait until both conditions are met at the same time and then run the backup task 4 4 5 1 User is idle Applies to Windows User is idle means that a screen saver is running on the managed machine or the machine is locked Example Run the backup task on the managed machine every day at 9PM preferably when the user is idle If the user is still active by 11PM run the task
276. ical sector VMware VMFS 64 KB select this option when recovering the volume as a VMware Virtual Machine File System partition Vista alignment 1 MB select this option if the recovered volume will be used under Windows operating systems starting from Windows Vista or when recovering volumes to an HDD or SSD drive that has a 4 KB sector size Custom Specify the volume alignment manually It is recommended that the value be a multiple of the physical sector size Logical drive letter for Windows only By default the first unused letter will be assigned to the volume To assign other letter select the desired letter from a drop down list If you select the empty value no letter will be assigned to the recovered volume hiding it from the OS You should not assign letters to volumes that are inaccessible to Windows such as to those other than FAT and NTFS 5 1 4 3 Selecting target location for files and folders Where to recover Destination Select a location to recover the backed up files to Original location Files and folders will be recovered to the same path s as they are in the backup For example if you have backed up all files and folders in C Documents Finance Reports the files will be recovered to the same path If the folder does not exist it will be created automatically New location Files will be recovered to the location that you specify in the tree The files and folders
277. ically used when experiencing problems while working with the bootable media Normally you can leave this field empty You can also specify any of these parameters by pressing F11 while in the boot menu Parameters When specifying multiple parameters separate them with spaces acpi off Disables Advanced Configuration and Power Interface ACPI You may want to use this parameter when experiencing problems with a particular hardware configuration noapic Disables Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller APIC You may want to use this parameter when experiencing problems with a particular hardware configuration vga ask Prompts for the video mode to be used by the bootable media s graphical user interface Without the vga parameter the video mode is detected automatically vga mode_number Specifies the video mode to be used by the bootable media s graphical user interface The mode number is given by mode_number in the hexadecimal format for example vga 0x318 Screen resolution and the number of colors corresponding to a mode number may be different on different machines We recommend using the vga ask parameter first to choose a value for mode_number quiet Disables displaying of startup messages when the Linux kernel is loading and starts the management console after the kernel is loaded This parameter is implicitly specified when creating the bootable media but you can remove this parameter while in the boot menu
278. ication during the operation when user interaction is required 4 Click Send Test WinPopup Message to check if the settings are correct 5 7 7 Pre Post commands This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and PE based bootable media The option enables you to define the commands to be automatically executed before and after the data recovery Example of how you can use the pre post commands Launch the Checkdisk command in order to find and fix logical file system errors physical errors or bad sectors to be started before the recovery starts or after the recovery ends 134 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 The program does not support interactive commands i e commands that require user input for example pause A post recovery command will not be executed if the recovery proceeds with reboot To specify pre post commands 1 Enable pre post commands execution by checking the following options Execute before the recovery Execute after the recovery 2 Do any of the following Click Edit to specify a new command or a batch file Select the existing command or the batch file from the drop down list 3 Click OK 5 7 7 1 Pre recovery command To specify a command batch file to be executed before the recovery process starts 1 In the Command field type a command or browse to a batch file The program does not support interactive commands i e co
279. ies require user interaction This window enables you to specify your decision such as to confirm reboot or to retry after freeing up the disk space on all the activities in the same place Until at least one activity requires interaction you can open this window at any time from the managed machine s welcome screen Alternatively you can review the task execution states in the Backup plans and tasks view and specify your decision on each task in the information panel The preset is Enabled To make a selection select or clear the The Activities Need Interaction dialog check box The Feedback Confirmation dialog This option defines whether to display a pop up window with the information about your system after an error occurs You can send this information to Acronis technical support The preset is Enabled To make a selection select or clear the The Feedback Confirmation dialog check box Notify if bootable media is not created This option defines whether to display a pop up window when the management console is launched on a machine and no bootable media has been created on that machine The preset is Enabled To make a selection select or clear the Notify if bootable media is not created check box 22 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Notify when the management console is connected to a component of a different version This option defines whether to display a pop up window when a
280. ifs What if an event occurs and a condition if any is met while the previous task run has not completed The event will be ignored What if an event occurs while the scheduler is waiting for the condition required by the previous event The event will be ignored What if the condition is not met for a very long time If delaying a backup is getting risky you can force the condition tell the users to log off or run the task manually To automatically handle this situation you can set the time interval after which the task will run regardless of the condition 4 4 1 Daily schedule Daily schedule is effective in Windows and Linux operating systems To specify a daily schedule In the Schedule area select the appropriate parameter as follows Every lt gt day s Set up the certain number of days you want the task to be run For example if you set Every 2 day s the task will be started on every other day In the During the day execute the task area select one of the following Once at lt gt Set up the time at which the task will be run once Every lt gt From lt gt Until lt gt Set up how many times the task will be restarted during the specified time interval For example setting the task frequency to Every 1 hour From 10 00 00 AM until 10 00 00 PM allows the task to run 12 times from 10 AM to 10 PM during one day In the Effective area set the following sett
281. ight Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Filter items by predefined column value In a field below the corresponding column s header select the required value from the drop down list Filter items by entered value In a field below the corresponding column s header type a value As a result you will see the list of values fully or just partly coincide with the entered value Filter items by a predefined parameters Depending on the view you can filter a table items by some predefined parameters To do this click the respective buttons or links at the top of the table For example In the Log view you can filter the event entries by clicking buttons associated with the result Succeeded Succeeded with warnings or Failed The Log view has the activity start time as the default parameter and three predefined settings for filtering activities by this parameter All available For last 3 months or For custom period are placed at the top of the Log view Show or hide table columns By default any table has a fixed number of columns that are shown others are hidden If required you can hide the shown columns and show the hidden ones To show or hide columns 1 Right click any column header to open the context menu 2 Click the items you want to be displayed hidden 2 1 2 2 Action pages An action page appears in the main area when clicking any action item in the Actions menu It contains step
282. ill be empty If you select the check box for the Data1 Folder1 or Folder2 folder the checked folders will be included in the backup as ordinary folders regardless of the state of the Mount points option 4 6 15 Multi volume snapshot This option is effective only for Windows operating systems This option applies to disk level backup This option also applies to file level backup when the file level backup is performed by taking a snapshot The File level backup snapshot p 89 option determines whether a snapshot will be taken during file level backup The option determines whether to take snapshots of multiple volumes at the same time or one by one The preset is Enable 92 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 When this option is set to Enable snapshots of all volumes being backed up will be created simultaneously Use this option to create a time consistent backup of data spanned across multiple volumes for instance for an Oracle database When this option is set to Disable the volumes snapshots will be taken one after the other As a result if the data spans across several volumes the resulting backup may be not consistent 4 6 16 Notifications Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 provides the ability of notifying users about backup completion through e mail or the messaging service 4 6 16 1 E mail This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available
283. indows services Remote Procedure Call RPC Protected Storage and Windows Management Instrumentation This service also depends on Acronis Scheduler2 Service To view the list of dependencies for a service do the following 1 In the Services snap in double click the name of the service 2 On the Dependencies tab examine the This service depends field 3 5 Full incremental and differential backups Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 provides the capability to use popular backup schemes such as Grandfather Father Son and Tower of Hanoi as well as to create custom backup schemes All backup schemes are based on full incremental and differential backup methods The term scheme in fact denotes the algorithm of applying these methods plus the algorithm of the archive cleanup Comparing backup methods with each other does not make much sense because the methods work as a team in a backup scheme Each method should play its specific role according to its advantages A competent backup scheme will benefit from the advantages of all backup methods and lessen the influence of all the methods shortcomings For example weekly differential backup facilitates archive cleanup because it can be easily deleted along with the weekly set of daily incremental backups depending on it Backing up with the full incremental or differential backup method results in a backup p 263 of the corresponding type Full backup A full backup stores al
284. ing Microsoft Exchange Server 2010 SP2 it is recommended that you periodically check the consistency of the Exchange database files In Exchange consistency check is performed by running Eseutil K It verifies the page level integrity of all Exchange databases and checksums of all database pages and log files The process of verification can be time consuming For information about using Eseutil K see http technet microsoft com en us library bb123956 v exchg 80 You can perform the consistency check before or after a backup Before a backup This ensures that you do not back up the damaged Exchange database files 207 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 a Dismount the databases b Run Eseutil K and review the verification results c If the databases are consistent mount them again and run the backup Otherwise repair the damaged databases Refer to the Transaction log truncation for Exchange Server p 205 section for more information about mounting and dismounting databases After a backup The advantage of this method is that you do not have to dismount the databases that are in constant use However the consistency check in the backup is much slower than the consistency check of the on disk databases Mount p 164 volumes containing the required database files from the disk backup in the Read only mode and run Eseutil K If a checksum mismatch or file header damage is detected repair
285. ing a backup plan can be converted to a virtual machine immediately on schedule or combining both methods The conversion task will be created on the machine being backed up and will use this machine s date and time If the agent that backs up the machine is installed outside it such is the case when a ESX i or Hyper V virtual machine is backed up at a hypervisor level the task will be created on the machine where the agent is The target virtual machine must be powered off by the time of conversion otherwise the conversion task will fail If this happens you can restart the conversion task manually after powering off the machine Any changes made to the machine while it was powered on will be overwritten 6 2 2 3 Selecting a machine that will perform conversion Take into account the following considerations Which agent is installed on the machine The resulting virtual machine type and location depend on the agent that resides on the selected machine Agent for ESX i is installed on the machine If the agent manages more than one ESX i host you can choose the host where the virtual machine will be created In the Storage step you can select the storage where the virtual machine will be created Virtual machines created as a result of backup cannot be added to a backup plan On the management server they appear as unmanageable or do not appear at all if integration with vCenter Server is not enabled Agent for H
286. ing up the machine to the same subscription reassign p 256 the subscription to the machine If you do this the next machine s backup can be incremental If you assign a new subscription to the machine the software will have to do a new full backup 13 1 6 Initial Seeding FAQ This section explains what Initial Seeding is why you would want to use it and provides some usage details 13 1 6 1 What is Initial Seeding Initial Seeding is an extra service that lets you save an initial full backup locally and then send it to Acronis on a hard disk drive Acronis uploads the backup to the online storage After that you can add incremental backups to this full backup either manually or on a schedule The hard disk drive is sent back to you but it is not possible to recover from it However recovery from a locally attached device is possible with the Large scale recovery p 250 option 13 1 6 2 Why would I want to use Initial Seeding This service helps you save time and network traffic during the initial full backup It is useful when backing up very large volumes of data or entire machines to the online storage 13 1 6 3 Is Initial Seeding a paid service Yes you need to buy one Initial Seeding license per machine 13 1 6 4 What types of hard drive can I use for Initial Seeding Acronis accepts hard disk drives of the following interface types IDE ATA SATA USB connected drives SCSI drives are not accepted You
287. ings From lt gt Set up a date when this schedule will be enabled an effective date If this check box is cleared the task will be started on the nearest day and time you have specified above To lt gt Set up a date when this schedule will be disabled If this check box is cleared the task will be run for an indefinite number of days All the settings you made are displayed in the Result field at the bottom of the window 61 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Examples Simple daily schedule Run the task every day at 6PM The schedule s parameters are thus set up as follows 1 Every 1 day s 2 Once at 06 00 00 PM 3 Effective From not set The task will be started on the current day if it has been created before 6PM If you have created the task after 6 PM the task will be started for the first time on the next day at 6 PM To not set The task will be performed for an indefinite number of days Three hour time interval lasting for three months schedule Run the task every three hours The task starts on a certain date say September 15 2009 and ends after three months The schedule s parameters are thus set up as follows 1 Every 1 day s 2 Every 3 hours From 12 00 00 AM midnight Until 09 00 00 PM thus the task will be performed 8 times a day with a 3 hour time interval After the last daily recurrence at 9 PM the next day comes and the task starts over
288. ins an encrypted password looks like lt password encrypted true gt lt password gt To change the encrypted password 1 In the command line run the acronis_encrypt utility acronis_encrypt UserPassword 1 here UserPassword 1 is the password you want to encrypt 2 The utility outputs a string for example XXXYYYZZZ888 3 Copy this string and paste it into the tag as follows lt password encrypted true gt XXXYYYZZZ888 lt password gt The acronis_encrypt utility is available on any machine where Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Management Console is installed The path to the utility is as follows In a 32 bit version of Windows CommonProgramFiles Acronis Utils In a 64 bit version of Windows CommonProgramFiles x86 Acronis Utils In Linux usr sbin How to make a backup plan use the agent s credentials Before importing or deploying the export file delete the value of the required lt login gt tag Then the imported or deployed plan will use credentials of the agent service Example To make the backup plan run under the agent s credentials find the lt login gt tag in the lt plan gt lt options gt lt common_parameters gt section The tag looks like follows lt login gt Administrator lt login gt lt password encrypted true gt XXXYYYZZZ888 lt password gt Delete the value of the lt login gt tag so that the tag looks like follows lt login gt lt login g
289. inst accidental data loss 10 3 Running Acronis Disk Director Lite You can run Acronis Disk Director Lite under Windows or start it from a bootable media Running Acronis Disk Director Lite under Windows If you run Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Management Console and connect it to a managed machine the Disk management view will be available in the Navigation tree of the console with which you can start Acronis Disk Director Lite Running Acronis Disk Director Lite from a bootable media You can run Acronis Disk Director Lite on a bare metal on a machine that cannot boot or on a non Windows machine To do so boot the machine from a bootable media p 265 created with the Acronis Bootable Media Builder run the management console and then click Disk Management 10 4 Choosing the operating system for disk management On a machine with two or more operating systems representation of disks and volumes depends on which operating system is currently running A volume may have a different letter in different Windows operating systems For example volume E might appear as D or L when you boot another Windows operating system installed on the same machine It is also possible that this volume will have the same letter E under any Windows OS installed on the machine A dynamic disk created in one Windows operating system is considered as a Foreign Disk in another Windows operating system or might be unsupported by this operating
290. inux systems If the software cannot detect whether an operating system is present in the backup it suggests using Universal Restore on the off chance of the system presence These cases are as follows the backup is split into several files the backup is located in Acronis Online Backup Storage on an FTP SFTP server tape CD or DVD Universal Restore is not available when the backup is located in Acronis Secure Zone you have chosen to use Acronis Active Restore p 262 This is because these features are primarily meant for instant data recovery on the same machine Without recovery Under bootable media you can also use Universal Restore without recovery by clicking Apply Universal Restore in the media welcome screen Universal Restore will be applied to the operating system that already exists on the machine If there are multiple operating systems you are prompted to choose the one to apply Universal Restore to 5 2 2 1 Universal Restore in Windows Preparation Prepare drivers Before applying Universal Restore to a Windows operating system make sure that you have the drivers for the new HDD controller and the chipset These drivers are critical to start the operating system Use the CD or DVD supplied by the hardware vendor or download the drivers from the vendor s Web site The driver files should have the inf sys or oem extensions If you download the drivers in the exe cab or zip
291. ions Increase storage quota Replace a subscription with another one that has a greater storage quota The remaining subscription period is reduced in proportion to the capacity increase Initial Seeding An extra service that enables you to save an initial full backup locally and then send it to Acronis on a hard disk drive Acronis uploads the backup to the online storage After that you can add incremental backups to this full backup either manually or on a schedule The Initial Seeding service might be unavailable in your region To find more information click here http kb acronis com content 15118 Large Scale Recovery An extra service that enables you to obtain a copy of the backups you have in the online storage You can then recover data from this copy The Large Scale Recovery service might be unavailable in your region To find more information click here http kb acronis com content 15118 License Not to be confused with Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 product license Permission for a machine to use an extra service of Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online You can buy Initial Seeding licenses and or Large Scale Recovery licenses Reassign a subscription Assign a subscription that is already activated to a different machine Registration code A character string for registering a subscription or license that was bought from an Acronis partner When you purchase such subscriptions or licenses you r
292. ions Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online enables bare metal recovery directly from the online storage Files can be recovered from disk level backups as well as from file level backups 243 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 13 1 3 How long will my backups be kept in the online storage Your backups remain in the online storage until you delete them or until the subscription expires Recovering data from the online storage is possible for 30 days following the subscription expiration date For effective use of the storage space you have the option to set up the Delete backups older than retention rule Example You might want to use the following backup strategy for a file server Back up the critical files twice a day on a schedule Set the retention rule Delete backups older than 7 days This means that after every backup the software will check for backups older than 7 days and delete them automatically Run backup of the server s system volume manually as required For example after the operating system updates Manually delete the backups that you do not need 13 1 4 How to secure my data Backups can be encrypted using the Advanced Encryption Standard AES cryptographic algorithm and the password you set This guarantees that your data is not accessed by anyone else 13 1 5 Backup and recovery FAQ This section answers questions related to backup and recovery processes 13 1 5 1 What backup me
293. iple operating systems During recovery you can use Universal Restore for operating systems of a certain type all Windows systems all Linux systems or both If your selection of volumes to recover contains multiple Windows systems you can specify all drivers for them in a single list Each driver will be installed in the operating system for which it is intended 5 3 Recovering BIOS based systems to UEFI based and vice versa Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 supports transferring 64 bit Windows operating systems between BIOS based hardware and hardware that supports Unified Extensible Firmware Interface UEFI How it works Depending on whether the machine uses BIOS or UEFI firmware for booting the disk with the system volume must have a specific partitioning scheme The partitioning scheme is master boot record MBR for BIOS and GUID partition table GPT for UEFI In addition the operating system itself is sensitive to the type of firmware When performing a recovery to a machine that has a type of firmware that is different from the firmware of the original machine Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Initializes the disk to which you are recovering the system volume either as an MBR disk or as a GPT disk depending on the new firmware Adjusts the Windows operating system so that it can start on the new firmware For details including the list of Windows operating systems that can be adjusted this way see
294. ire Acronis Managed Machine Service to be run under an account with administrator s rights Please take all necessary precautions p 182 to avoid possible data loss 10 1 Supported file systems Acronis Disk Director Lite supports the following file systems FAT 16 32 NTFS If it is necessary to perform an operation on a volume with a different file system use the full version of Acronis Disk Director It provides more tools and utilities to manage disks and volumes with the following file systems FAT 16 32 NTFS Ext2 Ext3 HFS HFSX ReiserFS JFS Linux SWAP 10 2 Basic precautions To avoid any possible disk and volume structure damage or data loss please take all necessary precautions and follow these simple rules 183 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 1 Back up the disk on which volumes will be created or managed Having your most important data backed up to another hard disk network share or removable media will allow you to work on disk volumes being reassured that your data is safe 2 Test your disk to make sure it is fully functional and does not contain bad sectors or file system errors 3 Do not perform any disk volume operations while running other software that has low level disk access Close these programs before running Acronis Disk Director Lite With these simple precautions you will protect yourself aga
295. irst Note Volumes backed up using the sector by sector option cannot be resized Tip A volume cannot be resized when being recovered from a backup split into multiple removable media To be able to resize the volume copy all parts of the backup to a single location on a hard disk Type A basic MBR disk can contain up to four primary volumes or up to three primary volumes and multiple logical drives By default the program selects the original volume s type You can change this setting if required 112 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Primary Information about primary volumes is contained in the MBR partition table Most operating systems can boot only from the primary volume of the first hard disk but the number of primary volumes is limited If you are going to recover a system volume to a basic MBR disk select the Active check box Active volume is used for loading an operating system Choosing active for a volume without an installed operating system could prevent the machine from booting You cannot set a logical drive or dynamic volume active Logical Information about logical volumes is located not in the MBR but in the extended partition table The number of logical volumes on a disk is unlimited A logical volume cannot be set as active If you recover a system volume to another hard disk with its own volumes and operating system you will most likely need only the data In this case you can re
296. is a special administrative database storage group in Exchange Server It lets you extract data from the mounted mailbox database The extracted data can be copied or merged to the existing mailboxes without disturbing user access to the current data For more information about RDB and RSG refer to the following articles Exchange 2010 http technet microsoft com en us library dd876954 Exchange 2007 http technet microsoft com en us library bb124039 v exchg 80 Exchange 2003 http technet microsoft com en us library bb123631 v exchg 65 To recover a mailbox 1 If a RDB RSG does not exist create it as described in the following articles Exchange 2010 http technet microsoft com en us library ee332321 212 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Exchange 2007 http technet microsoft com en us library aa997694 v exchg 80 Exchange 2003 http technet microsoft com en us library bb124427 v exchg 65 2 Recover the database files to the RDB RSG folder structure For information about recovering database files see Recovering Exchange Server database files from a disk backup p 210 3 Mount the recovery database For information about mounting databases see Mounting Exchange Server databases p 211 4 Proceed as described in the following articles Exchange 2010 http technet microsoft com en us library ee332351 Exchange 2007 http technet microsoft
297. is mount point instead of the network share itself To export data to an FTP or SFTP server type the server name or address in the Path field as follows ftp ftp_server port _number or sftp sftp_server port number If the port number is not specified port 21 is used for FTP and port 22 is used for SFTP After entering access credentials the folders on the server become available Click the appropriate folder on the server You can access the server as an anonymous user if the server enables such access To do so click Use anonymous access instead of entering credentials According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer 163 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 To export data to a locally attached tape device expand the Tape drives group then click the required device In stand alone editions of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 tape devices are available only if you have upgraded from Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 For information about using tapes see the Tape devices section 2 Using the archives table To assist you with choosing the right destination the table on the right displays the names of the archives contained in each location you select in the tree While you are reviewing the location content a
298. isks in BIOS After a recovery to a BIOS based system the target system disk is initialized as MBR Because of disk size limitations in BIOS if the disk is larger than 2 TB only the first 2 TB of disk space will be available for use If the machine supports UEFI you can overcome this limitation by turning on the UEFI mode 122 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 and then performing the recovery The disk is initialized as GPT The 2 TB limitation for GPT disks does not exist 5 4 Acronis Active Restore Active Restore is the Acronis proprietary technology that brings a system or a database online immediately after its recovery is started Customers familiar with Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Agent for Exchange can note that this agent uses Active Restore to make an Exchange information store available during its recovery While based on the same technology recovery of the Information Store proceeds in quite a different way than the operating system recovery described in this section For more information refer to the Using Acronis Active Restore for database recovery of the Backing up Microsoft Exchange Server data document Supported operating systems Active Restore is available when recovering Windows starting from Windows 2000 Limitations Active Restore is meant for instant data recovery on the same machine It is not available when recovering to dissimilar hardware The only supported archiv
299. it http technet microsoft com en us library bb457110 aspx 816307 Best practices for using dynamic disks on Windows Server 2003 based computers http support microsoft com kb 816307 Dynamic group A group of machines p 272 which is populated automatically by the management server p 272 according to membership criteria specified by the administrator Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 offers the following membership criteria Operating system Active Directory organizational unit 270 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 IP address range Listed in txt csv file A machine remains in a dynamic group as long as the machine meets the group s criteria However the administrator can specify exclusions and not include certain machines in the dynamic group even if they meet the criteria Dynamic volume Any volume located on dynamic disks p 269 or more precisely on a disk group p 268 Dynamic volumes can span multiple disks Dynamic volumes are usually configured depending on the desired goal to increase the volume size a spanned volume to reduce the access time a striped volume to achieve fault tolerance by introducing redundancy mirrored and RAID 5 volumes E Encrypted archive A backup archive p 263 encrypted according to the Advanced Encryption Standard AES When the encryption option and a password for the archive are set in the backup options
300. itly Scheduled or postponed start The task credentials are mandatory You cannot complete the task creation until you specify the task credentials Task credentials are specified on the task creation page in a similar manner as the plan s credentials are specified In Linux You do not need to specify task credentials In Linux tasks always run under the root user account 25 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 3 3 User privileges on a managed machine When managing a machine running Windows the scope of a user s management rights depends on the user s privileges on the machine Regular users A regular user such as a member of the Users group has the following management rights Perform file level backup and recovery of the files that the user has permissions to access but without using a file level backup snapshot p 89 Create backup plans and tasks and manage them View but not manage backup plans and tasks created by other users View the local event log Backup operators A user who is a member of the Backup Operators group also has the following management right Back up and recover the entire machine or any data on the machine with or without using a disk snapshot Using a hardware snapshot provider may still require administrative privileges Administrators A user who is a member of the Administrators group also has the following management right
301. ives Physical transportation of a vault to a distant branch office Recovery without access to the storage node in case of networking problems or failure of the storage node Recovery of the storage node itself Export from an HDD based vault to a tape device can be considered as simple on demand archive staging The resulting archive s name By default the exported archive inherits the name of the original archive Because having multiple archives of the same names in the same location is not advisable the following actions are disabled with the default archive name Exporting part of an archive to the same location Exporting an archive or part of an archive to a location where an archive of the same name exists Exporting an archive or part of an archive to the same location twice In any of the above cases provide an archive name that is unique to the destination folder or vault If you need to redo the export using the same archive name first delete the archive that resulted from the previous export operation The resulting archive s options The exported archive inherits the options of the original archive including encryption and the password When exporting a password protected archive you are prompted for the password If the original archive is encrypted the password is used to encrypt the resulting archive Source and destination locations When the console is connected to a manag
302. ives an archive is a set of backups Validating an archive Exporting an archive These limitations also apply to backing up data using Initial Seeding and to recovering data using Large Scale Recovery An initial seeding backup is automatically validated immediately after its creation Backup and recovery options Some backup and recovery options are not supported by online backups For example Backup splitting p 84 By using the Backup performance gt Network connection speed option you can vary the transferring speed as kilobytes per second but not as a percentage 13 8 Terminology reference The following is the list of terms related to the Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online service Activate a subscription Allow the machine to use the online storage according to the subscription Subscription period starts counting down when the subscription is activated Activated subscription A subscription that is currently being used by a machine 260 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Assign a subscription to a machine Reserve a subscription for a particular machine Subscription period does not start counting down until the subscription is activated Assigned subscription A subscription that has been assigned to a machine Available subscription A subscription that is not assigned to any machine Extra service A service that you can use in addition to online backup subscript
303. ivity time This option is effective only if you set up replication or retention rules p 71 for the backups This option defines a time period when starting replication or applying retention rules is not allowed The operations will be performed when the inactivity time ends if the machine is powered on at that moment The operations that had started before the inactivity time began continue without interruption The inactivity time affects all locations including the primary one The preset is Disabled To specify the inactivity time select the Do not start replication cleanup within the following time check box and then select the days and the time period during the day Usage example You may want to use this option to separate the backup process from replication or cleanup For example suppose that you back up machines locally during the day and replicate the backups to a network folder Make the inactivity time contain the working hours Replication will be performed after the working hours when network load is lower 77 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 4 5 6 Usage examples This section provides examples of how you can replicate backups and set up retention rules for them 4 5 6 1 Example 1 Replicating backups to a network folder Consider the following scenario You want to perform a full backup of your machine manually You want to store the backups in Acronis Secure Zone p 150
304. ize The CHS addressing scheme is used for example in all Windows operating systems earlier than Windows Vista If volumes are misaligned the cluster overlaps more physical sectors than it would have occupied if aligned As a result more physical sectors need to be erased and rewritten each time the data changes The redundant read write operations noticeably slow down the disk speed and overall system performance SSD drive misalignment decreases not only system performance but drive lifetime Since SSD memory cells are designed for a certain amount of read write operations redundant read write operations lead to early degradation of the SSD drive When recovering dynamic volumes and logical volumes created in Linux with Logical Volume Manager LVM the appropriate alignment is set up automatically When recovering basic MBR and GPT volumes you can select the alignment method manually if the automatic alignment does not satisfy you for some reason The following options are available Select automatically Default recommended The software will automatically set the appropriate alignment based on the source and target disk volume properties 113 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Use the following options only if you absolutely need to CHS 63 sectors select this option if the recovered volume will be used under Microsoft Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 or earlier on disks having 512 bytes per phys
305. ke sure you have activated an Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online subscription on the machine where you will do initial seeding If you are currently using a trial subscription make sure that you also have a paid subscription available and assigned to this machine Do not use the Initial Seeding service if you do not have a paid subscription 2 Decide on the media p 245 that you will send 3 Attach the media to the machine you are going to back up Alternatively you can back up to a local or network folder and then copy move the backup to the media 4 Start Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 click Create backup plan and create a backup plan on this machine Under What to back up select disks volumes or files folders you want to back up Under Where to back up specify Online Backup Storage In Backup scheme select Initial seeding Specify the said media as the backup destination Optional but strongly recommended Enable backup encryption in Backup options gt Archive protection The backup starts immediately after you click the final OK 5 Optional If you want to add backups from another machine attach the media to that machine and perform the same steps You need a separate Initial Seeding license for each machine that you want to back up 6 Package p 246 the media along with a prepaid return shipping label and send it to Acronis by physical mail The address is available on your accoun
306. king up application servers Microsoft Exchange Server Microsoft SQL Server Microsoft SharePoint or Active Directory Software A software provider In most cases VSS will use the Microsoft Software Shadow Copy provider Hardware Select automatically VSS will use the hardware based provider that supports the source volume If no hardware based provider is found backups will be created by means of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 without taking snapshots Note Using a hardware snapshot provider may require administrative privileges Do not use VSS If you select Do not use VSS the data snapshot will be taken by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Choose Do not use VSS if your database is incompatible with VSS Backup process is fastest but data consistency of the applications whose transactions are not completed at the time of taking a snapshot cannot be guaranteed You may use Pre Post data capture commands p 95 to indicate which commands should be performed before and after taking the snapshot This ensures that the data is being backed up in a consistent state For instance specify pre data capture commands that will suspend the database and flush all caches to ensure that all transactions are completed and specify post data capture commands that will resume the database operations after the snapshot is taken Volume shadow copy writers Before backing up the data of VSS aware applications make sure that the vol
307. kup To bring a database online mount it For details see Mounting Exchange Server databases p 211 If you need to perform granular recovery of individual mailboxes or their items mount the restored database either as a recovery database RDB in Exchange 2010 or to a recovery storage group RSG in Exchange 2003 2007 For details see Granular recovery of mailboxes p 211 11 3 1 Recovering Exchange Server database files from a disk backup This section describes how to use Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 to recover Exchange Server database files from a disk backup For instructions on how to find out the database paths refer to Exchange Server database files p 201 211 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 To recover Exchange Server databases 1 Connect the console to the machine on which you are going to perform the operation 2 Navigate to the vault containing the disk backup with the Exchange data files 3 Click the Data view tab In the Show list click Folders files 4 Select the required Exchange database files and click Recover By default the data will be reverted to the state of the latest backup If you need to select another point in time to revert the data to use the Versions list 5 On the recovery page under What to recover section a In Data paths select Custom b In Browse specify a folder where the database files will be recovered to 6 Leave the rest of the settin
308. kup Operator privileges are not required Trying to back up files that are opened for exclusive access will result in a read error Files in the backup may be not time consistent 4 6 12 File level security These options are effective only for file level backup in Windows operating systems In archives store encrypted files in a decrypted state This option defines whether to decrypt files before saving them to a backup archive The preset is Disabled 90 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Simply ignore this option if you do not use the encryption Enable the option if encrypted files are included in the backup and you want them to be accessed by any user after recovery Otherwise only the user who encrypted the files folders will be able to read them Decryption may also be useful if you are going to recover encrypted files on a different machine File encryption is available in Windows using the NTFS file system with the Encrypting File System EFS To access a file or folder encryption setting select Properties gt General gt Advanced Attributes gt Encrypt contents to secure data Preserve file security settings in archives This option defines whether to back up NTFS permissions for files along with the files The preset is Enabled When the option is enabled files and folders are saved in the archive with the original permissions to read write or execute the files for each user or user group If yo
309. l cataloging 83 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 If you select Full cataloging the backup contents are cataloged to the highest possible level of detail This means that the following data will be displayed in the catalog For a disk level backup disks volumes files and folders For a file level backup files and folders For an Exchange database level backup databases or storage groups and mailboxes always folders and e mails depends on the Microsoft Exchange metadata collection option For an Exchange mailbox level backup mailboxes folders and e mails You may want to select Fast cataloging if the full cataloging tends to affect the performance of the managed machine or if your backup window is too narrow The following data will be displayed in the catalog For a disk level backup only disks and volumes For a file level backup nothing For an Exchange database level backup only databases or storage groups and mailboxes For an Exchange mailbox level backup only mailboxes To add the full contents of already existing backups to the catalog you can start the full cataloging manually when appropriate Note for Virtual Edition users When backing up to an unmanaged vault except for a locally attached storage Agent for ESX i Virtual Appliance always performs fast cataloging You can start the full cataloging of the vault manually from the
310. l data selected for backup A full backup underlies any archive and forms the base for incremental and differential backups An archive can contain multiple full backups or consist of only full backups A full backup is self sufficient you do not need access to any other backup to recover data from a full backup It is widely accepted that a full backup is the slowest to do but the fastest to restore With Acronis technologies recovery from an incremental backup may be not slower than recovery from a full one A full backup is most useful when you need to roll back the system to its initial state this initial state does not change often so there is no need for regular backup Example An Internet cafe school or university lab where the administrator often undoes changes made by the students or guests but rarely updates the reference backup in fact after installing software updates only The backup time is not crucial in this case and the recovery time will be minimal when recovering the systems from the full backup The administrator can have several copies of the full backup for additional reliability Incremental backup An incremental backup stores changes to the data against the latest backup You need access to other backups from the same archive to recover data from an incremental backup An incremental backup is most useful when 28 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 you need the possibilit
311. lable for the time period selected in step 3 6 Having selected the required data click Recover and configure the parameters of the recovery operation What if the data does not appear in the data view The probable reasons of the issue are as follows Wrong time period is set The required data was not backed up during the time period set by the Display data backed up for control Solution Try to increase the time period Fast cataloging is turned on If the data is displayed partially or is not displayed at all most likely the fast cataloging p 82 was turned on during backup Solutions Run the full cataloging manually by clicking Catalog now For the Data view only the backups stored on the selected vault will be cataloged The backups that have already been cataloged will not be cataloged again Since cataloging a large number of backed up data may take a long time you may prefer to use the Archive view of the respective vault For more information about using the Archive view see Browsing the vault contents and data selection in the Working with vaults p 147 section 106 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 The data is not supported by the catalog The following data cannot be displayed in the catalog or data view Data from the encrypted and password protected archives Data backed up to removable media such as CD DVD BD Iomega REV RDX or USB devices Da
312. lans and tasks p 221 2 Move the vault folder with all its content to a new place manually by means of a third party file manager 3 Create a new vault 4 Edit the backup plans and tasks redirect their destination to the new vault 5 Delete the old vault How can I merge two vaults Suppose you have two vaults A and B in use Both vaults are used by backup plans You decide to leave only vault B moving all the archives from vault A there To do this proceed as follows 150 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 1 Make sure that none of the backup plans uses vault A while merging or disable the given plans See Actions on backup plans and tasks p 221 2 Move the content of vault A folder to vault B manually by means of a third party file manager 3 Edit the backup plans that use vault A redirect their destination to vault B 4 In the vaults tree select vault B to check whether the archives are displayed If not click Refresh 5 Delete vault A 7 2 Acronis Secure Zone Acronis Secure Zone is a secure partition that enables keeping backup archives on a managed machine disk space and therefore recovery of a disk to the same disk where the backup resides Should the disk experience a physical failure the zone and the archives located there will be lost That s why Acronis Secure Zone should not be the only location where a backup is stored In enterprise environments Acronis Secure Zone can be tho
313. les from a disk backup p 208 3 Start the SharePoint services that were stopped earlier To recover a service database 1 Stop the services associated with the database you want to recover To do so a Open Central Administration site b Do any of the following For SharePoint 2010 select System Settings gt Manage services on server For SharePoint 2007 select Operations gt Services on server c To change the server on which you want to stop the service in the Server list click Change Server and then click the required server name d By default only configurable services are displayed To view all services in the View list click All e To stop a service click Stop in the Action column of the relevant service f Click OK to stop the service 2 Recover the database files as described in Recovering SQL Server database files from a disk backup p 208 3 Start the services associated with the database similarly to step 1 11 5 3 Recovering individual items Use one of the following two methods of recovering individual SharePoint items Attaching the content database to a non original SharePoint farm for example to a SharePoint recovery farm The method is available for SharePoint 2007 and SharePoint 2010 It is necessary to attach the content database to a non original SharePoint farm because each object in a farm must have a unique ID So you will not be able to attach the database to th
314. list of files and folders to exclude Specify the name of the file or folder such as Document txt The names are not case sensitive in Windows and Linux For example if you choose to exclude all tmp files and the Temp folders also excluded will be all Tmp files all TMP files and the TEMP folders You can use one or more wildcard characters and The asterisk substitutes for zero or more characters For example Doc txt covers files such as Doc txt and Document txt The question mark substitutes for exactly one character For example Doc txt covers files such as Doc1 txt and Docs txt but not the files Doc txt or Doc11 txt Exclusion examples Criterion Example Description By name F log F Excludes all files named F log Excludes all folders named F By mask log F Excludes all files with the log extension Excludes all files and folders with names starting with F such as folders F F1 and files F log F1 log By mask F log Excludes all log files with names consisting of four symbols and starting with F 5 1 5 When to recover Select when to start the recovery task Now the recovery task will be started immediately after you click OK on the Recover data page Later the recovery task will be started manually afterwards If you need to schedule the task clear the Task will be started manually check box and specify the required date and time
315. ll users that share this machine b Select the volume s containing the SQL Server database files For the instructions on how to find out the database paths refer to SQL Server database files p 200 c Choose the Read write access mode d Specify drive letters that will be assigned to the mounted volumes 5 After the volumes are mounted use instructions from the Attaching SQL Server databases p 210 section to attach the databases directly from the mounted volumes 6 Perform the required operations with the newly attached databases 7 After the necessary operations are completed detach the database from the instance by using Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio To do this right click the database and select Tasks gt Detach 8 Unmount the mounted volumes a In the main menu select Navigation gt Mounted images b Select the image and click Unmount Details When mounting an image in the Read write mode Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 creates a new incremental backup We strongly recommend deleting this incremental backup 210 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 11 2 3 Attaching SQL Server databases This section describes how to attach a database in SQL Server by using SQL Server Management Studio Only one database can be attached at a time Attaching a database requires any of the following permissions CREATE DATABASE CREATE ANY DATABASE or ALTER ANY DATABASE Normally these
316. llow the on screen instructions Step 2 Running Run Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 by selecting Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 from the Start menu For understanding of the GUI elements see Using the management console p 15 Step 3 Bootable media To be able to recover an operating system that fails to start or deploy it on bare metal create bootable media 1 Select Tools gt Create bootable media in the menu 2 Click Next in the welcome screen Keep clicking Next until the list of components appears 3 Proceed as described in Linux based bootable media p 172 Step 4 Backup Back up now p 34 Click Back up now to do a one time backup in a few simple steps The backup process will start immediately after you perform the required steps To save your machine to a file Under Where to back up click Location and select the location where the backup will be saved Click OK to confirm your selection Click OK at the bottom of the window to start the backup Tip Using the bootable media you can do off line cold backups in the same way as in the operating system Create backup plan p 34 15 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Create a backup plan if you need a long term backup strategy including backup schemes schedules and conditions timely deleting of backups or moving them to different locations Step 5 Recovery Recover p 101 To recover data you need to sel
317. llowing Use the task credentials The program will access the destination using the credentials of the task account specified in the Task parameters section Use the following credentials The program will access the destination using the credentials you specify Use this option if the task account does not have access permissions to the destination Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain 107 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Password The password for the account 2 Click OK 5 1 4 Where to recover Specify the destination the selected data will be recovered to 5 1 4 1 Selecting target disks Available disk or volume destinations depend on the agents operating on the machine Recover to Physical machine Available when the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Agent for Windows or Agent for Linux is installed The selected disks will be recovered to the physical disks of the machine the console is connected to On selecting this you proceed to the regular disk mapping procedure described below New virtual machine If Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Agent for Windows or Agent for Linux is installed The selected disks will be recovered to a new virtual machine of any of the following types VMware Workstation Microsoft Virtual PC Parallels Workstation Red
318. llowing Microsoft Windows operating systems are convertible that is allow changing the boot mode from BIOS to UEFI and back Windows Vista SP1 x64 and later Windows Server 2008 x64 SP1 and later Windows 7 x64 Windows Server 2008 R2 x64 All other operating systems are non convertible Source and target disk partition style MBR or GPT System and boot volumes of BIOS platforms use MBR disks System and boot volumes of UEFI platforms use GPT disks When selecting not initialized target disk for recovery this disk will be automatically initialized either to GPT or to MBR depending on the original disk partitioning style the current boot mode UEFI or BIOS and the type of operating systems convertible or non convertible that are located on this volume If the initialization may result in bootability loss the software takes the partitioning style from the source volume ignoring the target disk size In such cases the software can select the MBR partitioning style for disks whose size is more than 2 TB however the disk space beyond 2 TB will not be available for use If required you can initialize the target disk manually by using the Disk management p 182 functionality The following table summarizes whether it is possible to retain the system bootability when recovering boot and system volumes of a BIOS based system to UEFI based and back A green background means that the system will be bootable
319. lly if necessary Keep in mind though backups can be deleted from a subscription only by the machine to which the subscription is assigned In our example you have the following options Before reassigning Delete backups from Subscription 1 using Machine 1 if it is available and turned on Delete backups from Subscription 2 using Machine 2 After reassigning Delete backups from Subscription 1 using Machine 2 You cannot delete backups from Subscription 2 unless you assign this subscription to any machine 13 5 Configuring proxy settings If the machine connects to the Internet through a proxy server configure Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 to use the proxy server 1 Start Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 2 On the Options menu click Machine options 3 Click Online backup proxy 4 Enter the proxy server settings For detailed information about the settings please refer to the context sensitive help 258 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 13 6 Retrieving files from the online storage by using a Web browser By using a Web browser you can browse Acronis Online Backup Storage view contents of file level archives and download the selected files and folders The following browsers support these operations Internet Explorer 7 or later Mozilla Firefox 3 5 or later Google Chrome 10 or later Safari 5 0 5 or later To retrieve files from the online storage 1 Go t
320. ltiple files of the specified size This comes in handy when creating a backup that you plan to burn to multiple CDs or DVDs later on You might also want to split a backup into 2 GB files if you are backing up to a hard disk but you plan to manually copy the backup to an FTP server later 4 6 6 Compression level This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media 86 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 The option defines the level of compression applied to the data being backed up The preset is Normal The optimal data compression level depends on the type of data being backed up For example even maximum compression will not significantly reduce the archive size if the archive contains essentially compressed files such as jpg pdf or mp3 However formats such as doc or xls will be compressed well To specify the compression level Select one of the following None the data will be copied as is without any compression The resulting backup size will be maximal Normal recommended in most cases High the resulting backup size will typically be less than for the Normal level Maximum the data will be compressed as much as possible The backup duration will be maximal You may want to select maximum compression when backing up to removable media to reduce the number of blank disks required 4 6 7 Disaster recovery plan DRP This
321. lue DevicePath which can be found in the registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Microsoft Windows CurrentVersion This storage folder is usually WINDOWS inf Universal Restore settings Automatic driver search Specify where the program will search for the Hardware Abstraction Layer HAL HDD controller driver and network adapter driver s If the drivers are on a vendor s disc or other removable media turn on the Search removable media If the drivers are located in a networked folder or on the bootable media specify the path to the folder by clicking Add folder During recovery Universal Restore will perform the recursive search in all the sub folders of the specified folder find the most suitable HAL and HDD controller drivers of all those available and install them into the recovered system Universal Restore also searches for the network adapter driver the path to the found driver is then transmitted by Universal Restore to the operating system If the hardware has multiple network interface cards Universal Restore will try to configure all the cards drivers Mass storage drivers to install anyway To access this setting expand Show mass storage drivers to install anyway You need this setting if The target hardware has a specific mass storage controller such as RAID especially NVIDIA RAID or a fibre channel adapter You recover a system to a virtual machine that uses a SCSI hard drive controlle
322. lumes must also be recovered together otherwise there is a high risk that the operating system will not start 2 Create bootable media 3 If a system failure occurs boot the machine using the bootable media Start the console and connect to the bootable agent 4 Create a recovery task p 101 In What to recover make sure that the system disk or volume is selected for recovery Acronis Active Restore will choose for the boot up and subsequent recovery the first operating system found during the backup scan Do not try to recover more than one operating system using Active Restore if you want the result to be predictable When recovering a multi boot system choose only one system volume and boot volume at a time 5 In Where to recover make sure that the system disk or volume is mapped to the first disk If it is not map it manually as described in Selecting target disks p 107 6 In Acronis Active Restore select Use 7 Once the system recovery is started the operating system boots from the backup The Acronis Active Restore icon appears in the system tray The machine becomes operational and ready to provide necessary services The immediate user sees the drive tree and icons and can open files or launch applications even though they were not yet recovered The drivers of Acronis Active Restore intercept system queries and set the immediate priority for recovery of the files that are necessary to serve the incoming reque
323. m Steps to perform To export a backup plan 1 Select a backup plan in the Backup plans and tasks view 2 Click Export 3 Specify the path and name of the export file 4 Confirm your choice To import a backup plan 1 Click Import in the Backup plans and tasks view 2 Specify the path and name of the export file 3 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 will show the Edit backup plan page In most cases you need to update the plan s credentials and the access credentials for the backup destination Make the necessary changes and click Save Otherwise click Cancel and the plan will be imported as is 12 1 3 1 Editing the export file The export file is an xml file and can be edited with a text editor Here is how to make some useful changes 227 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 How to modify credentials In the export file the lt login gt tags include the user name and the lt password gt tags include the user password To modify credentials change the lt login gt and lt password gt tags in the corresponding sections plan s credentials the lt plan gt lt options gt lt common_parameters gt section access credentials for the backed up data the lt plan gt lt targets gt lt inclusions gt section access credentials for the backup destination the lt plan gt lt locations gt section Pay special attention to modifying the lt password gt tag The tag that conta
324. machine For example if the date format is year month day the value for January 31 2012 is 2012 01 31 Characters that are not supported in a file name such as slashes are replaced with underscores _ You can place this variable anywhere in the archive name You can use both lowercase and uppercase letters in this variable Examples Example 1 Suppose that you perform incremental backups twice a day at midnight and noon for two days starting on January 31 2012 The archive name is MyArchive DATE the date format is year month day Here is the list of backup files after day two MyArchive 2012 01 31 tib full created on January 31 at midnight MyArchive 2012 01 31 2 tib incremental created on January 31 at noon MyArchive 2012 02 01 tib full created on February 1 at midnight MyArchive 2012 02 01 2 tib incremental created on February 1 at noon Example 2 Suppose that you perform full backups with the same schedule archive name and date format as in the previous example Then the list of backup files after day two is the following MyArchive 2012 01 31 tib full created on January 31 at noon MyArchive 2012 02 01 tib full created on February 1 at noon This is because the full backups created at midnight were replaced by new full backups of the same day 56 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 4 3 2 Backup splitting and simplified file naming When a backup is split according
325. main controller runs under a domain user account but domain user accounts are unavailable in Directory Services Restore Mode 5 Start Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 and recover the database files from the backup If necessary also recover the SYSVOL folder Details For paths to these files and folders see Active Directory backup p 207 The recovery procedure is similar to the one described in Recovering Exchange Server database files p 210 6 If the domain has other domain controllers ensure that a USN rollback problem will not occur p 215 215 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 7 Restart the domain controller in normal mode Make sure that the Active Directory service has started successfully 8 Change the account for the Acronis service back to the original one similarly to step 4 11 4 4 Restoring accidentally deleted information If the domain has other domain controllers you can use the Ntdsutil tool to perform an authoritative restore of certain entries only For example you can restore an unintentionally deleted user account or computer account To restore accidentally deleted information 1 Perform steps 1 5 from Restoring the Active Directory database p 214 to restart the domain controller into Directory Services Restore Mode DSRM and to restore the Active Directory database 2 Without exiting DSRM run the following command Ntdsutil 3 At the tool s command
326. management server For more information about using data catalog see the Data catalog p 104 section 4 6 4 Backup performance Use this group of options to specify the amount of network and system resources to allocate to the backup process Backup performance options might have a more or less noticeable effect on the speed of the backup process This depends on the overall system configuration and the physical characteristics of devices the backup is being performed from or to 4 6 4 1 Backup priority This option is effective for both Windows and Linux operating systems The priority of a process running in a system determines the amount of CPU and system resources allocated to that process Decreasing the backup priority will free more resources for other applications Increasing the backup priority might speed up the backup process by requesting the operating system to allocate more resources like the CPU to the backup application However the resulting effect will depend on the overall CPU usage and other factors like disk in out speed or network traffic The preset is Low To specify the backup process priority Select one of the following Low to minimize resources taken by the backup process leaving more resources to other processes running on the machine 84 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Normal to run the backup process with normal speed allocating resources on a par with
327. mber October November 2 On lt All gt lt All workdays gt 3 Every 12 hours From 12 00 00 AM Until 12 00 00 PM 4 Effective From 11 01 2009 To not set Third schedule 1 Months June July August 2 Days 1 15 3 Once at 10 00 00 PM 4 Effective From 11 01 2009 To not set 4 4 4 At Windows Event Log event This type of schedule is effective only in Windows operating systems You can schedule a backup task to start when a certain Windows event has been recorded in one of the event logs such as the Application Security or System log For example you may want to set up a backup plan that will automatically perform an emergency full backup of your data as soon as Windows discovers that your hard disk drive is about to fail Parameters Log name Specifies the name of the log Select the name of a standard log Application Security or System from the list or type a log name for example Microsoft Office Sessions 67 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Event source Specifies the event source which typically indicates the program or the system component that caused the event for example disk Event type Specifies the event type Error Warning Information Audit success or Audit failure Event ID Specifies the event number which typically identifies the particular kind of events among events from the same source For example an Error event with Event sour
328. mic the target volume s data is overwritten with the backup content The type of target volume basic simple spanned striped mirrored RAID 0 1 RAID 5 will not change The target volume size has to be enough to accommodate the backup content Recovery to disk group unallocated space When recovering a dynamic volume to disk group unallocated space the software preserves the volume s original type and size If the disk group configuration does not allow for the original volume type the volume will be recovered as a simple or spanned volume If this volume does not fit the unallocated space the volume will be resized by decreasing its free space Examples of when the disk group configuration does not allow the original type of the volume Example 1 The group contains fewer disks than is required for the dynamic volume Assume you are going to recover an 80 GB RAID 5 volume that had resided on three disks to a disk group consisting of two disks The total size of unallocated space is 100 GB 40 GB on the first disk and 60 GB on the second The RAID 5 volume will be recovered as a spanned volume across two disks Example 2 Unallocated space distribution does not allow recovery of certain types of dynamic volumes Assume you are going to recover a 30 GB striped volume to a disk group consisting of two disks The total size of unallocated space is 50 GB 10 GB on the first disk and 40 GB on the second The striped volume will be recovered to the se
329. mmands that require user input for example pause 2 In the Working directory field specify a path to a directory where the command batch file will be executed 3 In the Arguments field specify the command s execution arguments if required 4 Depending on the result you want to obtain select the appropriate options as described in the table below 5 Click Test command to check if the command is correct Check box Selection Fail the task if the command execution fails Selected Cleared Selected Cleared Do not recover until the command execution is complete Selected Selected Cleared Cleared Result Preset Perform the recovery only after the command is successfully executed Fail the task if the command execution failed Perform the recovery after the command is executed despite execution failure or success N A Perform the recovery concurrently with the command execution and irrespective of the command execution result A command is considered failed if its exit code is not equal to zero 5 7 7 2 Post recovery command To specify a command executable file to be executed after the recovery is completed 1 In the Command field type a command or browse to a batch file 135 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 2 In the Working directory field specify a path to a directory where the command batch file will be executed 3 In the Arguments field specify
330. mum size is approximately 50MB depending on the geometry of the hard disk The maximum size is equal to the disk s unallocated space plus the total free space on all the volumes you have selected in the previous step If you have to take space from the boot or the system volume please bear the following in mind Moving or resizing of the volume from which the system is currently booted will require a reboot Taking all free space from a system volume may cause the operating system to work unstably and even fail to start Do not set the maximum zone size if the boot or the system volume is selected 7 2 1 3 Password for Acronis Secure Zone Setting up a password protects the Acronis Secure Zone from unauthorized access The program will ask for the password at any operation relating to the zone and the archives located there such as data backup and recovery validating archives resizing and deleting the zone To set up a password 1 Choose Use password 2 In the Enter the password field type a new password 3 In the Confirm the password field re type the password 4 Click OK To disable password 1 Choose Do not use 2 Click OK 152 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 7 2 1 4 Result confirmation The Result confirmation window displays the expected partition layout according to the settings you have chosen Click OK if you are satisfied with the layout and the Acronis Secure Zone creation will st
331. n After that you might be prompted for the password p 54 The plan you have created will be accessible for examination and managing in the Backup plans and tasks p 221 view 4 2 1 Selecting data to back up To select the data to back up 1 In the Data to back up section select the type of data you want to be backed up The list of available data types depends on the agents running on the machine and the types of licenses Disks volumes Available if Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Agent for Windows or Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Agent for Linux is installed Select this option to back up entire physical machine or its individual disks or volumes To be able to back up this data you must have Administrator or Backup operator privileges A disk level backup enables you to recover the entire system in case of severe data damage or hardware failure Also you can individually recover files and folders The backup procedure is faster than copying files and may significantly speed up the backup process when backing up large volumes of data Folders files 37 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Available if Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Agent for Windows or Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Agent for Linux is installed Select this option to back up specific files and folders A file level backup is not sufficient for recovery of the operating system Choose file backup if you plan to keep safe only
332. n 1 3 6 1 4 1 24769 100 200 2 0 I0064000B Supported operations Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 supports only TRAP operations It is not possible to manage Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 using GET and SET requests This means that you need to use an SNMP Trap receiver to receive TRAP messages About the management information base MIB The MIB file acronis abr mib is located in the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 installation directory By default ProgramFiles Acronis BackupAndRecovery in Windows and usr lib Acronis BackupAndRecovery in Linux This file can be read by a MIB browser or a simple text editor such as Notepad or vi About the test message When configuring SNMP notifications you can send a test message to check if your settings are correct The parameters of the test message are as follows Type of event OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 24769 100 200 1 0 Value Unknown Text description of the event OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 24769 100 200 2 0 Value 00000000 34 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 4 Backup 4 1 Back up now Use the Back up now feature to configure and run a one time backup in a few simple steps The backup process will start immediately after you perform the required steps and click OK For a long time backup strategy that includes schedules and conditions timely deleting of backups or moving them to different locations consider creating a backup plan Configuring
333. n you will be able to back up data to the online storage for five days following the expiration date You will be able to recover data from the online storage for 30 days following the expiration date 13 1 8 5 How do I renew a subscription Buy another subscription and specify it as the next subscription of the same machine The new subscription will be activated as soon as the current subscription expires 253 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 An expired subscription can be renewed within five days after expiration In such cases the new subscription will be activated immediately Renewing a single subscription To renew a subscription 1 Go to the account management Web page 2 Make sure that you have an available subscription of the same type with the same or larger storage quota Example To renew the Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online Workstation 250GB subscription you need either Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online Workstation 250GB subscription or Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online Workstation 500GB subscription 3 Select the machine that you want to renew the subscription for and then click Renew The subscription appears in the Next subscription column for the selected machine Renewing a number of activated subscriptions at once This operation is possible if the appropriate number of new subscriptions are identical to the currently used subscriptions Make sure the new subscriptions are av
334. n Windows Volumes that do not have drive letters in Windows such as the System Reserved volume are assigned free letters in order of their sequence on the disk If the bootable media cannot detect Windows on the machine or detects more than one of them all volumes including those without drive letters are assigned letters in order of their sequence on the disk This way the volume letters may differ from those seen in Windows For example the D drive under the bootable media might correspond to the E drive in Windows Be careful To be on the safe side it is advisable to assign unique names to the volumes 2 The Linux style bootable media shows local disks and volumes as unmounted sda1 sda2 3 Backups created using bootable media have simplified file names p 54 Standard names are assigned to the backups only if these are added to an existing archive with standard file naming or if the destination does not support simplified file names 4 The Linux style bootable media cannot write a backup to an NTFS formatted volume Switch to the Windows style if you need to do so 5 You can switch the bootable media between the Windows style and the Linux style by selecting Tools gt Change volume representation 6 There is no Navigation tree in the media GUI Use the Navigation menu item to navigate between views 7 Tasks cannot be scheduled in fact tasks are not created at all If you need to repeat the operation
335. n for the last several days weekly resolution for the last several weeks and monthly resolution for any time in the past For more information please refer to GFS backup scheme I Image The same as Disk backup p 268 Incremental backup A backup p 263 that stores changes to the data against the latest backup You need access to other backups from the same archive p 263 to recover data from an incremental backup Indexing An activity p 263 performed by a storage node p 274 after a backup p 263 has been saved to a deduplicating vault p 267 During indexing the storage node performs the following operations Moves data blocks from the backup to a special file within the vault This file is called the deduplication data store In the backup replaces the moved blocks with their fingerprints hashes Saves the hashes and the links that are necessary to assemble the deduplicated data to the deduplication database Indexing can be thought of as deduplication at target as opposed to deduplication at source which is performed by the agent p 263 during the backup operation p 263 A user can suspend and resume indexing L Local backup plan A backup plan p 264 created on a managed machine p 272 using direct management p 267 Local task A task p 274 created on a managed machine p 272 using direct management p 267 Logical volume This term has two me
336. n manage logs by using the following methods Transaction log truncation Log truncation frees inactive virtual log files that contain only inactive log records for reuse by new log records Truncation may prevent a physical log file from growing but does not reduce its size For more information about truncation refer to the following article http technet microsoft com en us library ms189085 v sql 105 Log file shrinking Log file shrinking reduces the physical size of a log file by removing the inactive virtual log files Shrinking is most effective after log truncation For more information about shrinking refer to the following article http technet microsoft com en us library ms178037 v sql 105 Log truncation by using SQL Server Management Studio When you switch a database to the Simple Recovery Model transaction logs are truncated automatically 1 To switch the database to the Simple Recovery Model a Run Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio and connect to the instance b Right click the database and then click Properties This will open the Database Properties dialog box c In the Select a page pane click Options 204 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 d In the Recovery Model list box select the Simple model list 2 The transaction log files will automatically be truncated 3 Switch the database back to the Full or Bulk logged recovery model in the same manner as in step 1
337. n offline until the log files are purged from the disk Using circular logging is not a best practice for a production environment When circular logging is enabled Exchange overwrites the first log file after its data has been committed to the database and you can recover data only up until the last backup We recommend that you delete the log files after backing up an Exchange server because log files are backed up along with other files Therefore after a recovery you will be able to roll the database back or forward For more information about transaction logging see http technet microsoft com en us library bb331958 aspx Log truncation of offline databases This is the easiest way of deleting log files After normal shutdown the database state is considered consistent and the database files are self contained This means that you can delete all the log files of the database or the storage group To delete transaction log files 1 Dismount the database in Exchange 2010 or all databases of the storage group in Exchange 2003 2007 For more information see Exchange 2010 http technet microsoft com en us library bb123903 Exchange 2007 http technet microsoft com en us library bb124936 v exchg 80 Exchange 2003 http technet microsoft com en us library aa996179 v exchg 65 2 Delete all the log files of the database or the storage group 3 Mount the dismounted database or databases For more informati
338. n the Fixed drive mode You select the removable device mode when creating a backup plan Backups that were copied or moved to the next location do not depend on the backups remaining in the original location and vice versa You can recover data from any backup without access to other locations Restrictions Copying or moving backups to and from optical discs CD DVD Blu ray discs is not supported Copying or moving backups to and from removable devices used in the Removable media mode is not supported Acronis Online Backup Storage can only be the final location Further copying or moving backups from it is not possible You cannot specify the same location more than once For example you cannot move a backup from one folder to another and then back to the original folder 4 5 2 Setting up replication of backups Setting up replication of backups is available when creating a backup plan p 34 To set up replication from the primary location select the Replicate just created backup to another location check box To set up replication from the second or a further location select the Replicate backups to another location as soon as they appear in this location check box Next select the location where to replicate the backups A backup is replicated to the next location as soon as it appears in the previous location 74 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 If allowed by the b
339. nance or home user Finance Excludes the folder directory home user Finance 4 2 4 Backup location selection Specify where the archive will be stored 1 Selecting the destination In the Path field enter the full path to the destination or select the desired destination in the location tree as described in Selecting backup destinations p 40 2 Using the archives table To assist you with choosing the right destination the table displays the names of the archives contained in each location you select While you are reviewing the location content archives can be added deleted or modified by another user or by the program itself according to scheduled operations Use the Refresh button to refresh the list of archives 3 Naming the new archive Once you select the archive destination the program generates a name for the new archive and displays it in the Name field The name commonly looks like Archive N where N is a sequence number The generated name is unique within the selected location If you are satisfied with the automatically generated name click OK Otherwise enter another unique name 40 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Backing up to an existing archive You can configure the backup plan to back up to an existing archive To do so select the archive in the archives table or type the archive name in the Name field If the archive is protected with a password the program will ask for i
340. national GmbH 2002 2012 Only if the console is connected to the management server You can select the machine that will perform recovery This can be any registered machine where Agent for Windows or Agent for Linux is installed 3 Click OK to return to the Recover data page 6 2 3 3 Virtual machine settings The following virtual machine settings can be configured Disks Initial setting the number and size of the source machine s disks The number of disks is generally equal to that of the source machine It might be different if the software has to add more disks to accommodate the source machine volumes because of limitations set by the virtualization product You can add virtual disks to the machine configuration or in some cases delete the proposed disks When adding a new virtual disk along with interface and capacity you can specify its format Thin format The disk occupies as much storage space as the data it stores This saves the storage space To enable thin format select the Thin provisioning for ESX or Dynamically expanding disk for Hyper V check box Thick format The disk occupies all the provisioned storage space This improves the virtual machine performance To use thick format clear the Thin provisioning for ESX or Dynamically expanding disk for Hyper V check box The default setting is thick format if a physical machine was backed up When recovering from a virtual machine backup
341. ndwidth it can get when transferring the backup data Use this option to reserve a part of the network bandwidth for other network activities The preset is Maximum To set the network connection speed for backup Do any of the following Click Transferring speed stated as a percentage of the estimated maximum speed of the network connection and then drag the slider or type a percentage in the box Click Transferring speed stated in kilobytes per second and then enter the bandwidth limit for transferring backup data in kilobytes per second 4 6 5 Backup splitting This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media 85 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 This option is not effective when the backup destination is a managed vault or Acronis Online Backup Storage The option defines how a backup can be split The preset is Automatic The following settings are available Automatic With this setting Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 will act as follows When backing up to a hard disk or a network share A single backup file will be created if the destination disk s file system allows the estimated file size The backup will automatically be split into several files if the destination disk s file system does not allow the estimated file size This might be the case when the backup is placed on FAT16 and FAT32 file systems that have a 4 GB file size limit If
342. ng backup and only if there is not enough space to create a new backup In this case the software will act as follows Delete the oldest full backup with all dependent incremental differential backups If there is only one full backup left and a full backup is in progress then delete the last full backup with all dependent incremental differential backups If there is only one full backup left and an incremental or differential backup is in progress an error occurs saying there is a lack of available space This setting is recommended when backing up to a USB drive or Acronis Secure Zone This setting is not applicable to FTP and SFTP servers This setting enables deletion of the last backup in the archive in case your storage device cannot accommodate more than one backup However you might end up with no backups if the program is not able to create the new backup for some reason Apply retention rules only if the retention rules are set Specifies when to apply the retention rules p 75 For example the cleanup procedure can be set up to run after each backup and also on schedule This option is available only if you have set at least one retention rule in Retention rules Cleanup schedule only if On schedule is selected Specifies a schedule for archive cleanup For example the cleanup can be scheduled to start on the last day of each month This option is available only if you selected
343. nology Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 will boot the machine into the operating system found in the backup as if the system were on the physical disk The system becomes operational and ready to provide necessary services Thus the system downtime will be minimal A dynamic volume can be recovered over an existing volume to unallocated space of a disk group or to unallocated space of a basic disk To learn more about recovering dynamic volumes please turn to the Backup and recovery of dynamic volumes Windows p 29 section Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Agent for Windows has the ability to recover a disk volume backup to a new virtual machine See the Recovery to the New virtual machine destination p 141 section for more details You might need to prepare target disks before recovery Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 includes a handy disk management utility which enables you to create or delete volumes change a disk partitioning style create a disk group and perform other disk management operations on the target hardware both under the operating system and on bare metal To find out more about Acronis Disk Director LV see Disk management p 182 5 1 Creating a recovery task To create a recovery task perform the following steps What to recover Select data p 103 Select data to recover Access credentials p 106 Optional Provide credentials for the archive location if the task account does not
344. nt from a Microsoft SharePoint server backup In this case you can temporarily mount a backed up volume to the application server file system and use the native tools of the application to extract the item 11 1 Backing up an application server To protect an application server create a backup plan or use the Backup now feature as described in the Backup p 34 section Applications that use databases require a few simple measures to ensure the application data consistency within a disk backup Back up entire machines Databases may be stored on more than one disk or volume To ensure that all necessary files are included in a backup back up the entire machine This also ensures that the application will remain protected if you add more databases or relocate the log files in the future If you are sure that the databases and their associated files are always on the same volumes you may want to back up only these volumes Or you may want to create separate backup plans for the system volume and for the volumes that store the data In both cases make sure that all of the volumes containing the necessary files are included in the backup For instructions on how to find out the database paths refer to Locating database files p 200 199 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 If the application databases are located on a number of machines back up all of the machines on the same schedule For example include all of the
345. nt log folder in Windows XP 2003 Server ALLUSERSPROFILE Application Data Acronis BackupAndRecovery MMS LogEvents in Linux var lib Acronis BackupAndRecovery MMS LogEvents The preset is Maximum log size 50 MB On cleanup keep 95 of the maximum log size When the option is enabled the program compares the actual log size with the maximum size after every 100 log entries Once the maximum log size is exceeded the program deletes the oldest log entries You can select the amount of log entries to retain The default 95 setting will keep most of the log With the minimum 1 setting the log will be nearly cleared This parameter can also be set by using Acronis Administrative Template 12 6 7 Online backup proxy This option is effective only for backup to and recovery from Acronis Online Backup Storage over the Internet This option defines whether the Acronis agent will connect to the Internet through a proxy server Note Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online supports only HTTP and HTTPS proxy servers To set up proxy server settings 1 Select the Use a proxy server check box 2 In Address specify the network name or IP address of the proxy server for example proxy example com or 192 168 0 1 3 In Port specify the port number of the proxy server for example 80 4 If the proxy server requires authentication specify the credentials in User name and Password 5 To test the proxy server settings click Test connection
346. nts to be sent All events Errors and warnings or Errors only Server name IP type the name or IP address of the host running the SNMP management application the messages will be sent to Community type the name of SNMP community to which both the host running SNMP management application and the sending machine belong The typical community is public Click Send test message to check if the settings are correct 131 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Do not send SNMP notifications to disable sending the log events of the recovery operations to SNMP managers 5 7 3 2 Windows event log This option is effective only in Windows operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media This option defines whether the agent s operating on the managed machine have to log events of the recovery operations in the Application Event Log of Windows to see this log run eventvwr exe or select Control Panel gt Administrative tools gt Event Viewer You can filter the events to be logged The preset is Use the setting set in the Machine options To select whether to log the recovery operations events in the Application Event Log of Windows Select one of the following Use the setting set in the Machine options to use the setting specified for the machine For more information refer to Machine options Log the following event types to
347. nu The following is a guideline for you to perform operations with backups To Do View backup content in Click View content 168 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 a separate window In the Backup Content window examine the backup content Recover Click Recover The Recover data p 101 page will be opened with the pre selected backup as a source Convert a disk volume backup to a virtual machine Right click the disk backup then select Convert to VM The Recover data p 101 page will be opened with the pre selected backup as a source Select the location and the type of new virtual machine and then proceed as with regular disk or volume recovery Validate a backup Click Validate The Validation p 155 page will be opened with the pre selected backup as a source Validation of a file backup imitates recovering of all files from the backup to a dummy destination Validation of a disk backup calculates a checksum for every data block saved in the backup Export a backup Click Export The Export p 158 page will be opened with the pre selected backup as a source The export of a backup creates a new archive with a self sufficient copy of the backup in the location you specify Convert a backup to full Click Convert to full backup to replace the incremental or differential backup with a full backup for the same point in time See Converting a backup to full p 168 for more inform
348. o the account management Web page p 252 and click Retrieve files from the online storage You will see the list of the machines backed up by using the specified account 2 Click the name of the machine whose data you want to retrieve The software displays both file level and disk level archives of this machine s data Note for users of the Initial Seeding p 51 service While an initial seeding backup is being uploaded from your hard drive to Acronis Online Backup Storage the backup is visible but its data is not retrievable 3 Click the required file level archive If prompted enter the archive password The software displays all of files and folders that were ever backed up to this archive 4 If necessary browse to the required folder or use search to obtain the list of the required files and folders Details The search string can contain one or more wildcard characters and 5 Do one of the following To get the latest version of a single file or folder simply click its name To get the latest versions of multiple files and folders select the check boxes to the left of them and click the green Recover button To get an earlier version of a single file or folder click the icon to the right of it and choose View versions This opens a window with the version list In this window select the required version by its date and time and click Recover Not available if you used search To get ea
349. o the task First schedule 1 Every 1 week s on Mon Fri 2 Every 9 hours From 12 00 00 PM Until 09 00 00 PM 3 Effective From not set To not set Second schedule 1 Every 1 week s on Tue Wed Thu 2 Every 3 hours From 09 00 00 AM until 09 00 00 PM 3 Effective From not set To not set Third schedule 1 Every 1 week s on Sat Sun 2 Once at 09 00 00 PM 3 Effective From not set To not set 4 4 3 Monthly schedule Monthly schedule is effective in Windows and Linux operating systems To specify a monthly schedule In the Schedule area select the appropriate parameter as follows Months lt gt Select a certain month s you want to run the task in Days lt gt Select specific days of the month to run the task on You can also select the last day of the month irrespective of its actual date On lt gt lt gt Select specific days of the weeks to run the task on In the During the day execute the task area select one of the following Once at lt gt Set up the time at which the task will be run once Every lt gt From lt gt Until lt gt Set up how many times the task will be run during the specified time interval For example setting the task frequency to Every 1 hour From 10 00 00 AM until 10 00 00 PM allows the task to be run 12 times from 10 AM to 10 PM during one day In the Effective area set the f
350. ocedure The following scheme illustrates when pre post commands are executed 94 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Pre backup command Backup Post backup command Examples of how you can use the pre post commands Delete some temporary files from the disk before starting backup Configure a third party antivirus product to be started each time before the backup starts Copy an archive to another location after the backup ends The program does not support interactive commands i e commands that require user input for example pause To specify pre post commands 1 Enable pre post commands execution by checking the following options Execute before the backup Execute after the backup 2 Do any of the following Click Edit to specify a new command or a batch file Select the existing command or the batch file from the drop down list 3 Click OK 4 6 17 1 Pre backup command To specify a command batch file to be executed before the backup process starts 1 In the Command field type a command or browse to a batch file The program does not support interactive commands i e commands that require user input for example pause 2 In the Working directory field specify a path to a directory where the command batch file will be executed 3 In the Arguments field specify the command s execution arguments if required 4 Depending on the result yo
351. oes not require authentication leave the User name and Password fields blank If you are not sure whether the SMTP server requires authentication contact your network administrator or your e mail service provider for assistance 9 Click Additional e mail parameters to configure additional e mail parameters as follows a From type the name of the sender If you leave this field empty the messages will contain the sender s e mail account in the From field 93 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 b Use encryption you can opt for encrypted connection to the mail server SSL and TLS encryption types are available for selection c Some Internet service providers require authentication on the incoming mail server before being allowed to send something If this is your case select the Log on to incoming mail server check box to enable a POP server and to set up its settings Incoming mail server POP enter the name of the POP server Port set the port of the POP server By default the port is set to 110 User name and Password of the incoming mail server d Click OK 10 Click Send test e mail message to check whether e mail notifications work correctly with the specified settings 4 6 16 2 Messenger service WinPopup This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems on the sending machine and only for Windows on the receiving machine This option is no
352. off of the machine or accidental pressing of the Reset button during the procedure could result in bootability loss In contrast to Windows Disk Manager the program ensures 190 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 safe conversion of a dynamic disk to basic when it contains volumes with data for simple and mirrored volumes in multiboot systems bootability of a system that was offline during the operation 10 6 7 Changing disk status Changing disk status is effective for Windows Vista SP1 Windows Server 2008 Windows 7 operating systems and applies to the current disk layout p 183 One of the following disk statuses always appears in the graphical view of the disk next to the disk s name Online The online status means that a disk is accessible in the read write mode This is the normal disk status If you need a disk to be accessible in the read only mode select the disk and then change its status to offline by selecting Change disk status to offline from the Operations menu Offline The offline status means that a disk is accessible in the read only mode To bring the selected offline disk back to online select Change disk status to online from the Operations menu If the disk has the offline status and the disk s name is Missing this means that the disk cannot be located or identified by the operating system It may be corrupted disconnected or powered off For information on how to bring a
353. ollowing settings 65 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 From lt gt Set up a date when this schedule will be enabled an effective date If this check box is cleared the task will be started on the nearest day and time you have specified above To lt gt Set up a date when this schedule will be disabled If this check box is cleared the task will be run for an indefinite number of months All the settings you made are displayed in the Result field at the bottom of the window Examples Last day of every month schedule Run the task once at 10 PM on the last day of every month The schedule s parameters are set up as follows 1 Months lt All months gt 2 Days Last The task will run on the last day of every month despite its actual date 3 Once at 10 00 00 PM 4 Effective From empty To empty This schedule is widely used when creating a custom backup scheme The Last day of every month schedule is added to the full backups while the differential backups are scheduled to be performed once a week and incremental on workdays For more details see the Monthly full weekly differential and daily incremental backups plus cleanup example in the Custom backup scheme p 46 section Season schedule Run the task on all workdays during the northern autumn seasons of 2009 and 2010 During a workday the task is performed every 6 hours from 12 AM midnight till 6 PM The schedul
354. on see Exchange 2010 http technet microsoft com en us library bb123587 aspx Exchange 2007 http technet microsoft com en us library aa998871 v exchg 80 aspx Exchange 2003 http technet microsoft com en us library aa995829 v exchg 65 Log truncation of online databases This method is good for the databases that are in constant use and cannot be dismounted If a database is in use you can safely delete only those transaction log files whose data has been committed to the database Do not delete log files whose data has not been committed to the database they are essential to recover the database consistency from unexpected shutdown To delete the committed transaction logs 1 Determine which logs have been committed to the database by using the Eseutil tool 206 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 a Execute the eseutil mk lt path to checkpoint file gt command where the lt path to checkpoint file gt is a path to the checkpoint file of the required database or the storage group b Look at the Checkpoint field in the output For example you should see something like this CheckPoint 0x60B 7DF 1C9 The first number 0x60B is the hexadecimal log generation number of the current log file This means that all the log files with lesser numbers have been committed to the database 2 Delete all the log files whose numbers are less than the number of the current log file For example
355. on the specific machine and put in this specific location by this specific backup plan In Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 such set of backups is called an archive To set up retention rules for backups 1 Specify one of the following options a and b are mutually exclusive a Backups older than and or Archive size greater than A backup will be stored until the specified condition or both of the conditions are met Example Backups older than 5 days Archive size greater than 100 GB With these settings a backup will be stored until it is older than five days and the size of the archive containing it exceeds 100 GB b Number of backups in the archive exceeds If the number of backups exceeds the specified value one or more of the oldest backups will be moved or deleted The minimal setting is 1 2 Select whether to delete the backups or to move them to another location if the specified conditions are met You will be able to specify the location where to move the backups and set up retention rules for that location after you click OK Deleting the last backup in the archive The retention rules are effective if the archive contains more than one backup This means that the last backup in the archive will be kept even if a retention rule violation is detected Please do not try to delete the only backup you have by applying the retention rules before backup This will not work Use the alternative setting Clean
356. onal GmbH 2002 2012 Plan parameters Plan name Optional Enter a unique name for the backup plan A conscious name lets you identify the plan among others Backup options Optional Configure parameters of the backup operation such as pre post backup commands maximum network bandwidth allocated for the backup stream or the backup archive compression level If you do nothing in this section the default values p 78 will be used After any of the settings is changed against the default value a new line that displays the newly set value appears The setting status changes from Default to Reset to default Should you modify the setting again the line will display the new value unless the new value is the default one When the default value is set the line disappears Therefore in this section you always see only the settings that differ from the default values To reset all the settings to the default values click Reset to default Plan s credentials comments label To access these settings click Show plan s credentials comments label Plan s credentials p 52 Optional Specify the credentials under which the plan will run Comments Optional Type a description of the backup plan Label p 52 Optional Type a text label for the machine you are going to back up The label can be used to identify the machine in various scenarios After you have performed all the required steps click OK to create the backup pla
357. onality is not available You can try the user interface but there is no option to commit the changes The recovery functionality is available but the backup functionality is not To try the backup functionality install the software in the operating system Upgrading from trial to full product version To upgrade from the trial version to the standard product you do not need to re download the software When the trial period is over the product GUI displays a notification requesting you to specify a standard license key To specify the standard license key use the Change License p 234 window in the management console Specifying the standard key by running the setup program is not possible 1 4 Supported file systems Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 can back up and recover the following file systems with the following limitations FAT16 32 NTFS Ext2 Ext3 Ext4 ReiserFS3 particular files cannot be recovered from disk backups located on Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Storage Node ReiserFS4 volume recovery without the volume resize capability particular files cannot be recovered from disk backups located on Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Storage Node XFS volume recovery without the volume resize capability particular files cannot be recovered from disk backups located on Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Storage Node JFS particular files cannot be recovered from di
358. onging to a GPT disk to convert will be a logical one after the operation and is irreversible 3 By clicking OK you ll add a pending operation of GPT to MBR disk conversion To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 197 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them 10 6 5 Disk conversion basic to dynamic You would want to convert a basic disk to dynamic in the following cases If you plan to use the disk as part of a dynamic disk group If you want to achieve additional disk reliability for data storage If you need to convert a basic disk to dynamic 1 Select the basic disk to convert to dynamic 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Convert to dynamic in the context menu You will receive a final warning about the basic disk being converted to dynamic 3 If you click OK in this warning window the conversion will be performed immediately and if necessary your machine will be restarted Please note A dynamic disk occupies the last megabyte of the physical disk to store the database including the four level description Volume Component Partition Disk for each dynamic volume If during the conversion to dynamic it turns out that the basic disk is full and the size of its volumes cannot be decreased automatically the basic disk to dynamic conversion operation will fail Should you decide to revert your dynamic disks back to basic
359. onis Startup Recovery Manager to appear and hit F11 The program will start and you can perform recovery You can also back up using Acronis Startup Recovery Manager while on the move On machines with the GRUB boot loader installed you select the Acronis Startup Recovery Manager from the boot menu instead of pressing F11 Activate Activation enables the boot time prompt Press F11 for Acronis Startup Recovery Manager if you do not have the GRUB boot loader or adds the Acronis Startup Recovery Manager item to GRUB s menu if you have GRUB The system disk or the boot partition in Linux should have at least 100 MB of free space to activate Acronis Startup Recovery Manager Unless you use the GRUB boot loader and it is installed in the Master Boot Record MBR Acronis Startup Recovery Manager activation overwrites the MBR with its own boot code Thus you may need to reactivate third party boot loaders if they are installed Under Linux when using a boot loader other than GRUB such as LILO consider installing it to a Linux root or boot partition boot record instead of the MBR before activating Acronis Startup Recovery Manager Otherwise reconfigure the boot loader manually after the activation Do not activate Disables boot time prompt Press F11 for Acronis Startup Recovery Manager or the menu item in GRUB If Acronis Startup Recovery Manager is not activated you will need one of the following to recover
360. ons include 200 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 1 Truncating the logs manually or by using a script 2 For Microsoft SQL Server temporary switching to Simple Recovery Model 3 For Microsoft Exchange Server using the dedicated Agent for Microsoft Exchange Server For more information about the available solutions see Truncating transaction logs p 203 Application specific recommendations See Best practices when backing up application servers p 206 11 1 1 Locating database files This section describes how to find application database files We recommend that you find out the database file paths and store them in a safe place This will save you time and effort when you will recover the application data 11 1 1 1 SQL Server database files SQL Server databases have three types of files Primary data files have the mdf extension by default Every database has one primary data file Secondary data files have the ndf extension by default Secondary data files are optional Some databases may not have them at all while other databases may have several secondary data files Log files have the ldf extension by default Every database has a least one log file Make sure that all of the volumes containing the above files are included in the backup For example if your databases are located in C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL 1 MSSQL Data and log files are locat
361. ons of the online storage 258 13 8 Terminology reference 259 14 Glossary 262 10 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 1 Introducing Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 1 1 What s new in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 The following is a summary of the product s new features and enhancements Support for various types of storage Acronis Online Backup Storage Replicating or moving backups to Acronis Online Backup Storage p 77 The Grandfather Father Son and Tower of Hanoi backup schemes are now available when backing up to Acronis Online Backup Storage Bootable media New Linux kernel version 3 4 5 in Linux based bootable media The new kernel makes for better hardware support Usability Support for 800x600 screen resolution 1 2 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 components This section contains a list of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 components with a brief description of their functionality Components for a managed machine agents These are applications that perform data backup recovery and other operations on the machines managed with Acronis Backup am
362. onsiderably larger than usual because defragmentation changes file locations on the disk and the backup reflects these changes It is recommended that you re create a full backup after disk defragmentation The following table summarizes the advantages and shortcomings of each backup type as they appear based on common knowledge In real life these parameters depend on numerous factors such as the amount speed and pattern of data changes the nature of the data the physical specifications of the devices the backup recovery options you set to name a few Practice is the best guide to selecting the optimal backup scheme Parameter Full backup Differential backup Incremental backup Storage space Maximal Medium Minimal Creation time Maximal Medium Minimal Recovery time Minimal Medium Maximal 3 6 What does a disk or volume backup store A disk or volume backup stores a disk or a volume file system as a whole and includes all of the information necessary for the operating system to boot It is possible to recover disks or volumes as a whole from such backups as well as individual folders or files Windows A volume backup stores all files and folders of the selected volume independent of their attributes including hidden and system files the boot record the file allocation table FAT if it exists the root and the zero track of the hard disk with the master boot record MBR A disk backup stores all volumes of the selecte
363. ontroller we recommend creating a backup at least daily Your most up to date backup is no older than half the tombstone lifetime Depending on the operating system where your domain has been created the default tombstone lifetime is 60 days or 180 days It does not matter whether the latest backup is full or incremental you can perform a successful recovery from either one You create an additional backup upon any of the following events The Active Directory database and or transaction logs were moved to a different location An operating system on the domain controller was upgraded or a service pack was installed A hotfix that changes the Active Directory database was installed 208 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 The tombstone lifetime was changed administratively The reason for this additional backup is that a successful recovery of Active Directory from the previous backups might not be possible 11 1 3 3 SharePoint data backup A Microsoft SharePoint farm consists of front end Web servers and Microsoft SQL servers A front end Web server is a host where SharePoint services are running Some front end Web servers may be identical to each other for example the front end Web servers that run a Web server You do not have to back up all identical front end Web servers but only unique ones To protect SharePoint databases you need to back up all of the Microsoft SQL serve
364. onvert an MBR basic disk to a GPT basic disk in the following cases If you need more than 4 primary volumes on one disk If you need additional disk reliability against any possible data damage If you need to convert a basic MBR disk to basic GPT 1 Select a basic MBR disk to convert to GPT 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Convert to GPT in the context menu You will receive a warning window stating that you are about to convert MBR into GPT 3 By clicking OK you ll add a pending operation of MBR to GPT disk conversion To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 197 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them Please note A GPT partitioned disk reserves the space in the end of the partitioned area necessary for the backup area which stores copies of the GPT header and the partition table If the disk is full and the volume size cannot be automatically decreased the conversion operation of the MBR disk to GPT will fail The operation is irreversible If you have a primary volume belonging to an MBR disk and convert the disk first to GPT and then back to MBR the volume will be logical and will not be able to be used as a system volume If you plan to install an OS that does not support GPT disks the reverse conversion of the disk to MBR is also possible through the same menu items the name of the operation will be listed as Convert
365. ootable media with this functionality Universal Restore handles differences in devices that are critical for the operating system start up such as storage controllers motherboard or chipset 1 2 2 Management Console Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Management Console is an administrative tool for local access to Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 agent Remote connection to the agent is not possible 1 2 3 Bootable Media Builder Acronis Bootable Media Builder is a dedicated tool for creating bootable media p 265 The media builder that installs on Windows can create bootable media based on either Windows Preinstallation Environment or Linux kernel The Universal Restore p 11 add on enables you to create bootable media with the restore to dissimilar hardware functionality Universal Restore handles differences in devices that are critical for Windows start up such as storage controllers motherboard or chipset 12 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 1 3 About the trial product version Before buying an Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 license you may want to try the software The trial key required at installation can be obtained on the Acronis Web site Limitations of the trial version The Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 trial version has the following limitation The Universal Restore functionality is disabled Additional limitations for bootable media The disk management functi
366. option is effective for Windows and Linux but is not applicable to bootable media Disaster recovery plan DRP contains a list of backed up data items and detailed instructions that guide a user through a process of recovering these items from a backup If the Disaster recovery plan DRP option is enabled a DRP is created and sent by e mail to the specified list of users after the first successful backup performed by the backup plan The DRP will be created and sent again after the first successful backup in the following cases The backup plan has been edited so that the DRP parameters changed The backup contains new data items or does not contain items previously backed up This does not apply to such data items as files or folders If multiple machines are protected by a backup plan then a separate DRP is sent for each machine DRP and post backup commands Note that the DRP will not automatically change if post backup commands in your backup plan copy or move the backups from the original location The DRP points only to the locations specified in the backup plan Adding information to a DRP template You can append additional information to a DRP template if you are well familiar with XML and HTML The default paths to the DRP template are ProgramFiles Acronis BackupAndRecovery drp xsl in 32 bit Windows ProgramFiles x86 Acronis BackupAndRecovery drp xsl in 64 bit Windows usr lib Acronis B
367. or connected the console by clicking Manage this machine You are backing up a Microsoft Exchange cluster to a storage node Specifying the credentials explicitly You have the option to explicitly specify a user account under which the backup plan will run To do this on the backup plan creation page 1 In the Plan parameters section click Show plan s credentials comments label 2 Click Plan s credentials 3 Enter the credentials under which the plan will run When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain In Linux You do not need to specify backup plan s credentials In Linux backup plans always run under the root user account Task credentials Like a backup plan any task runs on behalf of a user In Windows When creating a task you have the option to explicitly specify an account under which the task will run Your choice depends on whether the task is intended for manual start or for executing on schedule Manual start Every time you manually start the task the task will run under the credentials with which you are currently logged on Any person that has administrative privileges on the machine can also start the task The task will run under this person s credentials The task will always run under the same credentials regardless of the user who actually starts the task if you specify the task credentials explic
368. ored in the file etc Acronis MMS config To change the path edit the usr lib Acronis BackupAndRecovery import value in the following tag lt key name Import gt lt value name FolderPath type TString gt usr lib Acronis BackupAndRecovery import lt value gt lt key gt The change will be applied after a restart of the agent To restart the agent run the following command as the root user etc init d acronis_mms restart The absence of the tag means that the agent does not monitor the dedicated folder 12 1 5 Backup plan details The Backup plan details window also duplicated on the Information panel aggregates all information on the selected backup plan The respective message will appear at the top of the tabs if execution of the plan requires user interaction The message contains a brief description of the problem and action buttons that let you select the appropriate action or stop the plan Details The Backup plans and tasks tab provides the following general information on the selected plan Name name of the backup plan Origin whether the plan was created directly on the machine local origin or deployed to the machine from the management server centralized origin Execution state execution state p 223 of the backup plan Status status p 224 of the backup plan Machine name of the machine on which the backup plan exists only for centralized backup pl
369. orkdays 44 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Weekly Monthly Specifies which of the days selected in the Back up on field you want to reserve for weekly and monthly backups A monthly backup will be performed every fourth such day The default value is Friday Keep backups Specifies how long you want the backups to be stored in the archive A term can be set in hours days weeks months or years For monthly backups you can also select Keep indefinitely if you want them to be saved forever The default values for each backup type are as follows Daily 5 days recommended minimum Weekly 7 weeks Monthly indefinitely The retention period for weekly backups must exceed that for daily backups the monthly backups retention period must be greater than the weekly backups retention period We recommend setting a retention period of at least one week for daily backups Backup type Specifies the types of daily weekly and monthly backups Always full all the daily weekly and monthly backups will always be full This is the default selection for cases when a tape drive is selected as a backup location Full Differential Incremental daily backups are incremental weekly backups are differential and monthly backups are full The first backup is always full However it is not a monthly backup It will be kept as a daily or a weekly backup depending on the day of week it is created A back
370. orkstation or Convert to OVF using VMware OVF tool gt Deploy OVF template using vSphere Client ESX i Microsoft Virtual PC Add the VHD file to a Hyper V machine Hyper V Citrix XenServer OVA Import using Citrix XenCenter XenServer Kernel based Virtual Machine Raw format Move the virtual machine files to a machine running Linux and run the virtual machine by using Virtual Machine Manager Red Hat Enterprise Virtualization RHEV Raw format Import using RHEV Manager RHEV With Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Agent for Hyper V or Agent for ESX i you can create a new virtual machine directly on the respective virtualization server 6 2 3 1 Steps to perform To perform a recovery to a new virtual machine 1 Connect the console to the management server to a machine where an agent is installed or to a machine booted from a bootable media 2 Click Recover to open the Recover data p 101 page 3 Click Select data p 103 Use the Data view tab or the Archive view tab to select the disks or volumes to convert 142 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 4 In Recover to select New virtual machine 5 Click Browse In the VM VS Selection p 142 window select the resulting virtual machine type or the virtualization server where to create the machine 6 Optional In Storage you can view or select the storage where the virtual machine will be created 7 Optional In Virtu
371. ormation from the source disk is transferred to the target As is So if the destination disk is the same size and even if it is larger it is possible to transfer all the information there exactly as it is stored at the source But with the wide range of available hardware it is normal that the target disk would differ in size from the source If the destination is larger then it would be advisable to resize the source disk volumes to avoid leaving unallocated space on the target disk by selecting the Proportionally resize volumes option The option to Clone basic disk as is remains but the default method of cloning will be carried out with proportional enlargement of all the source disk volumes so that no unallocated space remains on the target disk If the destination is smaller then the As is option of cloning will be unavailable and proportional resizing of the source disk volumes will be mandatory The program analyzes the target disk to establish whether its size will be sufficient to hold all the data from the source disk without any loss If such transfer with proportional resizing of the source disk volumes is possible but without any data loss then the user will be allowed to proceed If due to the size limitations safe transfer of all the source disk data to the target disk is impossible even with the proportional resizing of the volumes then the Clone basic disk operation will be impossible and the user will not be able to
372. other name for the destination archive this is a limitation Tip You can implement the staging scenario manually by regularly running the archive deletion task followed by the export task Different ways to create an export task Using the Export page is the most general way to create an export task Here you can export any backup or archive you have permission to access You can access the Export page from the Vaults view Right click the object to export archive or backup and select Export from the context menu To access the Export page first select a validation object an archive or a backup 1 Select a vault For this click the Vaults icon in the Navigation pane and select the vault expanding the vaults tree in the Vaults view or directly in the Navigation pane 2 To select an archive select a vault and then in the Vault view select the Archive view tab and click the archive name 3 To select a backup select an archive in the Archive view expand the archive by clicking the expand button to the left of archive name and then click the backup After selecting the validation object select Export from the context menu The Export page will be opened with the pre selected object as a source All you need to do is to select a destination and optionally provide a name for the task To export an archive or a backup perform the following steps What to export Export Select the type of objects to export Archi
373. ove backups there In the online storage all backups are incremental except the first backup of an archive which is always full This chain cannot be entirely deleted because the most recent backup must always be kept Consolidate these backups The software will consolidate the backup that is subject to deletion or movement with the next dependent backup For example the retention rules require to delete a full backup but to retain the next incremental one The backups will be combined into a single full backup which will be dated with the incremental backup date When an incremental or differential backup from the middle of the chain is deleted the resulting backup type will be incremental This mode ensures that after each cleanup the archive size and the age or number of backups are within the bounds you specify The consolidation however may take a lot of time and system resources You still need some extra space in the vault for temporary files created during consolidation This mode is not available if you selected the Archive size greater than rule for any archive location except for Acronis Online Backup Storage What you need to know about consolidation Please be aware that consolidation is just a method of deletion but not an alternative to deletion The resulting backup will not contain data that was present in the deleted backup and was absent from the retained incremental or differential backup 4 5 5 Replication cleanup inact
374. ove the resulting TIB file and temporary files if possible and the task run result will be set to Failed When the check box is not selected the command execution result does not affect the task execution failure or success You can track the command execution result by exploring the log or the errors and warnings displayed in the Log view 5 Click Test Command to check if the command is correct 4 6 18 Pre Post data capture commands This option is effective for both Windows and Linux operating systems The option enables you to define the commands to be automatically executed before and after data capture that is taking the data snapshot Data capture is performed by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 at the beginning of the backup procedure The following scheme illustrates when the pre post data capture commands are executed lt Backup gt Pre backup command Pre data capture command Data capture Post data capture command Post backup command If the Volume Shadow Copy Service p 99 option is enabled the commands execution and the Microsoft VSS actions will be sequenced as follows Before data capture commands gt VSS Suspend gt Data capture gt VSS Resume gt After data capture commands Using the pre post data capture commands you can suspend and resume a database or application that is not compatible with VSS As opposed to the Pre Post commands p 93
375. owing Microsoft Technet article http technet microsoft com en us library virtual_active_directory_domain_controller_virtualizatio n_hyperv aspx 217 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 11 5 Recovering SharePoint data Different SharePoint servers and databases are recovered in different way To recover separate disks or volumes of a front end Web server you can either create a recovery task p 101 in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 graphical user interface or boot the server from the bootable media p 170 and configure recovery In the same way you can recover an SQL server Content databases are recovered as files For details see Recovering a content database p 217 Configuration and server databases are also recovered as files For details see Recovering configuration and service databases p 218 You can also recover separate SharePoint items such as sites lists document libraries and others For details see Recovering separate items p 219 11 5 1 Recovering a content database This topic describes the recovery of a content database to the original SharePoint farm by using Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 The recovery to a non original farm is a more complicated procedure Its steps vary depending on the farm configuration and other parameters of the production environment To recover a content database to the original SQL server 1 If the Windows SharePoin
376. ows WindowsUpdateClient and event number 18 into the System log the type of this event is Information When creating the plan type or select the following in the Schedule area Log name System Event source Microsoft Windows WindowsUpdateClient Event type Information Event ID 18 68 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Tip To set up a similar backup plan for machines running Microsoft Windows XP replace the text in Event source with Windows Update Agent and leave the remaining fields the same How to view events in Event viewer To open a log in Event Viewer 1 On the Desktop or in the Start menu right click My Computer and then click Manage 2 In the Computer Management console expand System Tools and then expand Event Viewer 3 In Event Viewer click the name of a log that you want to view for example Application Note To be able to open the security log Security you must be a member of the Administrators group To view properties of an event including the event source and event number 1 In Event Viewer click the name of a log that you want to view for example Application Note To be able to open the security log Security you must be a member of the Administrators group 2 In the list of events in the right pane double click the name of an event whose properties you want to view 3 In the Event Properties dialog box view the event s properties such as the ev
377. ows7Server64Guest Linux otherLinuxGuest Linux 64 bit otherLinux64Guest Other Operating System otherGuest 54 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Other Operating System 64 bit otherGuest64 Example acronisTag label DEPT BUCH COMP SUPERSERVER OWNER EJONSON acronisTag hostname superserver corp local acronisTag os type windows7Server64Guest acronisTag os servicepack 1 acronisTag os sid S 1 5 21 874133492 782267321 3928949834 4 2 10 Why is the program asking for the password A scheduled or postponed task has to run regardless of users being logged on In case you have not explicitly specified the credentials under which the task s will run the program proposes using your account Enter your password specify another account or change the scheduled start to manual 4 3 Simplified naming of backup files To use simplified naming of backup files do either of the following In the welcome screen click Create backup plan p 34 expand Show backup file naming archive comments and then select the Name backup files using the archive name check box When you back up to a locally attached RDX drive or USB flash drive the Name backup files using the archive name check box does not appear Instead the removable device mode p 153 determines whether the standard or simplified naming scheme will be used In the welcome screen click Back up now p 34
378. p Recovery 11 5 Agents require a license to perform operations on each managed machine Agents have multiple features or add ons that enable additional functionality and so might require additional licenses Console The console provides Graphical User Interface to the agents Usage of the console is not licensed In stand alone editions of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 the console is installed together with the agent and cannot be disconnected from it Bootable Media Builder With Bootable Media Builder you can create bootable media in order to use the agents and other rescue utilities in a rescue environment In stand alone editions of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Bootable Media Builder is installed together with the agent All add ons to the agent if installed will be available in a rescue environment 1 2 1 Agent for Windows This agent enables disk level and file level data protection under Windows 11 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Disk backup Disk level data protection is based on backing up either a disk or a volume file system as a whole along with all the information necessary for the operating system to boot or all the disk sectors using the sector by sector approach raw mode A backup that contains a copy of a disk or a volume in a packaged form is called a disk volume backup or a disk volume image It is possible to recover disks or volumes as a whole from such backup as well
379. p mechanism ensures that only the most recent backups of each level are kept Here is how the archive looks on day 8 a day before creating a new full backup 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4 1 2 1 3 1 2 1 The scheme allows for efficient data storage more backups accumulate toward the current time Having four backups we could recover data as of today yesterday half a week or a week ago Roll back period The number of days we can go back in the archive is different on different days The minimum number of days we are guaranteed to have is called the roll back period The following table shows full backup and roll back periods for schemes of various levels Number of levels Full backup every On different days can go back Roll back period 2 2 days 1 to 2 days 1 day 3 4 days 2 to 5 days 2 days 4 8 days 4 to 11 days 4 days 5 16 days 8 to 23 days 8 days 6 32 days 16 to 47 days 16 days Adding a level doubles the full backup and roll back periods To see why the number of recovery days varies let us return to the previous example Here are the backups we have on day 12 numbers in gray denote deleted backups 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 4 1 2 1 3 1 2 1 4 1 2 1 A new level 3 differential backup has not yet been created so the backup of day five is still stored Since it depends on the full backup of day one that backup is available as well This enables us to go as fa
380. p plan You can import the file to reuse the exported backup plan on another machine You can edit plans in the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 graphical user interface when importing them or after Backup plans are exported to xml files so you can edit the export files of backup plans p 226 with text editors Passwords are encrypted in the export files Usage examples Agent reinstallation Export the backup plans before reinstalling the agent and import them after reinstalling Deploying of a backup plan to multiple machines You want to use the same backup plan on multiple machines Export this plan from one of the machines and deploy it as a file p 229 to the other machines Adjusting credentials A scheduled plan contains credentials of the user account under which the plan s tasks run The plan will not start on a machine where a user account with identical credentials does not exist To avoid this situation do one of the following Create an account with identical credentials on the second machine Edit credentials in the export file before importing For details see Editing the export file p 226 Edit credentials after importing the plan When creating a backup plan with manual start do not change the Run under the current user setting in Plan parameters gt Show task credentials comments label With this setting the plan s tasks will always run under the account of the user who starts the
381. pecify Use this option if the task account does not have access permissions to the location You might need to provide special credentials for a network share or a storage node vault Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer 8 1 5 When to validate As validation is a resource intensive operation it makes sense to schedule validation to the managed machine s off peak period On the other hand if you prefer to be immediately informed whether the data is not corrupted and can be successfully recovered consider starting validation right after the task creation 158 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Choose one of the following Now to start the validation task right after its creation that is after clicking OK on the Validation page Later to start the one time validation task at the date and time you specify Specify the appropriate parameters as follows Date and time the date and time when to start the task The task will be started manually do not schedule the task
382. pecify credentials required for access to the location where the backup archive will be stored The user whose name is specified will be considered as the archive owner To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Use the plan s credentials The program will access the source data using the credentials of the backup plan account specified in the Plan parameters section Use the following credentials The program will access the source data using the credentials you specify Use this option if the plan account does not have access permissions to the location You might need to provide special credentials for a network share or a storage node vault Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account Confirm password Re enter the password 42 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 2 Click OK Warning According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer 4 2 6 Backup schemes Choose one of the available backup schemes Simple to schedule when and how often to backup data and specify retention rules Grandfather Father Son to use t
383. pecify what to do if the machine is about to be shut down while a task is running This option is effective only for Windows operating systems It determines Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 behavior when the system is shutting down The system shutdown occurs when the machine is turned off or restarted The preset is Stop running tasks and shut down If you select Stop running tasks and shut down all of the running Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 tasks will be aborted 236 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 If you select Wait for task completion all of the running Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 tasks will be completed 12 6 2 Acronis Customer Experience Program This option is effective only for Windows operating systems This option defines whether the machine will participate in the Acronis Customer Experience Program CEP If you choose Yes I want to participate in the CEP information about the hardware configuration the most and least used features and about any problems will be automatically collected from the machine and sent to Acronis on a regular basis The end results are intended to provide software improvements and enhanced functionality to better meet the needs of Acronis customers Acronis does not collect any personal data To learn more about the CEP read the terms of participation on the Acronis Web site or in the product GUI Initially the option is configured during the Acronis B
384. permissions are granted to the sysadmin role of the instance To attach a database 1 Run Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio 2 Connect to the required SQL Server instance and then expand the instance 3 Right click Databases and click Attach 4 Click Add 5 In the Locate Database Files dialog box find and select the mdf file of the database 6 In the Database Details section make sure that the rest of database files ndf and ldf files are found Details SQL Server database files may not be found automatically if They are not in the default location or they are not in the same folder as the primary database file mdf Solution Specify the path to the required files manually in the Current File Path column You have recovered an incomplete set of files that make up the database Solution Recover the missing SQL Server database files from the backup 7 When all of the files are found click OK 11 3 Recovering Exchange Server data In case of disaster you can recover an entire Exchange Server by restoring all its disks from a disk backup All of the Exchange Server services will be up and running without any additional actions if you follow the recommendations outlined in the Backing up an application server p 198 section The server data will be reverted to the state that it was at the time of backup By using Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 you can recover Exchange database files from a disk bac
385. placed on hold due to technical difficulties processing the order Acronis is working on resolving these issues Occasional The order has been cancelled The order had been cancelled before the media was shipped so returning the media is not required Occasional The order has been cancelled The media has been returned or Returning the media was not requested The order was cancelled while the media was in the datacenter The media has been shipped back the carrier and the tracking number are specified If a prepaid shipping label was not provided with the media the media will be discarded 13 1 7 Large Scale Recovery FAQ This section explains what Large Scale Recovery is why you would want to use it and provides some usage details 13 1 7 1 What is Large Scale Recovery Large Scale Recovery is an extra service that enables you to obtain a copy of the backups you have in the online storage You can then recover data from this copy Once you order Large Scale Recovery for a particular machine Acronis sends you a USB hard disk drive with all of the backups made from this machine You can recover data directly from the disk or copy the backups to a local or network folder 13 1 7 2 Why would I use Large Scale Recovery In the event of a disaster or the need to recover large volumes of data or the entire machines quickly this service helps you save time and network traffic Recovering hundreds of gigabytes ov
386. plying retention rules p 273 to an archive The retention rules are set by the backup plan p 264 that produces the archive Cleanup may or may not result in deleting or moving backups depending on whether the retention rules are violated or not Console Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Management Console A tool for remote or local access to Acronis agents p 263 and Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Management Server p 272 267 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Having connected the console to the management server the administrator sets up centralized backup plans p 265 and accesses other management server functionality that is performs centralized management p 265 Using the direct console agent connection the administrator performs direct management p 267 Consolidation Combining two or more subsequent backups p 263 belonging to the same archive p 263 into a single backup Consolidation might be needed when deleting backups either manually or during cleanup p 266 For example the retention rules require to delete a full backup p 270 that has expired but retain the next incremental p 271 one The backups will be combined into a single full backup which will be dated with the incremental backup s date Since consolidation may take a lot of time and system resources retention rules provide an option to not delete backups with dependencies In our example the full backup will b
387. primary volume on a basic MBR disk to set as active 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Mark as active in the context menu If there is no other active volume in the system the pending operation of setting active volume will be added Please note that due to setting the new active volume the former active volume letter might be changed and some of the installed programs might stop running 3 If another active volume is present in the system you will receive the warning that the previous active volume will have to be set passive first By clicking OK in the Warning window you ll add the pending operation of setting active volume Please note even if you have the Operating System on the new active volume in some cases the machine will not be able to boot from it You will have to confirm your decision to set the new volume as active To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 197 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them The new volume structure will be graphically represented in the Disk management view immediately 10 7 4 Change volume letter Windows operating systems assign letters C D etc to hard disk volumes at startup These letters are used by applications and operating systems to locate files and folders in the volumes Connecting an additional disk as well as creating or deleting a volume on existing disks might change your
388. prompt run the following commands activate instance ntds authoritative restore 4 At the tool s command prompt run the restore subtree or restore object command with the necessary parameters For example the following command restores the Manager user account in the Finance organizational unit of the example com domain restore object cn Manager ou Finance dc example dc com For more information about using the Ntdsutil tool refer to its documentation Details Other objects will be replicated from other domain controllers when you restart the domain controller This way you will restore the unintentionally deleted objects and keep the other objects up to date 5 Restart the domain controller in normal mode Make sure that the Active Directory service has started successfully and that the restored objects have become available 11 4 5 Avoiding a USN rollback If the domain has two or more domain controllers and you have recovered one of the controllers or its database you need to avoid a situation known as a USN rollback Replication and USNs Active Directory data is constantly replicated between the domain controllers At any given moment the same Active Directory object may have a newer version on one domain controller and an older version on another To prevent conflicts and loss of information Active Directory tracks object versions on each domain controller and replaces the outdated versions with the up to date version
389. pyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Store collections of similar files separately for example an MP3 collection or video files on a separate volume Store backups images of other volumes disks on a special volume Install a new operating system or swap file on a new volume Add new hardware to a machine In Acronis Disk Director Lite the tool for creating volumes is the Create volume Wizard 10 7 1 1 Types of dynamic volumes Simple Volume A volume created from free space on a single physical disk It can consist of one region on the disk or several regions virtually united by the Logical Disk Manager LDM It provides no additional reliability no speed improvement nor extra size Spanned Volume A volume created from free disk space virtually linked together by the LDM from several physical disks Up to 32 disks can be included into one volume thus overcoming the hardware size limitations but if at least one disk fails all data will be lost and no part of a spanned volume may be removed without destroying the entire volume So a spanned volume provides no additional reliability nor a better I O rate Striped Volume A volume also sometimes called RAID 0 consisting of equal sized stripes of data written across each disk in the volume it means that to create a striped volume a user will need two or more dynamic disks The disks in a striped volume don t have to be identical
390. r and is booted into bootable media Use SCSI drivers bundled with your virtualization software or download the latest drivers versions from the software manufacturer Web site If the automatic drivers search does not help to boot the system Specify the appropriate drivers by clicking Add driver The drivers defined here will be installed with appropriate warnings even if the program finds a better driver The recovery process If Universal Restore cannot find a compatible driver in the specified locations it will display a prompt with the problem device Do any of the following Add the driver to any of the previously specified locations and click Retry If you do not remember the location continue the recovery If the result is not satisfactory start Universal Restore without recovery by clicking Apply Universal Restore in the media welcome screen When configuring the operation specify the necessary driver 118 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Once Windows boots it will initialize the standard procedure for installing new hardware The network adapter driver will be installed silently if the driver has the Microsoft Windows signature Otherwise Windows will ask for confirmation on whether to install the unsigned driver After that you will be able to configure the network connection and specify drivers for the video adapter USB and other devices 5 2 2 2 Applying Universal Restore to mult
391. r back as 11 days which is the best case scenario The following day however a new third level differential backup is created and the old full backup is deleted 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 4 1 2 1 3 1 2 1 4 1 2 1 3 This gives us only a four day recovery interval which turns out to be the worst case scenario 51 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 On day 14 the interval is five days It increases on subsequent days before decreasing again and so on 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4 1 2 1 3 1 2 1 4 1 2 1 3 1 The roll back period shows how many days we are guaranteed to have even in the worst case For a four level scheme it is four days 4 2 6 5 Manual start With the Manual start scheme you do not have to specify the backup schedule You can run the backup plan from the Plans and Tasks view manually at any time afterwards Specify the appropriate settings as follows Backup type Select the type of backup Full selected by default for all backup locations except for Acronis Online Backup Storage Incremental At the first time a full backup will be created The next backups will be incremental Selected as the one and only backup type for Acronis Online Backup Storage Differential At the first time a full backup will be created The next backups will be differential 4 2 6 6 Initial seeding This backup scheme is onl
392. r e mail service provider for assistance 6 Click Additional e mail parameters to configure additional e mail parameters as follows a From type the name of the sender If you leave this field empty the messages will contain the sender s e mail account in the From field b Use encryption you can opt for encrypted connection to the mail server SSL and TLS encryption types are available for selection c Some Internet service providers require authentication on the incoming mail server before being allowed to send something If this is your case select the Log on to incoming mail server check box to enable a POP server and to set up its settings Incoming mail server POP enter the name of the POP server Port set the port of the POP server By default the port is set to 110 User name and Password of the incoming mail server d Click OK 7 Click Send test e mail message to check whether e mail notifications work correctly with the specified settings 12 6 4 1 Alert notifications This option enables you to specify when to send e mail notifications about alerts which occurred on the managed machine and to select the types of alerts to send 238 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 When using this option make sure that the e mail settings are properly configured in Machine options gt E mail settings p 237 The preset is Disabled To configure alert notifi
393. r information about backup schemes used when backing up Exchange databases storage groups or mailboxes refer to the Backup schemes section of the Backing up Microsoft Exchange Server data documentation 4 2 6 1 Simple scheme With the simple backup scheme you just schedule when and how often to back up data Other steps are optional To set up the simple backup scheme specify the appropriate settings as follows Schedule Set up when and how often to back up the data To learn more about setting up the schedule see the Scheduling p 59 section Retention rules Specify how long to store backups in the location and whether to move or delete them afterward The retention rules are applied after creating a backup The Keep backups indefinitely is set by default which means that no backups will be deleted automatically For more information about retention rules see Setting up retention of backups p 74 43 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Backup type To access this setting click Show backup type 2nd location validation convert to virtual machine Select the backup type Full selected by default for all backup locations except for Acronis Online Backup Storage Incremental At the first time a full backup will be created The next backups will be incremental Selected as the one and only backup type for Acronis Online Backup Storage Note When the Incremental backup type is selecte
394. r the machine This means you have to free some space for future backups Or you can consider increasing the storage quota p 253 You may also want to set or edit the retention rule p 243 so that an overflow does not occur in future Once the occupied space reaches the limit the backups will cease to run 13 1 5 7 What is the cleanup task for Any backup plan where the retention rule is set contains a cleanup task in addition to a backup task The cleanup task checks the archive created by the backup plan for backups that have outlived their lifetime If such backups are found the task makes the online storage delete them Since the deletion is performed on the online storage side it does not take your machine s CPU resource The cleanup task runs after every online backup even if the backup has failed The last successful backup is always kept though For more information about the retention rule please refer to How long will my backups be kept in the online storage p 243 Normally there is no need to start and stop the cleanup task manually But it is possible to do so in the Backup plans and tasks view 13 1 5 8 How to make a recovered machine recognize its subscription When you recover a physical machine from a backup a new machine identifier is created Therefore the machine is not able to back up to the subscription it used before recovery 245 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 To continue back
395. rchives can be added deleted or modified by another user or by the program itself according to scheduled operations Use the Refresh button to refresh the list of archives 3 Naming the new archive By default the exported archive inherits the name of the original archive Because having multiple archives of the same names in the same location is not advisable the following actions are disabled with the default archive name Exporting part of an archive to the same location Exporting an archive or part of an archive to a location where an archive of the same name exists Exporting an archive or part of an archive to the same location twice In any of the above cases provide an archive name that is unique to the destination folder or vault If you need to redo the export using the same archive name first delete the archive that resulted from the previous export operation 8 2 5 Access credentials for destination Specify credentials required for access to the location where the resulting archive will be stored The user whose name is specified will be considered as the archive owner To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Use the current user credentials The software will access the destination using the credentials of the current user Use the following credentials The software will access the destination using the credentials you specify Use this option if the task account does not
396. re possible with Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Virtual Edition You can back up all virtual machines managed by Agent for ESX i or Agent for Hyper V with a single subscription for virtual machines 13 1 Introduction to Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online This section contains a brief overview of Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online and answers questions that may arise during evaluation and usage of this product 13 1 1 What is Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online is a service that enables you to back up data to Acronis Online Backup Storage To use this service you need to buy a subscription that determines the amount of storage space reserved for your backups storage quota and how long the online service will be available to you A separate subscription is required for each physical machine you are going to back up The server or workstation subscription that you buy will depend on the Windows operating system that the machine is running Other operating systems are not supported by Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online Example A 250 GB 1 year workstation subscription means that you can back up data from a machine running a non server Windows operating system for a period of 1 year The backups can occupy no more than 250 GB 13 1 2 What data can I back up and recover You can back up any files volumes or the entire physical machine as often as you wish Unlike most online backup solut
397. rential backups within a single backup plan You need to create separate backup plans for each type of backup Backup to a tape Acronis Secure Zone or Acronis Online Backup Storage Setting up replication of backups Setting up retention rules Setting up regular conversion of backups to a virtual machine Converting an incremental or differential backup into a full one Restrictions on archive names The archive name cannot end with a number The FAT16 FAT32 and NTFS file systems do not allow the following characters in the file name backslash slash colon asterisk question mark quotation mark less than sign lt greater than sign gt and pipe 4 3 1 The DATE variable If you specify the DATE variable in the archive name the file name of each backup will include that backup s creation date When using this variable the first backup of a new day will be a full backup Before creating the next full backup the software deletes all backups taken earlier that day Backups taken before that day are kept This means you can store multiple full backups with or without incremental ones but no more than one full backup per day You can sort the backups by date You can also use a script to copy move or delete the older backups The value of this variable is the current date surrounded by brackets The date format depends on the regional options on the
398. requests IRQs or discover secondary PCI buses on the motherboard These calls might not work properly on some machines But this may be the only way to get the interrupt routing table 9 1 1 2 Network settings While creating Acronis bootable media you have an option to pre configure network connections that will be used by the bootable agent The following parameters can be pre configured IP address Subnet mask Gateway DNS server WINS server 175 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Once the bootable agent starts on a machine the configuration is applied to the machine s network interface card NIC If the settings have not been pre configured the agent uses DHCP auto configuration You also have the ability to configure the network settings manually when the bootable agent is running on the machine Pre configuring multiple network connections You can pre configure TCP IP settings for up to ten network interface cards To ensure that each NIC will be assigned the appropriate settings create the media on the server for which the media is customized When you select an existing NIC in the wizard window its settings are selected for saving on the media The MAC address of each existing NIC is also saved on the media You can change the settings except for the MAC address or configure the settings for a non existent NIC if need be Once the bootable agent starts on the serv
399. rity everything else is recovered in the background Limitations the backup must be located on the local drive any device available through the BIOS except for network boot does not work with Linux images GPT disks and the UEFI boot mode are not supported Acronis Plug in for WinPE A modification of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Agent for Windows that can run in the preinstallation environment The plug in can be added to a WinPE p 275 image using Bootable Media Builder The resulting bootable media p 265 can be used to boot any PC compatible machine and perform with certain limitations most of the direct management p 267 operations without the help of an operating system Operations can be configured and controlled either locally through the GUI or remotely using the console p 266 Acronis Secure Zone A secure volume for storing backup archives p 263 within a managed machine p 272 Advantages enables recovery of a disk to the same disk where the disk s backup resides offers a cost effective and handy method for protecting data from software malfunction virus attack operator error eliminates the need for a separate media or network connection to back up or recover the data This is especially useful for mobile users can serve as the primary location from which backups are replicated further Limitation Acronis Secure Zone cannot be organized on a dynamic disk p
400. rlier versions of multiple files and folders select the required date and time from the Versions list Select the check boxes to the left of the files and folders and click the green Recover button Details You will get the file and folder versions that were backed up prior and closest to the selected point in time 6 To download the selected files click Save Details If you selected a single file it is downloaded as is Otherwise the selected data will be archived into a zip file named AcronisArchive zip by default 7 Select the location to save the data to and then click Save 13 7 Limitations of the online storage Unlike other types of storage available in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 the online storage has the following limitations 259 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Operations The following operations are not possible Backup operations Backing up from bootable media Backing up under Linux Creating differential backups Using the Custom backup scheme Simplified naming of backup files Simultaneous host based backup of multiple virtual machines Setting up regular conversion of backups to a virtual machine Operations with backups Validating a backup Exporting a backup Mounting a backup Replicating or moving backups from the online storage Converting an incremental backup to full Operation with arch
401. rocedure described below New virtual machine If Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Agent for Windows or Agent for Linux is installed The selected volumes will be recovered to a new virtual machine of any of the following types VMware Workstation Microsoft Virtual PC Parallels Workstation Red Hat Kernel based Virtual Machine KVM Red Hat Enterprise Virtualization RHEV or Citrix XenServer Open Virtual Appliance OVA The virtual machine files will be saved to the destination you specify in the Storage section By default the new virtual machine will be created in the current user s documents folder If Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Agent for Hyper V or Agent for ESX i is installed These agents enable creating a new virtual machine on the virtualization server you specify By default the new virtual machine will be created in the default storage of the virtualization server Whether you can change the storage on the virtualization server or not depends on the virtualization product brand and settings VMware ESX i may have multiple storages A Microsoft Hyper V server enables creating a new virtual machine in any local folder The new virtual machine will be configured automatically the source machine configuration being copied where possible The configuration is displayed in the Virtual Machine Settings p 143 section Check the settings and make changes if necessary Then you proceed to the regular volume mappin
402. rs and all of the unique Web Front End servers belonging to the farm The backups should be done with the same schedule This is needed because the configuration database must be synchronized with other databases For example if the content database contains the data about a site while the latest backup of the configuration database does not the site will be orphaned after the configuration database is recovered If you have an advanced edition of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 the easiest way to back up a SharePoint farm is to create a centralized backup plan as described in the Creating a centralized backup plan section or use the Backup now feature as described in the Back up now section In stand alone editions of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 you must specify the identical schedule when creating a backup plan p 34 for every server belonging to the farm 11 2 Recovering SQL Server data In case of a disaster you can recover an entire SQL Server by restoring all its disks from a disk backup If you followed the recommendations outlined in the Backing up an application server p 198 section all of the SQL Server services will be up and running without additional actions The server data will be reverted to the state that it was at the time of backup To bring a backed up database back to production recover the database files from a disk backup For details see Recovering SQL Server database files from a disk backup p
403. rt conditions Wait until the conditions are met Run the task anyway after 3 hour s As a result 1 If all users are logged off at 8PM the backup task will start at 8PM 2 If the last user logs off between 8PM and 11PM the backup task will start immediately after the user has logged off 3 If any of the users is still logged on at 11PM the backup task starts anyway 4 4 5 5 Time since last backup Applies to Windows Linux Enables to put a backup task run on hold until the specified time interval since the last successful backup completion passes Example Run the backup task at system startup but only if more than 12 hours have passed since the last successful backup Event At startup Start the task on machine startup Condition Time since last backup Time since the last backup 12 hour s Task start conditions Wait until the conditions are met As a result 1 if the machine is restarted before 12 hours pass since the completion of the latest successful backup the scheduler will wait until 12 hours pass and then will start the task 2 if the machine is restarted after 12 hours have passed since the completion of the latest successful backup the backup task will start immediately 3 if the machine is never restarted the task will never start You can start the backup manually if need be in the Backup plans and tasks view 4 5 Replication and retention of backups When cr
404. ry keys also copied on the target disk 2 Leave NT signature to keep the old target disk signature and update the operating system according to the signature 187 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 If you need to copy the NT signature 1 Select the Copy NT signature check box You receive the warning If there is an operating system on the hard disk uninstall either the source or the target hard disk drive from your machine prior to starting the machine again Otherwise the OS will start from the first of the two and the OS on the second disk will become unbootable The Turn off the machine after the cloning operation check box is selected and disabled automatically 2 Click Finish to add the pending operation 3 Click Commit on the toolbar and then click Proceed in the Pending Operations window 4 Wait until the operation is finished 5 Wait until the machine is turned off 6 Disconnect either the source or the target hard disk drive from the machine 7 Start up the machine If you need to leave an NT signature 1 Click to clear the Copy NT signature check box if necessary 2 Click to clear the Turn off the machine after the cloning operation check box if necessary 3 Click Finish to add the pending operation 4 Click Commit on the toolbar and then click Proceed in the Pending Operations window 5 Wait until the operation is finished 10 6 3 Disk conversion MBR to GPT You would want to c
405. rypted by BitLocker 1 Boot from the bootable media 2 Recover the system The recovered data will be unencrypted 3 Reboot the recovered system 4 Turn on BitLocker If you only need to recover one partition of a multi partitioned disk do so under the operating system Recovery under bootable media may make the recovered partition undetectable for Windows McAfee Endpoint Encryption and PGP Whole Disk Encryption You can recover an encrypted system partition by using bootable media only If the recovered system fails to boot rebuild Master Boot Record as described in the following Acronis knowledge base article Restoring Windows Boot Loader Manually and reboot 3 10 Support for SNMP SNMP objects Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 provides the following Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP objects to SNMP management applications Type of event Object identifier OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 24769 100 200 1 0 Syntax OctetString The value may be Information Warning Error and Unknown Unknown is sent only in the test message Text description of the event Object identifier OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 24769 100 200 2 0 33 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Syntax OctetString The value contains the text description of the event it looks identical to messages published by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 in its log Example of varbind values 1 3 6 1 4 1 24769 100 200 1 0 Informatio
406. s International GmbH 2002 2012 not corrupted and can be successfully recovered think of starting the validation right after backup creation 2 What to validate select either to validate the entire archive or the latest backup in the archive Validation of a file backup imitates recovery of all files from the backup to a dummy destination Validation of a volume backup calculates a checksum for every data block saved in the backup Validation of the archive will validate all the archive s backups and may take a long time and a lot of system resources 3 Validation schedule appears only if you have selected the on schedule in step 1 set the schedule of validation For more information see the Scheduling p 59 section 4 2 8 Backup plan s credentials Provide the credentials for the account under which the plan will run To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Use Acronis service credentials or Run under the current user The plan will run under one of the following user accounts The agent service account if you have administrative privileges on the machine Your account if you are logged on as a regular user such as a member of the Users group Use the following credentials The tasks will always run under the credentials you specify whether started manually or executed on schedule Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to al
407. s follows Run the task Daily Every 1 Hour s From 08 00 00 AM Until 05 01 00 PM Result The full backup of January 31 2012 will be stored as ServerFiles 2012 01 31 tib 59 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 The 10 differential backups of January 31 2012 will be stored as ServerFiles 2012 01 31 2 tib ServerFiles 2012 01 31 3 tib and so on up to ServerFiles 2012 01 31 11 tib The following day February 1 the backups will start with the full backup ServerFiles 2012 02 01 tib The differential backups will start with ServerFiles 2012 02 01 2 tib See also The Date variable p 55 4 4 Scheduling Acronis scheduler helps the administrator adapt backup plans to the company s daily routine and each employee s work style The plans tasks will be launched systematically keeping the critical data safely protected The scheduling is available when creating a backup plan p 34 with any of the following backup schemes Simple Custom or Tower of Hanoi The schedule also can be set for validation tasks p 155 The scheduler uses local time of the machine the backup plan exists on Before creating a schedule be sure the machine s date and time settings are correct Schedule To define when a task has to be executed you need to specify an event or multiple events The task will be launched as soon as any of the events occurs The table below lists t
408. s scheduled However it can be started manually After a manual run the plan will stay disabled The plan will run as usual if you enable it again Export a plan Click Export Specify the path and name of the resulting file See Export and import of backup plans p 226 for more information Import a plan Click Import Specify the path and name of the file that contains a previously exported plan See Export and import of backup plans p 226 for more information Delete a plan task Click Delete 12 1 2 States and statuses of backup plans and tasks 12 1 2 1 Backup plan execution states A backup plan state is a cumulative state of the plan s tasks activities State How it is determined How to handle 224 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 1 Need interaction At least one task needs user interaction Otherwise see 2 Identify the tasks that need interaction the program will display what action is needed gt Stop the tasks or enable the tasks to run change media provide additional space on the vault ignore the read error create the missing Acronis Secure Zone 2 Running At least one task is running Otherwise see 3 No action is required 3 Waiting At least one task is waiting Otherwise see 4 Waiting for condition This situation is quite normal but delaying a backup for too long is risky The solution may be to set the maximum delay p 98 after which the t
409. s to all backups including the daily ones for at least six months The following GFS scheme suits such purposes Start backup at 11 30 PM Back up on Tuesday Thursday Friday Weekly monthly Friday Keep backups Daily 6 months Weekly 6 months 46 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Monthly 5 years Here daily incremental backups will be created on Tuesdays and Thursdays with weekly and monthly backups performed on Fridays Note that in order to choose Friday in the Weekly monthly field you need to first select it in the Back up on field Such an archive would allow you to compare your financial documents as of the first and the last day of work and have a five year history of all documents etc No daily backups Consider a more exotic GFS scheme Start backup at 12 00 PM Back up on Friday Weekly monthly Friday Keep backups Daily 1 week Weekly 1 month Monthly indefinitely Backup is thus performed only on Fridays This makes Friday the only choice for weekly and monthly backups leaving no other date for daily backups The resulting Grandfather Father archive will hence consist only of weekly differential and monthly full backups Even though it is possible to use GFS to create such an archive the Custom scheme is more flexible in this situation 4 2 6 3 Custom backup scheme At a glance
410. s you need to perform in order to create and launch any task or a backup plan Action page Create backup plan 20 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Using controls and specifying settings Use active controls to specify a backup plan or recovery task settings and parameters By default such fields as credentials options comments and some others are hidden Most settings are configured by clicking the respective Show links Others are selected from the drop down list or typed manually in the page s fields Action page Controls Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 remembers the changes you made on the action pages For example if you started to create a backup plan and then for any reason switched to another view without accomplishing the plan creation you can click the Back navigation button on the menu Or if you have passed several steps forward click the Down arrow and select the page where you started the plan creation from the list Thus you can perform the remaining steps and accomplish the backup plan creation Navigation buttons 2 1 3 Console options The console options define the way information is represented in the Graphical User Interface of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 To access the console options select Options gt Console options from the top menu 2 1 3 1 Alert display options The option specifies which alerts to show and which to hide in the Alerts view The preset
411. same machine that is backed up Using a NAS also makes good sense Storage space For VMware Hyper V and Virtual PC disks of the resulting virtual machine will use as much storage space as the original data occupies Assuming that the original disk size is 100 GB and the disk stores 10 GB of data the corresponding virtual disk will occupy about 10 GB VMware calls this format thin provisioning Microsoft uses the dynamically expanding disk term Since the space is not pre allocated the physical storage is expected to have sufficient free space for the virtual disks to increase in size For KVM or RHEV disks of the resulting virtual machine will have the raw format This means that virtual disk size is always equal to the original disk capacity Assuming that the original disk size is 100 GB the corresponding virtual disk will occupy 100 GB even if the disk stores 10 GB of data 6 2 2 4 How regular conversion to VM works The way the repeated conversions work depends on where you choose to create the virtual machine If you choose to save the virtual machine as a set of files each conversion re creates the virtual machine from scratch If you choose to create the virtual machine on a virtualization server when converting an incremental or differential backup the software updates the existing virtual machine instead of re creating it Such conversion is normally faster It saves network traffic and CPU resource of the host
412. schedule the backups to run every week on Tuesday through Sunday Result Before creating a Monday backup by the first backup plan all backups will be deleted from the currently attached drive While one drive is attached to the machine you can keep the other drive off site for extra data protection If you choose to back up to locally attached RDX drives or USB flash drives the Name backup files using the archive name check box does not appear Instead make sure that the removable device mode p 153 is set to Removable media 4 3 3 6 Example 6 Backups within working hours Consider the following scenario You want to back up your server s critical files every day You want the first backup of each day to be full and to run at 01 00 AM You want the backups during working hours to be differential and to run every hour from 8 00 AM through 5 00 PM You want to include a creation date in the name of each backup file In this scenario you need to create two backup plans as follows a When creating the first backup plan specify ServerFiles DATE as the archive name select the Name backup files using the archive name check box select Full as the backup type and schedule the backups to run every day at 01 00 00 AM b When creating the second backup plan specify the same settings as in the first backup plan but select Differential as the backup type and schedule the backups a
413. sical to virtual machine conversion see the Backing up virtual machines document 138 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 6 2 2 Setting up regular conversion to a virtual machine When creating a backup plan p 34 you can set up regular conversion of a disk or volume backup to a virtual machine By setting up regular conversion you obtain a copy of your server or workstation on a virtual machine which can be readily powered on in case the original machine fails Restrictions Conversion of a backup from the following locations is not available CD DVD Blu Ray Discs tape devices and Acronis Online Backup Storage If you have set up copying or moving backups to other locations p 71 you cannot set up conversion from any of these locations Conversion is always performed from the first location of a backup Conversion to a Citrix XenServer virtual machine is not available as a part of the backup plan As an alternative use methods b and c as described in Conversion methods p 135 6 2 2 1 Conversion settings This section provides information that helps you make the appropriate conversion settings The settings are specified in the Convert to virtual machine section of the Create backup plan page Convert to virtual machine When to convert Depending on the selected backup scheme specify whether to convert every full every incremental or every differential backup or convert the
414. sk backups located on Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Storage Node Linux SWAP Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 can back up and recover corrupted or non supported file systems using the sector by sector approach 1 5 Technical Support Maintenance and Support Program If you need assistance with your Acronis product please go to http www acronis com support 13 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Product Updates You can download the latest updates for all your registered Acronis software products from our website at any time after logging into your Account https www acronis com my and registering the product See Registering Acronis Products at the Website http kb acronis com content 4834 and Acronis Website User Guide http kb acronis com content 8128 14 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 2 Getting started Step 1 Installation These brief installation instructions enable you to start using the product quickly For the complete description of installation methods and procedures please refer to the Installation documentation Before installation make sure that Your hardware meets the system requirements You have license keys for the edition of your choice You have the setup program You can download it from the Acronis Web site To install Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Run the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 setup program and fo
415. sk result gt on machine lt machine name gt You can type any text before or after the variable 5 In the SMTP server field enter the name of the outgoing mail server SMTP 6 In the Port field set the port of the outgoing mail server By default the port is set to 25 7 If the outgoing mail server requires authentication enter User name and Password of the sender s e mail account If the SMTP server does not require authentication leave the User name and Password fields blank If you are not sure whether the SMTP server requires authentication contact your network administrator or your e mail service provider for assistance 8 Click Additional e mail parameters to configure additional e mail parameters as follows a From type the name of the sender If you leave this field empty the messages will contain the sender s e mail account in the From field b Use encryption you can opt for encrypted connection to the mail server SSL and TLS encryption types are available for selection 133 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 c Some Internet service providers require authentication on the incoming mail server before being allowed to send something If this is your case select the Log on to incoming mail server check box to enable a POP server and to set up its settings Incoming mail server POP enter the name of the POP server Port set the port of the POP server By default
416. so specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account Confirm password Re enter the password 2 Click OK To learn more about operations available depending on the user privileges see the Users privileges on a managed machine p 25 section 4 2 9 Label Preserving machine properties in a backup Any time data on a machine is backed up information about the machine name operating system Windows service pack and security identifier SID is added to the backup along with the user defined text label The label may include the department or machine owner s name or similar information that can be used as a tag or a key If you recover p 101 the machine to a VMware ESX i using Agent for ESX i or convert p 138 the backup to a ESX i virtual machine these properties will be transferred to the virtual machine s configuration You can view them in the virtual machine settings Edit settings gt Options gt Advanced gt General gt Configuration parameters You can select sort and group the virtual machines with the help of these custom parameters This can be useful in various scenarios Example 53 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Let s assume you migrate your office or datacenter to a virtual environment By using third party software that can access configuration parameters through VMware API you can automatically apply security polici
417. solving these issues Occasional The order has been cancelled The order has been cancelled Occasional Address is undeliverable Acronis cannot send the disk On the same Web page click Change my delivery address and specify the correct address for the order Occasional Address has been updated This status is set after you have updated the delivery address on Acronis web site 13 1 7 9 How to perform large scale recovery The recovery procedure is the same as when recovering from the online storage Just specify the path to the location where your backups are For detailed information about recovery please refer to the context sensitive help 252 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 13 1 8 Subscription lifecycle FAQ This section explains a subscription lifecycle and subscription operations that you can perform on your account management Web page 13 1 8 1 How to access my account management Web page To access this Web page from the Acronis Web site 1 Select User Login 2 Log in to your account create one if you are not registered yet 3 Navigate to Online backup gt for Business To access this Web page from Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 1 On the Actions menu click Back up now or Create backup plan 2 Click Location and then click Buy or manage your subscriptions 3 Log in to your account create one if you are not registered yet 13 1 8 2 Where do I
418. source The export of an archive creates a duplicate of the archive with all its backups in the location you specify Delete a single archive or multiple archives 1 Select one or more archives you want to delete 2 Click Delete The program duplicates your selection in the Backups deletion p 169 window that has check boxes for each archive and each backup Review the selection and make corrections if need be select the check boxes for the desired archives then confirm the deletion Delete all archives in the vault Please be aware that if filters have been applied to the vaults list you see only a part of the vault content Be sure that the vault does not contain archives you need to retain before starting the operation Click Delete all The program duplicates your selection in the new window that has check boxes for each archive and each backup Review the selection and correct if need be then confirm the deletion 8 4 2 Operations with backups To perform any operation with a backup 1 In the Navigation pane select the vault that contains archives 2 On the Archive view tab of the vault select the archive Then expand the archive and click the backup to select it If the archive is protected with a password you will be asked to provide it 3 Perform operations by clicking the corresponding buttons on the toolbar These operations can also be accessed from the Backup name actions item of the main me
419. stration SharePoint 2010 Timer SharePoint 2010 Tracing SharePoint 2010 User Code Host SharePoint 2010 VSS Writer SharePoint Foundation Search V4 World Wide Web Publishing Service SharePoint Server Search 14 Web Analytics Data Processing Service Web Analytics Web Service b On the server that is running the Central Administration site run the following command iisreset stop 2 Recover the database files as described in Recovering SQL Server database files from a disk backup p 208 3 Start the SharePoint services that were stopped earlier To recover the configuration database in SharePoint 2007 1 Stop the SharePoint services a On the server that is running the Central Administration site in the Services snap in stop the following services Microsoft Single Sign On Service 219 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Office Document Conversions Launcher Service Office Document Conversions Load Balancer Service Office SharePoint Server Search Windows SharePoint Services Administration Windows SharePoint Services Search Windows SharePoint Services Timer Windows SharePoint Services Tracing Windows SharePoint Services VSS Writer b On all servers in the farm run the following command iisreset stop 2 Recover the database files as described in Recovering SQL Server database fi
420. sts While this on the fly recovery proceeds the continuing recovery process is transferred to the background Please do not shut down or reboot the machine until the recovery is completed If you switch off the machine all the changes made to the system since the last boot up will be lost The system will not be recovered not even partially The only possible solution in this case will be to restart the recovery process from a bootable media 8 The background recovery continues until all the selected volumes are recovered the log entry is made and the Acronis Active Restore icon disappears from the system tray 5 5 Bootability troubleshooting If a system was bootable at the time of backup you expect that it will boot after recovery However the information the operating system stores and uses for booting up may become outdated during recovery especially if you change volume sizes locations or destination drives Acronis Backup amp 124 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Recovery 11 5 automatically updates Windows loaders after recovery Other loaders might also be fixed but there are cases when you have to re activate the loaders Specifically when you recover Linux volumes it is sometimes necessary to apply fixes or make booting changes so that Linux can boot and load correctly Below is a summary of typical situations that require additional user actions Why a recovered operating system may be unbootable
421. subscription the new subscription will replace the old one You can reassign the old subscription to a different machine see Reassigning an activated subscription p 256 Before activating the first subscription for your account check the country selected in your profile Depending on this country the service determines the data center where your future backups will be sent Make sure to select the country where all or most of the machines you want to back up to the online storage are located Otherwise the data may unnecessarily travel a long way Later you will not be able to change the data center even if you change the country in your profile To access your profile go to the Acronis Web site select User Login log in to your account and then click Personal Profile 13 4 1 Activating subscriptions To activate a subscription 1 Start Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 2 On the Actions menu click Activate online backup subscription 3 Specify the credentials to log in to the online storage 4 From Available subscriptions select the subscription that you want to activate for the machine 5 Click Activate now 13 4 2 Reassigning an activated subscription Sometimes you may want to use an already activated subscription instead of an available subscription In these cases for example You no longer need to back up one of your machines and you want to reuse that machine s subscription for another machine
422. system When you need to perform a disk management operation on such machine it is necessary to specify for which operating system the disk layout will be displayed and the disk management operation will be performed The name of the currently selected operating system is shown on the console toolbar after The current disk layout is for Click the OS name to select another operating system in the Operating System Selection window Under bootable media this window appears after clicking Disk management The disk layout will be displayed according to the operating system you select 10 5 Disk management view Acronis Disk Director Lite is controlled through the Disk management view of the console 184 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 The top part of the view contains a disks and volumes table enabling data sorting and columns customization and toolbar The table presents the numbers of the disks as well as assigned letter label type capacity free space size used space size file system and status for each volume The toolbar comprises of icons to launch the Undo Redo and Commit actions intended for pending operations p 197 The graphic panel at the bottom of the view also graphically depicts all the disks and their volumes as rectangles with basic data on them label letter size status type and file system Both parts of the view also depict all unallocated disk space that can be used in volume cre
423. system configuration As a result some applications might stop working normally or user files might not be automatically found and opened To prevent this you can manually change the letters that are automatically assigned to the volumes by the operating system If you need to change a letter assigned to a volume by the operating system 1 Select a volume to change a letter 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Change letter in the context menu 3 Select a new letter in the Change Letter window 4 By clicking OK in the Change Letter window you ll add a pending operation to volume letter assignment To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 197 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them The new volume structure will be graphically represented in the Disk management view immediately 196 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 10 7 5 Change volume label The volume label is an optional attribute It is a name assigned to a volume for easier recognition For example one volume could be called SYSTEM a volume with an operating system or PROGRAM an application volume DATA a data volume etc but it does not imply that only the type of data stated with the label could be stored on such a volume In Windows volume labels are shown in the Explorer disk and folder tree LABEL1 C LABEL2 D LABEL3 E etc LABEL1 LABEL2 and
424. t lt password encrypted true gt XXXYYYZZZ888 lt password gt 228 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 How to change items to back up Replacing a directly specified item with another directly specified item Inside the lt plan gt lt targets gt lt inclusions gt section 1 Delete the lt ID gt tag 2 Edit the value of the lt Path gt tag which contains information about data to back up for example replace C with D Replacing a directly specified item with a selection template Inside the lt plan gt lt options gt lt specific gt lt inclusion_rules gt section 1 Add the lt rules_type gt tag with disks or files value depending on the type of the template you need 2 Add the lt rules gt tag 3 Inside the lt rules gt tag add the lt rule gt with the required template The template must correspond to the directly specified item For example if the specified item has the disks value you can use the SYSTEM BOOT and Fixed Volumes templates but you cannot use the All Files or All Profiles Folder templates For more information about templates see Selection rules for volumes and Selection rules for files and folders 4 To add another template repeat the step 3 Example The following example illustrates how to replace a directly specified item with selection templates The original section lt specific gt lt backup_type gt disks lt backup_
425. t Services Timer service is running stop the service and wait for a few minutes for any running stored procedures to complete Do not restart the service until you have recovered all the databases that you need to recover 2 If you are recovering the database to the original location on the disk do the following a Bring the destination database offline b Recover the database files as described in Recovering SQL Server database files from a disk backup p 208 except for the database attachment step the database is already attached c Bring the recovered database online If you are recovering the database to another location on the disk recover the database files as described in Recovering SQL Server database files from a disk backup p 208 including the database attachment step 3 Start the Windows SharePoint Services Timer service To recover a content database to another SQL server of the original farm 1 Remove from the SharePoint farm the database that you will later recover To do this run the following command on a front end Web server In SharePoint 2010 Dismount SPContentDatabase lt database gt If you have multiple content databases that have the same name you must use the content database GUID in this command instead of using the content database name To retrieve the GUID of the content database run the Get SPContentDatabase cmdlet with no arguments In SharePoint 2007 stsadm url lt web applica
426. t available when operating under bootable media The option enables you to receive WinPopup notifications about the backup task s successful completion failure or need for interaction The preset is Disabled Before configuring WinPopup notifications make sure the Messenger service is started on both the machine executing the task and the machine that will receive messages The Messenger service is not started by default in the Microsoft Windows Server 2003 family Change the service Startup mode to Automatic and start the service To configure WinPopup notifications 1 Select the Send WinPopup notifications check box 2 In the Machine name field enter the name of the machine to which notifications will be sent Multiple names are not supported Under Send notifications select the appropriate check boxes as follows When backup completes successfully to send notification when the backup operation is completed successfully When backup fails to send notification when the backup operation is failed When user interaction is required to send notification during the operation when user interaction is required Click Send test WinPopup message to check if the settings are correct 4 6 17 Pre Post commands This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and PE based bootable media The option enables you to define the commands to be automatically executed before and after the backup pr
427. t in the pop up window By selecting the existing archive you are meddling in the area of another backup plan that uses the archive This is not an issue if the other plan is discontinued However you should generally follow the rule one backup plan one archive Doing the opposite will not prevent the program from functioning but is not practical or efficient except for some specific cases Why two or more plans should not back up to the same archive 1 Backing up different sources to the same archive makes it difficult to use archive When it comes to recovery every second counts and you might be lost in the archive content Backup plans that operate with the same archive should back up the same data items say both plans back up volume C 2 Applying multiple retention rules to an archive makes the archive content unpredictable Since each of the rules will be applied to the entire archive the backups belonging to one backup plan can be easily deleted along with the backups belonging to the other You should not expect the classic behavior of the GFS and Tower of Hanoi backup schemes Normally each complex backup plan should back up to its own archive 4 2 4 1 Selecting backup destinations Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 lets you back up data to various physical storages Destination Details Online backup storage To back up data to Acronis Online Backup Storage click Log in and specify the credentials to lo
428. t management Web page gt Initial Seeding Recovery tab gt Orders in process gt Initial Seeding orders gt Datacenter address 7 On the same Web page mark the order as shipped and track p 249 the order status 8 Once you observe that the backup has been uploaded on the online storage you can edit the backup plan to do incremental backups In Backup scheme select the desired backup scheme and specify its settings Click Save When started manually or on schedule your backup plan will add incremental backups to the initial backup stored in the online storage 13 1 6 9 How to package a hard drive for shipment It is very important that your hard drive be packaged carefully Careful packaging will protect your drive from any damage during shipment 247 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Hard drive types Acronis accepts hard disk drives of the following interface types IDE ATA SATA USB connected drives SCSI drives are not accepted Packaging If possible use the original packaging Otherwise packaging materials can be obtained at any shipping outlet or stationary store You should also include all necessary cables or adapters to the drive Acronis will not be able to process your initial seeding request if there are no cables included The following are instructions about how to package your hard disk drive Step 1 Delicately remove your hard disk drive from the machine
429. t point for example mnt backup it behaves as a fixed drive The method of working with removable disk libraries multi cartridge devices depends on the device type brand and configuration Therefore each case should be considered individually Vaults on removable devices Before backing up a machine to a removable device you can create a personal vault p 149 If you do not want to the software will automatically create a personal vault in the drive folder selected for backing up Limitation 154 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Vaults created on removable devices do not have the Data view p 104 tab Usage modes of removable devices When creating a backup plan p 34 you can choose whether to use your removable device as a fixed drive or as removable media The Fixed drive mode presumes that the removable device will always be attached to the machine The Removable media mode is selected by default When you back up using the Back up now feature or under bootable media the removable device is always used in the Removable media mode The difference between the two modes is mostly related to retention and replication of backups Functionality Fixed drive Removable media If there is insufficient space to continue backing up the software will prompt you to manually free up disk space insert new media You can set retention rules p 74 for backups stored on the device
430. ta backed up to Acronis Online Backup Storage Data backed up using Acronis True Image Echo or earlier product versions Data backed up using the simplified backup naming Solution To be able to browse such data use the Archive view tab of the respective vault 5 1 2 Access credentials for location Specify the credentials required for access to the location where the backup is stored To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Use the task credentials The software will access the location using the credentials of the task account specified in the Task parameters section Use the following credentials The software will access the location using the credentials you specify Use this option if the task account does not have access permissions to the location You might need to provide special credentials for a network share or a storage node vault Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer 5 1 3 Access credentials for destination To specify credentials 1 Select one of the fo
431. tamp or by comparing the file contents to those stored in the archive The preset is Enabled Incremental or differential backup captures only data changes To speed up the backup process the program determines whether a file has changed or not by the file size and the date time when the file was last modified Disabling this feature will make the program compare the entire file contents to those stored in the archive 4 6 11 File level backup snapshot This option is effective only for file level backup in Windows and Linux operating systems This option defines whether to back up files one by one or by taking an instant data snapshot Note Files that are stored on network shares are always backed up one by one The preset is Create snapshot if it is possible Select one of the following Always create a snapshot The snapshot enables backing up of all files including files opened for exclusive access The files will be backed up at the same point in time Choose this setting only if these factors are critical that is backing up files without a snapshot does not make sense To use a snapshot the backup plan has to run under the account with the Administrator or Backup Operator privileges If a snapshot cannot be taken the backup will fail Create a snapshot if it is possible Back up files directly if taking a snapshot is not possible Do not create a snapshot Always back up files directly Administrator or Bac
432. that can run in the preinstallation environment WinPE proved to be the most convenient bootable solution in large environments with heterogeneous hardware Advantages Using Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 in Windows Preinstallation Environment provides more functionality than using Linux based bootable media Having booted PC compatible hardware into WinPE you can use not only Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Agent but also PE commands and scripts and other plug ins you ve added to the PE PE based bootable media helps overcome some Linux related bootable media issues such as support for certain RAID controllers or certain levels of RAID arrays only Media based on PE 2 x that is Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008 kernel allows for dynamic loading of the necessary device drivers Limitation 171 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 PE based bootable media does not support UEFI 9 1 How to create bootable media To enable creating physical media the machine must have a CD DVD recording drive or allow a flash drive to be attached To enable PXE or WDS RIS configuration the machine must have a network connection Bootable Media Builder can also create an ISO image of a bootable disk to burn it later on a blank disk Bootable Media Builder does not require a license if installed together with an agent All add ons to the agent if installed will be available in a rescue environment To use a media
433. the command execution arguments if required 4 Select the Fail the task if the command execution fails check box if successful execution of the command is critical for you The command is considered failed if its exit code is not equal to zero If the command execution fails the task run result will be set to Failed When the check box is not selected the command execution result does not affect the task execution failure or success You can track the command execution result by exploring the Log view 5 Click Test command to check if the command is correct A post recovery command will not be executed if the recovery proceeds with reboot 5 7 8 Recovery priority This option is effective for both Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media The priority of a process running in a system determines the amount of CPU and system resources allocated to that process Decreasing the recovery priority will free more resources for other applications Increasing the recovery priority might speed up the recovery process by requesting the operating system to allocate more resources to the application that will perform the recovery However the resulting effect will depend on the overall CPU usage and other factors like disk I O speed or network traffic The preset is Normal To specify the recovery process priority Select one of the following Low to minimize resourc
434. the new file system options You can choose one of the Windows file systems FAT16 disabled if the Volume Size is more than 2 GB FAT32 disabled if the Volume Size is more than 2 TB or NTFS In the text window you will be able to enter the volume label if necessary by default this window is empty In setting the cluster size you can choose between any number in the preset amount for each file system Note the program suggests the cluster size best suited to the volume with the chosen file system 3 If you click OK to proceed with the Format Volume operation you ll add a pending operation of formatting a volume To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 197 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them The new volume structure will be graphically represented in the Disk management view 197 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 If you set a 64K cluster size for FAT16 FAT32 or an 8KB 64KB cluster size for NTFS Windows can mount the volume but some programs e g Setup programs might calculate its disk space incorrectly 10 8 Pending operations All operations which were prepared by the user in manual mode or with the aid of a wizard are considered pending until the user issues the specific command for the changes to be made permanent Until then Acronis Disk Director Lite will only demonstrate the new volume structure that will result from th
435. the pre post data capture commands will be executed before and after the data capture process This takes seconds The entire backup procedure may take much longer depending on the amount of data to be backed up Therefore the database or application idle time will be minimal To specify pre post data capture commands 1 Enable pre post data capture commands execution by checking the following options Execute before the data capture Execute after the data capture 2 Do any of the following Click Edit to specify a new command or a batch file Select the existing command or the batch file from the drop down list 3 Click OK 96 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 4 6 18 1 Pre data capture command To specify a command batch file to be executed before data capture 1 In the Command field type a command or browse to a batch file The program does not support interactive commands i e commands that require user input for example pause 2 In the Working directory field specify a path to a directory where the command batch file will be executed 3 In the Arguments field specify the command s execution arguments if required 4 Depending on the result you want to obtain select the appropriate options as described in the table below 5 Click Test command to check if the command is correct Check box Selection Fail the backup task if the command execution fails Sele
436. thods are available Full and incremental backup methods are available through several backup schemes Regardless of the backup scheme the first task run produces a full backup subsequent task runs produce incremental backups The following backup schemes are available Manual start postponed start You can run the task again manually Simple start on schedule With this backup scheme you can set up a retention rule to automatically delete old backups GFS Grandfather Father Son start on schedule You specify which of the daily backups to consider as weekly backups and monthly backups You can set up separate retention rules for daily weekly and monthly backups Tower of Hanoi start on schedule You set up the number of levels This is the number of backups stored at a time The excessive backups will be deleted in a manner that leaves more recovery points for recent dates and fewer recovery points for older dates An additional backup scheme that is available only for online storage is Initial seeding With this scheme the backup starts immediately to a local destination and using the full backup method To use this scheme you need a license for the Initial Seeding p 51 service 13 1 5 2 What recovery methods are available There are two methods to recover your data from Acronis Online Backup Storage 244 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Recovering disks or files by
437. ths to the folders where the archives are stored When creating a backup plan or a task that requires selection of an archive or an archive destination place the list of vaults will be available for quick access without drilling down through the folders tree Easy archive management A vault is available for access from the Navigation pane Having selected the vault you can browse the archives stored there and perform the following archive management operations Get a list of backups included in each archive Recover data from a backup Examine backup content Validate all archives in the vault or individual archives or backups Mount a volume backup to copy files from the backup to a physical disk Safely delete archives and backups from the archives Creating vaults is highly recommended but is not obligatory You may choose not to use the shortcuts and always specify the location path Creating a vault results in adding the vault name to the Vaults section of the Navigation pane Vaults view Vaults on the navigation pane top item of the vaults tree Click this item to display personal vaults To perform actions on any vault use the toolbar that is located at the top of the Vaults view See the Actions on personal vaults p 148 section Personal vaults These vaults are available when the console is connected to a managed machine Click any vault in the vaults tree to open the detailed view
438. tion refer to the Online backup p 242 section You can also enable Acronis Universal Restore by using an additional license To change a license 1 Click Help gt Change license 2 Click Change click Change and then click Use the following license keys 3 Enter the new license key If you have a license key for Acronis Universal Restore you can add it here Please do not forget that you cannot enable Acronis Universal Restore while using a trial product version 12 5 Collecting system information The system information collection tool gathers information about the machine to which the management console is connected and saves it to a file You may want to provide this file when contacting Acronis technical support This option is available under bootable media and for machines where Agent for Windows or Agent for Linux is installed To collect system information 1 In the management console select from the top menu Help gt Collect system information from machine name 2 Specify where to save the file with system information 12 6 Adjusting machine options The machine options define the general behavior of all Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 agents operating on the managed machine and so the options are considered machine specific To access the machine options connect the console to the managed machine and then select Options gt Machine options from the top menu 12 6 1 Additional settings S
439. tion url gt o deletecontentdb databasename lt database gt 218 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 2 Recover the database files as described in Recovering SQL Server database files from a disk backup p 208 including the database attachment step 3 Attach the recovered database to the SharePoint farm To do this run the following command on a front end Web server In SharePoint 2010 Mount SPContentDatabase lt database gt DatabaseServer lt database server gt WebApplication lt site url gt In SharePoint 2007 stsadm exe o addcontentdb url lt site url gt databasename lt database gt databaseserver lt database server gt 11 5 2 Recovering configuration and service databases Configuration and service databases must be synchronized with other databases Hence it is recommended to recover configuration and service databases either along with content databases or to the latest point in time if content databases do not need recovery The configuration database contains hostnames of the farm s servers Therefore you can recover the configuration database only to the original SharePoint farm Service databases can be recovered to a non original farm To recover the configuration database in SharePoint 2010 1 Stop the SharePoint services a On the server that is running the Central Administration site in the Services snap in stop the following services SharePoint 2010 Admini
440. to backup splitting p 84 settings the same indexing is used to also name parts of the backup The file name for the next backup will have the next available index For example suppose that the first backup of the archive MyData has been split in two parts Then the file names for this backup are MyData1 tib and MyData2 tib The second backup supposing that it is not split will be named MyData3 tib 4 3 3 Usage examples This section provides examples of how you can use simplified file naming 4 3 3 1 Example 1 Daily backup replacing the old one Consider the following scenario You want to perform a daily full backup of your machine You want to store the backup on a locally attached USB hard drive in the file MyMachine tib You want each new backup to replace the old one In this scenario create a backup plan with a daily schedule When creating the backup plan specify the USB hard drive as the archive location specify MyMachine as the archive name select the Name backup files using the archive name check box and select Full as the backup type Result The archive consists of a single file MyMachine tib This file is deleted before creating a new backup If you choose to back up to a locally attached RDX drive or USB flash drive you will not see the Name backup files using the archive name check box Instead make sure that the removable device mode p 153 is set to Removable media 4 3 3 2
441. type gt lt disk_level_options gt lt file_level_options gt lt inclusion_rules gt lt specific gt The section after applying the selection templates 229 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 lt specific gt lt backup_type gt disks lt backup_type gt lt disk_level_options gt lt file_level_options gt lt inclusion_rules gt lt rules_type gt disks lt rules_type gt lt rules gt lt rule gt BOOT lt rule gt lt rule gt SYSTEM lt rule gt lt rules gt lt inclusion_rules gt lt specific gt 12 1 4 Deploying backup plans as files Assume that you need to apply one and the same backup plan to multiple machines A good decision is to export the backup plan from one machine and deploy it to all the other machines How it works A dedicated folder for storing deployed plans exists on every machine where an agent is installed The agent tracks changes in the dedicated folder As soon as a new xml file appears in the dedicated folder the agent imports the backup plan from that file If you change or delete an xml file in the dedicated folder the agent automatically changes or deletes the appropriate backup plan Editing the export file A backup plan imported in such way cannot be edited through the graphical user interface You can edit the export file p 226 with a text editor either before or after the deployment If you edit the file before the deployment th
442. u need dynamic volumes create a volume group by using the disk management functionality p 192 6 Select Actions gt Recover When configuring a recovery Enable Universal Restore for Linux or Universal Restore for Windows In the latter case provide the drivers that you prepared When recovering Linux If you need logical volumes click Apply RAID LVM when setting up the recovery The LVM structure will be automatically recreated during the recovery 7 Configure other recovery settings and perform a recovery in the same way as onto a physical machine 146 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 7 Storing the backed up data 7 1 Vaults A vault is a location for storing backup archives For ease of use and administration a vault is associated with the archives metadata Referring to this metadata makes for fast and convenient operations with archives and backups stored in the vault A vault can be organized on a local or networked drive or detachable media There are no settings for limiting a vault size or number of backups in a vault You can limit the size of each archive using cleanup but the total size of archives stored in the vault is limited by the storage size only Why create vaults We recommend that you create a vault in each destination where you are going to store backup archives This will ease your work as follows Quick access to the vault You will not have to remember pa
443. u recover a secured file folder on a machine without the user account specified in the permissions you may not be able to read or modify this file To completely eliminate this kind of problem disable preserving file security settings in archives The recovered files and folders will always inherit the permissions from the folder to which they are recovered or from the disk if recovered to the root Alternatively you can disable recovery p 131 of the security settings even if they are available in the archive The result will be the same the files will inherit the permissions from the parent folder To access file or folder NTFS permissions select Properties gt Security 4 6 13 Media components This option is effective for both Windows and Linux operating systems when the backup destination is CD DVD or Blue ray Disc BD When backing up to this media you can make this media work as regular Linux based bootable media p 265 by writing additional components to it As a result you will not need a separate rescue disc The preset is No bootable components Choose one of the following components you want to put on the bootable media Acronis Bootable Agent is a bootable rescue utility based on Linux kernel that includes most of the functionality of the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 agent Put this component on the media if you want more functionality during recovery You will be able to configure the recovery
444. u want to obtain select the appropriate options as described in the table below 5 Click Test command to check if the command is correct Check box Selection Fail the task if the command execution fails Selected Cleared Selected Cleared Do not back up until the command execution is complete Selected Selected Cleared Cleared Result Preset Perform the backup only after the command is successfully executed Fail the task if the command execution fails Perform the backup after the command is executed despite execution failure or success N A Perform the backup concurrently with the command execution and irrespective of the command execution result A command is considered failed if its exit code is not equal to zero 95 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 4 6 17 2 Post backup command To specify a command executable file to be executed after the backup is completed 1 In the Command field type a command or browse to a batch file 2 In the Working directory field specify a path to a directory where the command batch file will be executed 3 In the Arguments field specify the command execution arguments if required 4 Select the Fail the task if the command execution fails check box if successful execution of the command is critical for you The command is considered failed if its exit code is not equal to zero If the command execution fails the program will rem
445. ugh the system downtime is minimal there may be reduced performance during recovery Usage scenarios 1 The system uptime is one of the efficiency criteria Examples Client oriented online services Web retailers polling stations 2 The system storage space ratio is heavily biased toward storage 123 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Some machines are being used as storage facilities where the operating system claims a small space segment and all other disk space is committed to storage such as movies sounds or other multimedia files Some of these storage volumes can be extremely large as compared to the system and so practically all the recovery time will be dedicated to recovering the files which might be used much later on if in any near future at all If you opt for Acronis Active Restore the system will be operational in a short time Users will be able to open the necessary files from the storage and use them while the rest of the files which are not immediately necessary are being recovered in the background Examples movie collection storage music collection storage multimedia storage How to use 1 Back up the system disk or volume to a location accessible through the system s BIOS This may be Acronis Secure Zone a USB hard drive a flash drive or any internal hard drive If your operating system and its loader reside on different volumes always include both volumes in the backup The vo
446. ught of as an intermediate location used for backup when an ordinary location is temporarily unavailable or connected through a slow or busy channel Advantages Acronis Secure Zone Enables recovery of a disk to the same disk where the disk s backup resides Offers a cost effective and handy method for protecting data from software malfunction virus attack operator error Since it is internal archive storage it eliminates the need for a separate media or network connection to back up or recover the data This is especially useful for mobile users Can serve as a primary destination when using replication of backups p 73 Limitations The Acronis Secure Zone cannot be organized on a dynamic disk 7 2 1 Creating Acronis Secure Zone You can create Acronis Secure Zone while the operating system is running or using bootable media To create Acronis Secure Zone perform the following steps Location and size Disk p 151 Choose a hard disk if several on which to create the zone Acronis Secure Zone is created using unallocated space if available or at the expense of the volume s free space Size p 151 Specify the exact size of the zone Moving or resizing of locked volumes such as the volume containing the currently active operating system requires a reboot Security Password p 151 Optional Protect the Acronis Secure Zone from unauthorized access with a password The prompt
447. uired location in the tree p 104 2 In the table to the right of the tree select the archive The table displays the names of the archives contained in each location you select While you are reviewing the location content archives can be added deleted or modified by another user or by the program itself according to scheduled operations Use the Refresh button to refresh the list of archives 3 Click OK 8 2 2 Backup selection To specify a backup s to export 1 At the top of the window select the respective check box es To ensure that you choose the right backup click on the backup and look at the bottom table that displays the volumes contained in the selected backup To obtain information on a volume right click it and then select Information 2 Click OK 8 2 3 Access credentials for source Specify credentials required for access to the location where the source archive or the backup is stored 162 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Use the current user credentials The software will access the location using the credentials of the current user Use the following credentials The program will access the location using the credentials you specify Use this option if the task account does not have access permissions to the location You might need to provide special credentials for a network share or a storage node vault
448. ume shadow copy writers for those applications are turned on by examining the list of writers that are present in the operating system To view this list run the following command vssadmin list writers Note In Microsoft Windows Small Business Server 2003 the writer for Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 is turned off by default For instructions on how to turn it on see the following Microsoft knowledge base article http support microsoft com kb 838183 101 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 5 Recovery When it comes to data recovery first consider the most functional method connect the console to the managed machine running the operating system and create the recovery task If the machine s operating system fails to start or you need to recover data to bare metal boot the machine from the bootable media p 265 or using Acronis Startup Recovery Manager and configure recovery Acronis Universal Restore lets you recover and boot up operating systems on dissimilar hardware or a virtual machine Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 enables you to transfer Windows operating systems between BIOS based hardware and hardware that supports Unified Extensible Firmware Interface UEFI See the Recovering BIOS based systems to UEFI based and back p 118 section for more details A Windows system can be brought online in seconds while it is still being recovered Using the proprietary Acronis Active Restore p 122 tech
449. ume will be included in the backup If the Mount points option is disabled the mount point in the backup will be empty During recovery of a parent folder the mount point content will or will not be recovered depending on whether the Mount points option for recovery p 131 is enabled or disabled If you select the mount point directly or select any folder within the mounted volume the selected folders will be considered as ordinary folders They will be backed up regardless of the state of the Mount points option and recovered regardless of the state of the Mount points option for recovery p 131 The preset is Disabled Tip You can back up Hyper V virtual machines residing on a cluster shared volume by backing up the required files or the entire volume with file level backup Just power off the virtual machines to be sure that they are backed up in a consistent state Example Let s assume that the C Data1 folder is a mount point for the mounted volume The volume contains folders Folder1 and Folder2 You create a backup plan for file level backup of your data If you select the check box for volume C and enable the Mount points option the C Data1 folder in your backup will contain Folder1 and Folder2 When recovering the backed up data be aware of proper using the Mount points option for recovery p 131 If you select the check box for volume C and disable the Mount points option the C Data1 folder in your backup w
450. up is not deleted until all backups that directly depend on it become subject to deletion as well This is why you might see a backup marked with the icon for a few days past its expected expiration date Examples Each day of the past week each week of the past month Let us consider a GFS backup scheme that many may find useful Back up files every day including weekends Be able to recover files as of any date over the past seven days Have access to weekly backups of the past month Keep monthly backups indefinitely Backup scheme parameters can then be set up as follows Start backup at 11 00 PM Back up on All days Weekly monthly Saturday for example Keep backups Daily 1 week Weekly 1 month Monthly indefinitely As a result an archive of daily weekly and monthly backups will be created Daily backups will be available for seven days since creation For instance a daily backup of Sunday January 1 will be 45 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 available through next Sunday January 8 the first weekly backup the one of Saturday January 7 will be stored on the system until February 7 Monthly backups will never be deleted Limited storage If you do not want to arrange a vast amount of space to store a huge archive you may set up a GFS scheme so as to make your backups more short lived at the same time ensuring that your in
451. upted in Acronis Secure Zone or if the original drive was replaced with a new one In these cases you can revert the system to the factory settings by using the factory bootable media if it was shipped with the machine To start the operation boot the machine into the factory bootable media and click Revert to factory settings in the appeared screen Once you confirm the operation Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 will create Acronis Secure Zone and copy the factory image to it Then it will re deploy the factory image as described above For additional information refer to Acronis Secure Zone p 150 and Acronis Startup Recovery Manager p 181 5 7 Default recovery options Each Acronis agent has its own default recovery options Once an agent is installed the default options have pre defined values which are referred to as presets in the documentation When creating a recovery task you can either use a default option or override the default option with the custom value that will be specific for this task only You can also customize a default option itself by changing its value against the pre defined one The new value will be used by default in all recovery tasks you will create later on this machine To view and change the default recovery options connect the console to the managed machine and then select Options gt Default backup and recovery options gt Default recovery options from the top menu Availability of th
452. uration as the original machine During recovery to the New virtual machine destination p 141 the software creates the virtual machine from a backup you already have You can change the configuration of the virtual machine Depending on the agent that performs the conversion Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 can create a virtual machine of any of these formats Agent for Windows Agent for Linux VMware Workstation Microsoft Virtual PC includes Windows Virtual PC Citrix XenServer OVA 137 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Parallels Workstation Kernel based Virtual Machine Red Hat Enterprise Virtualization RAW format Agent for ESX i VMware ESX i Agent for Hyper V Microsoft Hyper V 6 2 1 Considerations before conversion Converting a UEFI based machine Virtual machines that use Unified Extensible Hardware Interface UEFI are currently supported in VMware ESXi 5 only If the target virtualization platform is ESXi 5 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 creates a UEFI based machine Otherwise the resulting machine will use the BIOS boot firmware Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 adjusts the Windows boot mode to the BIOS boot firmware and ensures that Windows remains bootable For Linux operating systems changing the boot mode from UEFI to BIOS is not supported When converting a UEFI based machine running Linux make sure that it uses GR
453. user specified account Log on as a service Adjust memory quotas for a process Replace a process level token Modify firmware environment values Backup Operators for any account Administrators for new account only BackupAndRecovery Encryption Global MMS Acronis VSS Provider Auxiliary service created only in a Windows Server operating system Using a Volume Shadow Copy VSS provider p 99 that comes with Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Local System No additional privileges Acronis Removable Storage Management Service Auxiliary service Managing locally attached tape devices Local System No additional privileges Common services for Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 and other Acronis products The following services are shared with other Acronis products installed on the machine These services run under a system account No additional privileges are given to the account Service name Purpose Account used by the service Acronis Remote Agent Service Providing connectivity among Acronis components Local System Windows Vista and later or NetworkService earlier than Windows Vista Acronis Scheduler2 Service Providing scheduling for tasks performed by Acronis components Local System 27 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Dependencies on other services Acronis Managed Machine Service depends on the following standard W
454. val and the number of attempts The attempts will be stopped as soon as the operation succeeds OR the specified number of attempts is performed depending on which comes first For example if the backup destination on the network becomes unavailable or not reachable the program will attempt to reach the destination every 30 seconds but no more than 5 times The attempts will be stopped as soon as the connection is resumed OR the specified number of attempts is performed depending on which comes first Ignore bad sectors The preset is Disabled When the option is disabled the program will display a pop up window each time it comes across a bad sector and ask for a user decision as to whether to continue or stop the backup procedure In order to back up the valid information on a rapidly dying disk enable ignoring bad sectors The rest of the data will be backed up and you will be able to mount the resulting disk backup and extract valid files to another disk 4 6 9 Event tracing It is possible to duplicate log events of the backup operations performed on the managed machine in the Application Event Log of Windows or send the events to the specified SNMP managers 4 6 9 1 SNMP notifications This option is effective for both Windows and Linux operating systems 88 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 This option is not available when operating under the bootable media The option defines whether the agent s
455. vault or path to the folder where the archive is stored Archive comments comments on the archive if provided 2nd 3rd 4th 5th location names of the locations to which the archive was copied or moved if specified in the backup plan Settings The Settings tab displays the following information Backup scheme the selected backup scheme and all its settings with schedules Validation if specified events before or after which the validation is performed and validation schedule If the validation is not set the Never value is displayed Backup options backup options changed against the default values 12 1 6 Task activity details The Task activity details window also duplicated on the Information panel aggregates on several tabs all information about the selected task or activity 232 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 When a task or activity requires user interaction a message and action buttons appear above the tabs The message contains a brief description of the problem The buttons allow you to retry or stop the task or the activity 12 2 Log The local event log stores the history of operations performed by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 on the machine To view a plain list of log entries select Events in the Display drop down list to view log entries grouped by activities select Activities The details of the selected log entry or activity are shown in
456. ve in this case you need to specify the archive only Backups you need to specify the archive first and then select the desired backup s in this archive Browse 161 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Select the Archive p 161 or the Backups p 161 Show access credentials p 161 Optional Provide credentials for accessing the source if the task account does not have enough privileges to access it Where to export Browse p 162 Specify the path to the location where the new archive will be created Be sure to provide a distinct name and comment for the new archive Full cataloging Fast cataloging Not available under bootable media or for locations that do not support cataloging Select whether full or fast cataloging will be performed on the exported backups For more information about the cataloging see Backup cataloging p 82 Show access credentials p 163 Optional Provide credentials for the destination if the task credentials do not have enough privileges to access it After you have performed all the required steps click OK to start the export task As a result the program shows the Execution state of the task in the Backup plans and tasks view When the task ends the Task Information window shows the final state of the task execution 8 2 1 Archive selection To specify an archive to export 1 Enter the full path to the archive location in the Path field or select the req
457. ver C Cataloging Cataloging a backup p 263 adds the contents of the backup to the data catalog p 267 Backups are cataloged automatically as soon as they are created Backups stored on a storage node p 274 are cataloged by the node Backups stored anywhere else are cataloged by the agent p 263 In the backup options p 264 a user can choose between full and fast cataloging Full cataloging can also be started manually Centralized backup plan A backup plan p 264 that is deployed to a managed machine p 272 from the management server p 272 Such plan can be modified only by editing the original backup plan on the management server 266 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Centralized management Management of the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 infrastructure through a central management unit known as Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 Management Server p 272 The centralized management operations include creating centralized backup plans p 265 for the registered machines p 273 and groups of machines creating and managing static p 273 and dynamic groups p 269 of machines p 272 managing the tasks p 274 existing on the machines creating and managing centralized vaults p 266 for storing archives managing storage nodes p 274 monitoring activities of the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 components creating reports viewing the
458. view Notifications p 237 set up e mail notifications about alerts Settings p 236 specify whether to move inactive alerts to the Accepted alerts table automatically set how long to keep the accepted alerts in the Accepted alerts table 12 4 Changing a license By changing the license you switch to a different version or edition of the product The following table summarizes the available options Switching a license Why you may need it trial gt full Upgrade from trial to full product version trial gt full different edition The edition you bought differs from the edition of the trial version full gt full different edition You used a server edition license for a workstation Now you want to assign the workstation a workstation license After that you can revoke the server one and use it for a server backing up to the online storage gt trial or full After backing up to Acronis Online Backup Storage only you decided to try or buy an edition with more functionalities 235 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 trial gt backing up to the online storage After trying the product you decided to back up to Acronis Online Backup Storage only Switching between advanced and stand alone editions is not possible Prior to backing up to the online storage you need to activate a subscription for the online backup service on the machine s you want to back up For more informa
459. view of the Navigation pane 12 6 4 E mail settings The option enables you to configure e mail settings to send notifications about alerts which occurred on the managed machine The notification schedule and the types of alerts to send are configured in Machine options gt E mail settings gt Alert notifications p 237 The preset is Disabled Note Alerts warn only about problems Therefore e mail notifications about successful backup or recovery operations will not be sent These e mail notifications are configured in Backup options gt Notifications gt E mail p 92 and in Recovery options gt Notifications gt E mail p 132 respectively To configure e mail notification 1 In the E mail addresses field type the destination e mail address You can enter several addresses separated by semicolons 2 In the Subject field type the notification subject or leave the default value Variables are not supported in this field 3 In the SMTP server field enter the name of the outgoing mail server SMTP 4 In the Port field set the port of the outgoing mail server By default the port is set to 25 5 If the outgoing mail server requires authentication enter User name and Password of the sender s e mail account If the SMTP server does not require authentication leave the User name and Password fields blank If you are not sure whether the SMTP server requires authentication contact your network administrator or you
460. will be recovered without recreating a full path unless you clear the Recover without full path check box Recovery agent Select Acronis Agent that will perform file recovery The agent selection is available only when the software cannot detect the agent on the machine the files will be recovered to Overwriting Choose what to do if the program finds in the target folder a file with the same name as in the archive Overwrite existing file this will give the file in the backup priority over the file on the hard disk Overwrite existing file if it is older this will give priority to the most recent file modification whether it be in the backup or on the disk 114 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Do not overwrite existing file this will give the file on the hard disk priority over the file in the backup If you allow files to be overwritten you still have an option to prevent overwriting of specific files by excluding them from the recovery operation Recovery exclusions p 114 Specify files and folders you do not wish to be recovered Recovery exclusions Set up exclusions for the specific files and folders you do not wish to recover Note Exclusions override selection of data items to recover For example if you select to recover file MyFile tmp and to exclude all tmp files file MyFile tmp will not be recovered Use the Add Edit Remove and Remove All buttons to create the
461. wing commands chroot mnt system sbin grub or chroot mnt system usr sbin grub 9 Specify the disk on which GRUB is located typically the boot or root partition root hd0 0 10 Install GRUB For example to install GRUB in the master boot record MBR of the first disk run the following command setup hd0 11 Exit the GRUB shell quit 12 Unmount the mounted file systems and then reboot umount mnt system dev umount mnt system proc umount mnt system boot umount mnt system reboot 13 Reconfigure the bootloader by using tools and documentation from the Linux distribution that you use For example in Debian and Ubuntu you may need to edit some commented lines in the boot grub menu lst file and then run the update grub script otherwise the changes might not take effect 5 5 2 About Windows loaders Windows NT 2000 XP 2003 A part of the loader resides in the partition boot sector the rest is in the files ntldr boot ini ntdetect com ntbootdd sys boot ini is a text file that contains the loader configuration Example boot loader timeout 30 default multi 0 disk 0 rdisk 0 partition 1 WINDOWS operating systems multi 0 disk 0 rdisk 0 partition 1 WINDOWS Microsoft Windows XP Professional noexecute optin fastdetect Windows Vista 2008 A part of the loader resides in the partition boot sector the rest is in the files bootmgr boot bcd At starting Windows boot bcd is mounted
462. work folder Make the inactivity time contain the working hours Replication will be performed after the working hours when network load is lower 4 6 20 Sector by sector backup The option is effective only for disk level backup To create an exact copy of a disk or volume on a physical level select the Back up sector by sector check box The resulting backup will be equal in size to the disk being backed up if the Compression level p 85 option is set to None Use the sector by sector backup for backing up drives with unrecognized or unsupported file systems and other proprietary data formats 4 6 21 Task failure handling This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media 98 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 This option determines the program behavior when any of the backup plan s tasks fails The preset is not to restart a failed task The program will try to execute the failed task again if you select the Restart a failed task check box and specify the number of attempts and the time interval between the attempts The program stops trying as soon as an attempt completes successfully OR the specified number of attempts is performed depending on which comes first If the task fails because of a mistake in the backup plan you can edit the plan while the task is in the Idle state While the task is running you have to stop
463. xecuted at a certain time and this time is outside the specified time interval For example Event Daily Every 1 day s Once at 03 00 00 PM Condition Fits time interval from 06 00 00 PM until 11 59 59 PM In this case whether and when the task will run depends on the task start conditions If the task start conditions are Skip the task execution the task will never run If the task start conditions are Wait until the conditions are met and the Run the task anyway after check box is cleared the task scheduled to run at 3 00 PM will start at 6 00 PM the time when the condition is met If the task start conditions are Wait until the conditions are met and the Run the task anyway after check box is selected with say the 1 Hour waiting time the task scheduled to run at 3 00 PM will start at 4 00 PM the time when the waiting period ends 71 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 4 4 5 4 User logged off Applies to Windows Enables to put a backup task run on hold until all users log off from Windows on the managed machine Example Run the backup task at 8 PM on the first and third Friday of every month preferably when all users are logged off If one of the users is still logged on at 11 PM run the task anyway Event Monthly Months lt All gt On lt First gt lt Third gt lt Friday gt Once at 08 00 00 PM Condition User logged off Task sta
464. xisting volumes and creating the new volumes using free space from the existing ones exist on the full version of the software so with this version deleting an existing volume sometimes might be the only way to free the necessary disk space without changing the existing disk configuration After a volume is deleted its space is added to unallocated disk space It can be used for creation of a new volume or to change another volume s type If you need to delete a volume 1 Select a hard disk and a volume to be deleted 2 Select Delete volume or a similar item in the Operations sidebar list or click the Delete the selected volume icon on the toolbar If the volume contains any data you will receive the warning that all the information on this volume will be lost irrevocably 3 By clicking OK in the Delete volume window you ll add the pending operation of volume deletion To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 197 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them 195 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 10 7 3 Set active volume If you have several primary volumes you must specify one to be the boot volume For this you can set a volume to become active A disk can have only one active volume so if you set a volume as active the volume which was active before will be automatically unset If you need to set a volume active 1 Select a
465. xport operation can be applied to A single archive an exact archive copy will be created A single backup an archive consisting of a single full backup will be created The export of an incremental or a differential backup is performed using consolidation of the preceding backups up to the nearest full backup 159 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Your choice of backups belonging to the same archive the resulting archive will contain only the specified backups Consolidation is performed as required so the resulting archive may contain full incremental and differential backups Usage scenarios Export enables you to separate a specific backup from a chain of incremental backups for fast recovery writing onto removable or detachable media or other purposes Example When backing up data to a remote location through an unstable or low bandwidth network connection such as backing up through WAN using VPN access you may want to save the initial full backup to a detachable media Then send the media to the remote location There the backup will be exported from the media to the target storage Subsequent incremental backups which are usually much smaller can be transferred over the network By exporting a managed vault to a detachable media you obtain a portable unmanaged vault that can be used in the following scenarios Keeping an off site copy of your vault or of the most important arch
466. y identify the task among the others Recovery options Optional Customize the recovery operation by configuring the recovery options such as pre post recovery commands recovery priority error handling or notification options If you do nothing in this section the default values p 127 will be used After any of the settings are changed against the default value a new line that displays the newly set value appears The setting status changes from Default to Custom Should you modify the setting again the line will display the new value unless the new value is the default one When the default value is set the line disappears Therefore in this section you always see only the settings that differ from the default values Clicking Reset to default resets all the settings to default values Task credentials Optional The task will run on behalf of the user who is creating the task You can change the task account credentials if necessary To access this setting click Show task credentials Optional Universal Restore for Windows Linux Applies to system disk or volume recovery Using Acronis Universal Restore requires a separate license Universal Restore for Windows Linux p 116 Use Acronis Universal Restore when you need to recover and boot up an operating systems on dissimilar hardware After you complete all the required steps click OK to create the recovery task 103 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2
467. y available when you have an Initial Seeding license and selected the Online Backup Storage as the backup destination The Initial Seeding service might be unavailable in your region To find more information click here http kb acronis com content 15118 Initial seeding enables you to transfer the first backup which is full and usually the largest to the online storage on a hard drive instead of over the Internet Subsequent backups which are all incremental and thus usually much smaller can be transferred over the Internet after the full backup has arrived in the online storage If you back up 10 GB of data or more initial seeding ensures faster delivery of the backed up data and lower traffic costs Please refer to the Initial Seeding FAQ p 245 section for more details 4 2 7 Archive validation Set up the validation task to check if the backed up data is recoverable If the backup could not pass the validation successfully the validation task fails and the backup plan gets the Error status To set up validation specify the following parameters 1 When to validate select when to perform the validation As the validation is a resource intensive operation it makes sense to schedule the validation to the managed machine s off peak period On the other hand if the validation is a major part of your data protection strategy and you prefer to be immediately informed whether the backed up data is 52 Copyright Acroni
468. y s 2 Every 2 hour s From 03 00 00 PM Until 07 00 00 PM 3 Effective From 09 20 2009 To not set 4 4 2 Weekly schedule Weekly schedule is effective in Windows and Linux operating systems To specify a weekly schedule In the Schedule area select the appropriate parameter as follows Every lt gt week s on lt gt Specify a certain number of weeks and the days of the week you want the task to be run For example with the Every 2 week s on Mon setting the task will be performed on Monday of every other week In the During the day execute the task area select one of the following Once at lt gt Set up the time at which the task will be run once Every lt gt From lt gt Until lt gt Set up how many times the task will be run during the specified time interval For example setting the task frequency to Every 1 hour From 10 00 00 AM until 10 00 00 PM allows the task to be run 12 times from 10 AM to 10 PM during one day In the Effective area set the following settings From lt gt Set up a date when this schedule will be enabled an effective date If this check box is cleared the task will be started on the nearest day and time you have specified above To lt gt Set up a date when this schedule will be disabled If this check box is cleared the task will be run for an indefinite number of weeks All the settings you made are displayed in
469. y to roll back to any one of multiple saved states the data changes tend to be small as compared to the total data size It is widely accepted that incremental backups are less reliable than full ones because if one backup in the chain is corrupted the next ones can no longer be used However storing multiple full backups is not an option when you need multiple prior versions of your data because reliability of an oversized archive is even more questionable Example Backing up a database transaction log Differential backup A differential backup stores changes to the data against the latest full backup You need access to the corresponding full backup to recover the data from a differential backup A differential backup is most useful when you are interested in saving only the most recent data state the data changes tend to be small as compared to the total data size The typical conclusion is differential backups take longer to do and are faster to restore while incremental ones are quicker to do and take longer to restore In fact there is no physical difference between an incremental backup appended to a full backup and a differential backup appended to the same full backup at the same point of time The above mentioned difference implies creating a differential backup after or instead of creating multiple incremental backups An incremental or differential backup created after disk defragmentation might be c
470. ype the server name or address in the Path field as follows ftp ftp_server port _number or sftp sftp_server port number To establish an active mode FTP connection use the following notation aftp ftp_server port _number If the port number is not specified port 21 is used for FTP and port 22 is used for SFTP After entering access credentials the folders on the server become available Click the appropriate folder on the server You can access the server as an anonymous user if the server enables such access To do so click Use anonymous access instead of entering credentials According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer 5 1 1 2 Data catalog Data catalog lets you easily find the required version of data and select it for recovery On a managed machine the data catalog functionality is available through the Data view tab for any vault accessible from this machine 105 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 5 may upload data catalog files from a vault to a local cache folder By default this folder is located on the disk where the operating system is installed For information about changing the default cache folder refer to the Changing the default cache folder for catalog fil
471. yper V is installed on the machine You can only create a virtual machine on the Hyper V server In the Storage step you can select the virtual machine path Virtual machines created on the server as a result of backup do not appear on the management server because such machines are not intended to be backed up Agent for Windows or Agent for Linux is installed on the machine You can choose the virtual machine type VMware Workstation Microsoft Virtual PC Parallels Workstation Red Hat Kernel based Virtual Machine KVM or Red Hat Enterprise Virtualization RHEV In the Storage step you can select the virtual machine path What is the machine s processing power Conversion will take the selected machine s CPU resource Multiple conversion tasks will be queued on that machine and it may take considerable time to complete them all Consider this when creating a centralized backup plan with conversion for multiple machines or multiple local backup plans using the same machine for conversion 140 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 What storage will be used for the virtual machines Network usage As opposed to ordinary backups TIB files virtual machine files are transferred uncompressed through the network Therefore using a SAN or a storage local to the machine that performs conversion is the best choice from the network usage standpoint A local disk is not an option though if the conversion is performed by the
472. yright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 11 Protecting applications with disk level backup This section describes how to use a disk level backup to protect applications running on Windows servers This information is valid for both physical and virtual machines no matter if the virtual machines are backed up at a hypervisor level or from inside a guest OS Disk level backup can potentially protect any VSS aware application however Acronis has tested the protection for the following applications Microsoft Exchange Server Microsoft SQL Server Active Directory Active Directory Domain Services Microsoft SharePoint Using a disk backup of an application server A disk or volume backup stores a disk or a volume file system as a whole Therefore it stores all of the information necessary for the operating system to boot It also stores all application files including database files You can use this backup in various ways depending on the situation In case of disaster you can recover the entire disk to ensure that both the operating system and applications are up and running If the operating system is intact you may need to revert an application database to a previous state To do this recover the database files and then use the native tools of the application to make the application acknowledge the database You may need to extract only a certain data item for example a PDF docume

Acronis Backup & Recovery 11.5 Server for Windows

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Acronis Backup &amp; Recovery 11.5 Server for Windows

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Acronis Backup & Recovery 11.5 Server for Windows